Home

LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS

Contents

1. ASCII representation Hexadecimal representation Current Record h UX S 00 gt 21D8 6811 003D CD55 58ED 5320 4006 1721 0 F R ZX gt 3 10 gt ED60 CD40 OODA 945A 78B7 2005 3E13 C333 05 bestespec X D b 7 20 gt 60CD 2058 11ED 60CD 1C44 20F0 210D 6206 0 D SD 3 gt 0 Rw 30 gt OOCD 2444 C233 603A F360 C630 2A15 5277 1D K gt C R C R 40 gt ED4B F960 OBED 4313 5201 0000 ED43 OF52 C ra R gt 3 UU 50 gt 210D 6122 0452 3E1C CD33 OOCD 5555 C93A M Extension R Z2 Z B 60 gt 0152 B7CC 105A FEO4 D410 5A11 ED60 CD42 D D 3 6D 3 gt By 70 gt 44C2 3360 11ED 60CD 3644 C233 6021 0D62 H D nna U 80 gt 110D 6401 0001 EDBO CDE3 5BC9 CD28 55CD 5 Drive dedke Rea ABD 90 gt DE5D C9ED 4BOF 52C5 11ED 60D5 CD42 44C2 3 6D 3 gt b a AO gt 3360 CD36 44C2 3360 210D 6211 OD61 0100 PEE R B BD BO gt O1ED BOD1 C12A 1352 B7ED 42C8 03CD 4244 3 6 UD 3 G CO gt C233 60CD 3601 028E 5544 C233 60C9 473A R 6 DO gt 0E52 B728 0721 CA3F 2220 40C9 21BD 3D36 Relative 6 6 6 6 E0 gt 8C23 36AC 1140 0019 36AA 10FB 3683 2B36 veo Byte laS R FO gt 8321 FD3D 2220 40C9 3A0E 52B7 C021 BD3D C R again Index Command Here is a sample display of the 128 byte mode Kes aa C Rea e CoR h a Roe 23s UU a Roes ao Aa BD AB sa 6D 31 ASCII e
2. new address This is useful when appending two or more files since the transfer address used would default to the transfer address of the last file read in unless otherwis specified If you had requested th driver appendage you wouldn t be able to change the transfer address entry point Query 8 OUTPUT TO DISK OR TAPE D T E C OR lt ENTER gt TO RESTART gt Again a response of E will EXIT the program while C will cancel the request and return you to the main query Just depressing lt ENTER gt will also return you to the main query Cancellation is available if you do not want to create an output file but rather want just to determine disk files load addresses If you want to create an output disk file respond with a D You will be prompted for the filespec with ENTER FILESPEC TO WRITE OUTPUT gt After entering th filespec remember CMD will be used as a default extension the output file will be written to disk using VERIFY If you want to create an output tape file respond with a T You will be prompted to enter the filename with ENTER TAPE FILE NAME gt After entering the filename up to six characters you will be prompted to ready the cassett The tape will then be written At the conclusion of the disk or tape writing operation you will receive the query Query 9 MODULE WRITE IS COMPLETE WRITE ANOTHER Y N E
3. Following is a sample display of the DEBUGger screen AF 0D 2C 1 1P BC 0D 61 gt 79 9E 77 23 05 20 F9 C9 71 E5 D6 08 38 OE El ES DE 01 04 gt 1A 4D 45 4D 20 53 49 5A 45 00 52 2F 53 20 4C 32 HL 00 54 gt 01 01 5B 1B OA 00 08 18 09 19 20 20 OB 78 B1 20 AF 00 54 Z H P BC 51 BO gt 29 29 29 29 B5 6F CD 8A 51 20 EF 1F CE 81 C9 D6 DE 06 01 gt 09 28 42 FE 19 28 39 FE OA CO D1 77 78 B7 28 CE HL 51 00 gt 02 C7 C6 02 FF CB 02 F7 10 32 E7 20 32 01 C7 43 IX 40 15 gt 01 9C 43 00 9A 00 4B 49 07 C2 FE 31 3E 20 44 4F TY 00 00 gt F3 AF C3 74 06 C3 00 40 C3 00 40 El E9 C3 9F 06 SP 41 CA gt 52 04 C3 4B DD 03 15 40 5D 45 18 43 3F 3F 4C 00 PC 00 62 gt B1 20 FB C9 31 00 06 3A EC 37 3C FE 02 D2 00 00 3E04 gt 20 34 30 20 31 35 20 3D 3E 20 20 30 31 20 39 03 3E14 gt 20 34 33 20 30 30 20 39 01 20 30 30 20 34 02 20 3E24 gt 34 39 20 20 30 37 20 03 32 20 06 05 20 33 31 20 3E34 gt 33 05 20 32 30 20 34 34 20 34 06 20 09 19 20 3D The DEBUG display contains information about the 2Z 80 microprocessor registers The display is set up in the following manner The register pairs are shown along the left side of the display from top to bottom The current contents of each register pair are shown immediately to the right of the register labels The AF and AF pairs are followed by the current status of the flag registers to the right of the register contents The other register pa
4. LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDO S LDOS LDO OS LDOS LD OS LDOS LD DOS LDOS L DOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDO S LDOS LDO OS LDOS LD OS LDOS LD DOS LDOS L DOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDO S LDOS LDO OS LDOS LD OS LDOS LD DOS LDOS L DOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO OS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LD DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO OS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LD DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO OS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS L
5. One eighth of a byte one binary digit An area in RAM that will temporarily hold information that is being passed between devices or programs The unit that represents one character to the TRS 80 It is composed of eight binary bits that are either ON 1 or OFF 0 One byte can represent a number from 0 to 255 CONFIGURATION The status of the system and physical devices that are DCB available to it This configuration may be dynamically changed with several library commands and the SYSTEM command and may be saved with a SYSGEN If the system is SYSGENed that configuration will be re established each time the machine is re BOOTed or re started This is used to indicate that a drive spec number may be inserted where this is used A drive spec must always be preceded immediately by a as shown If a drive spec is not to be given then the must not be used Device Control Block a small piece of memory used to control the status and the input and output of data between the system and the devices GLOSSARY DEVICE A physical device located outside of the CPU Central Processing Unit whose purpose is to transmit receive data to from the operating system The operating system is in total control of any activity directed to from a DEVICE devspec The name associated with a device by which it is referenced A devspec will ALWAY
6. All functions and procedures ar specified by responding to a series of queries Som queries request yes no responses abbreviated Y N some request disk tape responses abbreviated D T while others request specific information i e fil names new addresses etc Most yes no and disk tape responses can also be answered with a C to cancel the request and return to the main prompt as noted above If you want to return to LDOS responding with E for EXIT will return you to the respective system Each query displays the valid responses acceptabl to it All queries accept lower case responses as well as upper case Query 1 ADDRESS LOAD LOG TO PRINTER Y N E gt The address load log will be displayed only for files read in from disk The timing on tape reads is too critical to perform the extra processing necessary to detect the load limits and display them during a tape read If you are a disk user have a line printer and want this log displayed on your printer respond with a Y otherwise respond with an N If you want to exit CMDFILE enter E This query is referred to as the main query Whenever it is displayed the memory buffer used to store input files will be reset to its beginning position to initialize for a series of input requests This effectively clears the input buffer Query 2 INPUT FROM DISK OR TAPE D T E C Q OR lt ENTER gt TO END READS gt
7. 4 You will be allowed to locate a Hex load address in a load module format file and calculate the load position of a specified byte This feature will facilitate the inspection and editing of a load module file Just type in the load address in question and FED will position the display to that byte Another extremely powerful feature is the reverse of the address location command FED will calculate where in memory a specific byte pointed to by the cursor will load With these two features it is possible to write machine language routines directly to disk Direct patches are made quickly and easily Even X patches can be installed by the experienced programmer FED FILE EDITOR Page 1 5 Complete listing of a file or individual record to a printer is supported Many safeguards have been added to make it difficult to LOCK UP the system if a printer is deselected out of paper etc 6 FED includes a 256 byte display mode and an extended 128 byte display Editing utilities in the past allowed for 256 byte displays only By using this format exclusively the variations of an ASCII HEX display are limited But by having a 128 character display mode the extra space makes it more visually appealing The filespec drivespec record number input amp output can be displayed horizontally instead of vertically Here is a sample display of the 256 byte mode
8. This query cycles anytime CMDFILE is ready to read in another file Any file read in will be appended to any file previously input since the main query prompt If you want to read ina disk file respond with a D If the file is to be input from tape respond with a T You may quit and return to LDOS by entering an E A response of C will cancel the input and return you to the main query thus reinitializing the memory buffer The lt Q gt response permits display of a diskette directory Its syntax is Qd Where dis the drive spec If you omit the drive spec the zero drive will be assumed If you enter an erroneous drive spec your entry will be ignored If you enter a drive which is not in your system the command will time out after about 10 seconds and you will receive another query 2 If you have read in file s and want to begin a writing operation respond with lt ENTER gt i e just depress the lt ENTER gt key without entering any other character COMMAND FILE UTILITY 9 In order to read in a disk file response to query 2 with D you will be prompted for the filespec via the query ENTER INPUT FILE FILESPEC gt Ent th filespec to begin the read operation This utility will default the filespec to an extension of CMD if you leave the fil xtension blank If any disk I O error results or any disk problem that results i
9. EM parameters up modification has kits are neither has been made to rtain timing loops as These two commands have l always be executed up Fort fy ce i No memory will be used The clock speed is controlled in the following manner FAST SLOW SYSTEM ALIVE switch issues an OUT Port 254 1 command issues an OUT Port 254 0 command The SYSTEM ALIVE parameter displays an ALIVE character in the upper right corner of the screen It is primarily useful to determine the current state of the task processor If the ALIVE bug is moving the task processor is running Note that the ALIVE bug may continue moving indicating an ALIVE system even when the TRACE display has stopped The switch is either ON or OFF If not specified ON is assumed The ALIVE parameter uses some RAM in high memory SYSTEM BASIC2 Typing in SYSTEM BASI This command will direct you to the ROM Basic in t C2 i screen and Cass display Any ROUTEing reset to the nor disk functions are mal ROM available LDOS or LBASIC You must press th and go through power up to get back while n the LDOS will be displayed in the LINKing or DRIVER routines Basic drivers While in for use and you reset button to the operati SYSTEM LIBRARY COMMAND 3 R he TRS 80 computer the the EADY mode will clea upper left corner o SET under L
10. Here are som xamples of using the DUMP command DUMP ROUTINE CMD START X 7000 END X 8000 TRA X 7000 DUMP ROUTINE CMD S X 7000 E X 8000 T X 7000 DUMP ROUTINE CMD S 28672 E 32768 T 28672 Gq GI These three commands will create identical files The first two use HEX notation for the addresses while the third is in decimal format The results of these commands will be to DUMP the area of memory STARTing at X 7000 and ENDing at X 8000 This block of memory will be DUMPed to a disk file named ROUTINE CMD If the file already xists it will be overwritten If it does not exist it will be created on the first available drive The transfer address of the program will be X 7000 DUMP TEST 1 S X 9000 Gl X BCOF This command will DUMP the specified block of memory to a disk file named TEST CIM Sinc th EJI xtension was not specified it defaulted to CIM The transfer address was not specified and will be written to the file as a return to the system DUMP WORD TXT 0 S X 7000 E X AOOO A This command will dump th specified memory range to a disk file named WORD TXT Since the A ASCII option was specified no address information will be written to the file and the EXT End of Text character will be the normal X 03 Ley DUMP WORD TXT 0 S X 7000 E X A000 ETX X FF A This command
11. PARAMETER P This parameter directs the output to the line printer rather than the video display It may be used in conjunction with any of the other LIST parameters Be sur the printer is nabled before using this command or the system will lock up LIST LIBRARY COMMAND 3 PARAMETER TAB This parameter will cause the expansion of any TAB characters X 09 encountered during ASCII LISTings to the video display or line printer The tab locations are at columns 8 16 24 32 40 48 and 56 The following examples will show some different LIST commands LIST MONITOR CMD HEX LRL 8 REC 0 LIST MONITOR CMD H L 8 These two commands will produce identical results LISTing a file called MONITOR CMD to the video display using a LRL of 8 and starting wW S ith the first record of th file The second example has merely ubstituted the abbreviations for the REX and LRL parameters and let he RECord parameter default to 0 This ISTing display will be only 8 bytes wide as the LRL is also the display width for LRL s 1 to 16 Maximum display width is 16 bytes per line The same line width applies to LISTings sent to the printer with the P option IST REPLY PC IST REPLY PC NUM TAB P N T P These two commands produce identical results The second example merely substitutes abbreviations for the parameters The
12. You cannot create or extend files with FED only modify existing ones FED is intended to run with the LDOS operating system only The following is a brief description of FED s capabilities 1 Complete editing capabilities are supported including Hexadecimal and ASCII modifying Direct disk patching becomes a simple matter with FED It is even possible to write machine language code directly to disk Small changes in files can be made instantly With FED there is no need to read in a large source file and reassemble it just to change one character 2 FED allows for record advancing backspacing and positioning You may page through a file quickly either forward or backward The user need not know any diskette information density number of sides number of sectors per gran etc The only thing that is required to use FED is knowledge of the proper filespec 3 ASCII and Hex string searching can be performed and a command exists which will allow you to position the cursor to the next occurrence of the search string FED searches th ntire file not just the current edit record It allows searching for upper lower case ASCII strings up to 30 characters in length and Hex strings up to 15 bytes in length FED will retain a search string so you can go to the next occurrence of that string from the currently displayed position in the file
13. the command buffer will appear on the lower left n will be additional information such as current record number which may be of filespec relativ tc The sample displays on the previous page will this information will be displayed For certain al characters will be required Depending on the 28 character mode these inputs will be taken ina r mode these types of inputs will be taken in an input box and the input hand edge of the display When in the 128 character box will be positioned verticall to the right of the comman It is advised tha enabled as some F wnen Gl 7 mode these types of inputs will be d buffer No input box will appear but a flashing using FED the lt BREAK gt key should D commands are exited by the use of the lt BR The remainder of this manual will be dedicated to explanation of all command s available in the FED program FED FILE EDITOR Page 3 cursor will be present indicating that an input is requested the ly along the right taken directly always remain EAK gt key discussion and lt C gt Ccece gt nnnnnn L gt nnnn ARAAANAAAAA uO v lt R gt nnnn lt S gt lt ENTER gt lt T gt lt X gt lt ENTER gt lt Z gt lt BREAK gt lt ENTER gt lt i gt F lt gt lt SHIFT gt lt gt lt gt lt gt SRS
14. 13 mber range he highest is if you ue 65 will period of entered as as many he entire will keep during the nd you do ystem may the video 256 blinks shing of a JCL line BU JCL sample BACKUP procedure requiring compilation TE if d assign d 7 end Compilation of sample BACKUP procedure underway flash 10 The BACKUP operation is starting pause Load destination disk and lt ENTER gt to resume backup asm 1 to d mod alert 1 0 7 0 exit Using this procedure a simple DO BU d 4 will carry out Note the use of the conditional block to assign a drive if it is omitted in the parameter line Th attention to the next request which is a PAUSE been made a repeating siren sound will be heard lt ENTER gt key DELAY lt duration gt the procedure default destination FLASH is used to draw After the BACKUP has until stopped with the The DELAY macro will provide for a definit timed pause Execution will automatically continue at the expiration of the delay period The actual delay will be approximately 0 1 seconds per count The count may range from 1 to 256 Thus a delay from 0 1 seconds to a delay of 25 6 seconds is possible Similar to the tone generation the value used will be modulo 256 An example of the use of DELAY was demonstrated with the JCL procedure provided as a
15. AUTO dos command is optional and if used will disable the ability of lt ENTER gt to break the execution of the AUTO dos command and also disable the lt BREAK gt key dos command can be any executable LDOS command with or without parameters up to 32 characters in length abbr NONE If the AUTO dos command has disabled the lt BREAK gt key it is possible to re enable the lt BREAK gt after the AUTO command has finished execution See the SYSTEM BREAK ON LIBrary command for complete instructions Here are som xamples of the use of the AUTO command AUTO LBASIC Will write the command LBASIC as an AUTOmatic key in on the drive 0 diskette replacing any previous AUTOmatic key ins From that point on every time you power up using that LDOS diskette or press the reset button LBASIC will AUTOmatically be loaded into memory and executed An AUTOmatic key in takes the place of a keyboard input just as though the command had been typed in and lt ENTER gt had been pressed AUTO DO INIT JCL 0 After this has been written to the drive 0 disk power up or pressing the reset button will cause the DO file INIT JCL 0 to be executed which will allow several commands to be executed AUTOmatically see DO command and JCL Note the asterisk immediately preceding the command This is optional when used it will disable the ability of the lt ENTER gt
16. Reserved for future use Suspend program execution Parse an optional parameter string Reserved for future use Abnormal program exit and return to LDOS Normal program exit and return to LDOS Accept a new command Entry to command interpreter Reserved for future use TECH INFO SUPERVISORY CALLS 9 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 40 50 51 52 53 54 39 56 57 58 59 60 1A ERROR 1B DEBUG 1D ADTSK 1E RMTSK 1F RPTSK 20 KLTSK 22 DODIR 29 SELECT 2E SEEK 2F TSTBSY 34 RDSEC 32 VERSEC 35 WRSEC 36 WRSYS 37 WRCYL 39 KILL 3A INIT 3B OPEN 3C CLOSE Entry to post an error message Enter the debugging package Reserved for future use Add an interrupt level task lt DE gt contains the TCB address lt C gt contains the task number Remove an interrupt level task lt C gt contains the task number Replace the currently executing task vector Remove the currently executing task Reserved for future use Do a directory display buffer Reserved for future use Select a new drive Reserved for future use Seek a cylinder Test if requested drive is busy Reserved for future use Read a sector Verify a sector Reserved for future use Write a sector Write a system sector Write a cylinder Reserved for future use Kill a file or device Open or initialize a file o
17. SECTION 6 gt contains the GLOSSARY CUSTOMER SERVICE and WARRANTY information When you purchased the LDOS operating system you also obtained the best customer service arrangement in the micro industry The LDOS Support Services group is committed to providing complete information and total assistance to all Registered LDOS owners The Toll Free assistance number will be found in this section To locate the section of the manual you wish to access refer to the Section Identifiers printed directly above the page numbers All commands or programs in each section will be in alphabetical order Each new command or logical division within a section will begin on the top of a right hand page Any time you encounter an unfamiliar word or definition GLOSSARY or GENERAL INFORMATION section of the manual to meaning USING THIS MANUAL zis refer to either th determine th xact PAGE NUMBERING To provide a way of keeping your LDOS manual updated the pages have NOT been numbered consecutively from the beginning of the manual Instead each section or command will start with page number 1 For example the LIBRARY COMMAND section page numbering will show something like this APPEND LIBRARY COMMAND l This would let you know that the page you are on deals with a LIBRARY COMMAND called APPEND It is the first page for this command Until you are familiar with
18. the BASIC you you wish to APPEND logical reco the LRL parameter can be adjusted and the APPEND wil run leng rd 1 with wo ths to the desi files record lengths less than This function is also but cannot because they By COPYing one of these files red length the record length LDOS hen function COPY MANUAL TXT JWY 0 TO 1 L 128 C This command will copy the file MANUAL TXT with the password JWY from drive 0 to drive 1 In the process of doing the COPY the Logical Record Length LRL parameter was also mode COPY CONTROL 0 ASC 1 LRL 1 This will COPY the file CONTROL of the file byte in length Record Length CONTROL to 1 file to a file that will be changed from wha LRL parameter was abbreviated to L in specified using file s ATTRIButes and the file s DATE as described above will be data file was ASCII to start with EXAMPLES OF COPYing devspec to devspec When COPYing from devspec to specified be assigned and has been done when COPYi up the sys ng between devices tem In other words unless you thoroughly Destruction of files and or lack of user understanding command Following are few resul of ot a her LDOS commands dev as PL spec it i non ending EASE do r understand t when examples of ts produced by these copies may possibly be duplicated through the such as ROUTE
19. ON OFF Y N YES or NO The 2 byte memory area pointed to by the address field of your table receives the value of PARM if PARM is non string If a string is ntered the 2 byte memory area receives th address of the lst byte of string The entries ON YES and Y return a value of X FFFF while OFF NO and N will return a X 0000 if a parameter name is specified on the command line followed by an equal sign and no value thena X 0000 or NO will be returned TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS GENERAL a ee ee If a parameter name is used on the command line without the equal then a value of X FFFF or ON will be assumed For any allowed parameter that is completely omitted on the command line the 2 byte area will remain unchanged The valid parameters are contained in a user table which must be of the following format A 6 character word left justified and buffered by blanks followed by a 2 byte address vector to receiv the parsed values Word and vector may be repeated for as many parameters as are necessary A byte of X 00 must be placed at the end of the table to indicate its ending point DE gt beginning of your parameter table HL gt command line to parse Z lt Set if either no parameters found or valid parameters NZ lt If a bad parameter was found PRINT Vector X 446A This routine will output a message line to the printer The message must conform to the syntax s
20. be updated filename The mandatory name used to reference a disk file A filename consists of one to eight alphanumeric characters the first of which must be alphabetic FILTER A machine language routine which monitors and or alters I O that passes through it FILTER is also the LIBrary command which establishes a FILTER routine FIX The desired fil xtension for a PATCH file FOREGROUND TASK Jobs the computer does that are apparent to the user such as running an applications program or a utility and interacting directly with the user GRAN An abbreviation used for the term GRANule A GRAN is the minimum amount of storage used for a disk file As files ar xtended file allocation is increased in increments of GRANs I O The abbreviation for Input Output JCL The desired fil xtension for a DO file JCL is an abbreviation for Job Control Language JL An LDOS system device the Joblog KI An LDOS system device the Keyboard KSM The desired fil xtension for a KSM file KSM is an abbreviation for Key Stroke Multiply LCOMM A sophisticated communications program capable of interacting with disk printer video keyboard and the RS232 interface LCOMM will dynamically buffer all the system devices LCOMM is provided with the LDOS system LIBRARY A set of commands used to perform most operating system functions load module format A file format that loads directly to a spe
21. TECH INFO MEMORY MAP 2 ADDRESS LABEL DESCRIPTION OF LOCATION X 4424 OPEN Open an existing file or device X 4427 LDRIVS Currently accessed drive logical number 0 7 X 4428 CLOSE Close a file or device X 442B SFLAGS System bit flag X 442C KILL Kill a file or device X 4430 LOAD Load a program file X 4433 RUN Load and execute a program file X 4436 READ Read a record from a file X 4439 QWRITE Write a record to a file X 443C VER Write then verify a record to a file X 443F REW Rewind a file to its beginning X 4442 POSN Position a file to a logical record X 4445 BKSP Backspace one logical record X 4448 PEOF Position to th nd of fil X 444B QFEXT Set up a default file extension X 444E MULT Multiply HL by A X 4451 DIVIDE Divide HL by A X 4454 PARAM Parse an optional parameter string X 4458 CKEOF Check for end of file X 445B Q WEOF Writ nd of fil X 445E RREAD Reread the current sector x 4461 RWRIT Rewrite the current sector X 4464 SKIP Skip the next record X 4467 DSPLY Display a message line X 446A PRINT Print a message line X 446D LOC Calculate the current logical record number X 4470 LOF Calculate the EOF logical record number X 4473 INTIMS Contains an image of the interrupt latch X 4475 INTVCTS This area con
22. executed at this time and any AUTOed commands will be done BOOT LIBRARY COMMAND z his ave UILD aoewn Hy command allows the user to BUILD a file of desired character strings and this file under any valid filespec BUILD is in the system mainly ASCII files for use with lthough you may BUILD EX option The syntax is files containing any characters X 00 to X FF HEX optional APPEND optional abbr NONE HEXadecimal format only BUILD filespec HEX APPEND filespec is any valid LDOS filespec parameter allowing a packed parameter that allows APPENDing the BUILD data to the end of existing files the DO KSM and PATCH features of LDO to S with the The BUILD command is used to create a file or APPEND to an existing file or character strings entered from the keyboard the syst serie EF te see will s of commands comments he filespec does NOT contain a ext extension automatically assign a default extension of JCL for Job Control Language DO and JCL If a file with the identical name exists em wi a 11 the BUILD command abort with the error message File already exists unless the If the APPEND parameter is used the existing parameter has been specified APPE file must have been created with the BUILD command or be in ASCII format Shoul exten ident BUILD
23. lt Q gt Display a disk s directory lt R gt Repeat the last DOS command lt T gt Issue a Top Of Form to the lineprinter When the MiniDOS filter intercepts one of these keys it will the the the the immediately execute the associated function Thes keys are active inside any program that uses the LDOS keyboard driver including LBASIC When the function has been completed control will be returned to the calling program as though no key had been pressed For this reason if some of these functions are executed from the DOS level the LDOS Ready prompt will not appear on the screen when the operation is complete However the system is still positioned as if the prompt were on the screen and is ready to take another input listed her The full descriptions and parameters for each command will b MiniDOS FILTER lt C gt The lt C gt command will toggle the clock display on or off This is identical to issuing a CLOCK ON or CLOCK OFF library command lt D gt The lt D gt command will enter the system DEBUGger or extended DEBUGger providing it has been previously activated with the DEBUG or DEBUG EXT command lt F gt The lt F gt command will allow you s the fr space available ona specified drive along with the disk s name and date of creation After selecting this command you will s the letter F enclosed
24. 33 No device space available KIZLI The SET command was used to establish a new device in the system Unfortunately all of the resident system area reserved for Device Code Block tables is already in use It is suggested that you use the DEVICE command to see if any currently defined non system devices can be eliminated 34 Load file format error gt Su ae An attempt was made to LOAD a file that did not conform to the format structure for a program file capable of being loaded by the system loader Most likely the file referenced is a data file or a BASIC program file 35 Memory fault x 23 During the process of loading a program file the integrity of the load is monitored to ensure that each memory position loaded stores the proper byt value In cases of partial memory failure one or more bits of a memory cell will not replicate the value being loaded 1 This error will then be displayed If this condition repeats it is suggested that you subject your hardware to a thorough memory test to locate the root cause TECH INFO ERROR DICTIONARY 5 36 Attempted to load read only memory X 24 The program file being loaded referenced a memory cell that could not be altered Either the cell was part of the read only memory ROM or the address was referencing an area of the machine not containing any read write memory RAM Use CMDFILE to locate the address loading information
25. COMMAND U The command syntax is U DEBUG LIBRARY COMMAND 4 This command will dynamically update the display showing any active background tasks It may be cancelled by holding down any key COMMAND X The command syntax is X This command will return the display to the normal register display mode COMMAND gt The command syntax is A This command advances the memory display 64 bytes in the register mod and 256 bytes in the full screen mode COMMAND The command syntax is This command decrements the memory display by 64 bytes in the register mode or by 256 bytes in the full screen mode THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS ARE FOUND ONLY IN THE EXTENDED DEBUGGER EXTENDED COMMAND B The command syntax is Baaaa bbbb n lt ENTER gt This command will move a block of memory from one location to another aaaa is the starting address of the memory block to move bbbb is the destination address of the memory block Ti Sita oaks is the number of bytes to move EXTENDED COMMAND E The command syntax is Eaaaa lt SPACE gt This command allows you to enter data directly into memory starting at address aaaa The contents of memory address aaaa will be displayed and you may then type in 2 HEX characters to replace the current contents This operation will automatically advance to the next memory location and allow you to continue entering characters until the lt ENTER gt key is
26. ONTROL KILL Vector X 442C This routine will kill a file or device If a file is to be killed th FCB must be in an open condition The file s directory will be updated and the space occupied by the file will be de allocated The file name extension and drive number will be placed back into the FCB If a device it will be removed from the device control block tables if it is not a system devic The device should first be RESET DE gt File Control Block A lt error code returned Z lt set if no error detected OPEN Vector X 4424 This routine will open an existing file or device HL gt Buffer for disk I O 256 bytes DE gt File control block containing the filespec B gt Logical record length for the open file A lt Error return code Z lt Set if open was successful Program Loading Control Routines LOAD Vector X 4430 This routine will load a program file a file in load module format DE gt FCB containing the filespec of the file to load A lt error return code Z lt set if load was successful HL lt entry address TRA retrieved from file RUN Vector X 4433 This routine will load and execute a program file If encountered during the load the any errors are system will jump to to ABORT ERROR print the If RUN is appropriate message and terminate by jumping entered by a CALL
27. QUERY QUERY each file before PURGEing it MPW The disk Master Password D Allows specifying a range of MOD dates I Specifies INVisible files S Specifies SYStem files aa represents the disk Master Password Sw represents the switch ON or OFF default ON bb represents a date entry as follows M1 D1 Y1 M2 D2 Y2 indicates all files with MOD dates between the two dates specified inclusive M1 D1 Y1 will indicate all files with a MOD date equal to the date specified M1 D1 Y1 will indicate all files with MOD dates less than or equal to the date specified M1 D1 Y1 indicates all files with MOD dates greater than or equal to the date specified abbr ON Y OFF N QUERY Q PURGE LIBRARY COMMAND The The PURGE command allows the user to the need to specify the individual the disk s Master Password if it passed with the MPW parameter The If the Q Query parameter is not specified switch Q Y is automatically assumed filespecs do multiple KILLs of disk files without user will be prompted for is a password other than PASSWORD and not command allows several parameters to be set providing for a specific group or groups of files to be PURGEd or if Q is specified without a asked befor ach file and you will b is PURGEd The MOD flag and date will be shown for each file PURGE defaults to VISible files only the I and S switches must be specif
28. The command syntax is Taaaa lt SPACE gt This command will allow you to type ASCII characters directly into memory starting at address aaaa The current contents of the address will be shown and the command will wait for the next keyboard character After the character is entered you will advance to the next memory location To exit this command use the lt ENTER gt key The lt SPACE gt character cannot be entered with this command Pressing the lt SPACE gt will advance one memory location without changing the contents of the current location If aaaa is omitted the current memory modification address will be used DEBUG LIBRARY COMMAND 7 EXTENDED COMMAND V The command syntax is Vaaaa bbbb nn lt ENTER gt This command will compare the block of memory starting at aaaa to the block of memory at bbbb The compare will be for nn bytes If the display is in the register mode the first byte of memory displayed will be set to the first location in the block starting at aaaa which does not match the block at bbbb The current memory modification address used by the M E and T commands will be reset to the corresponding byte in the second block EXTENDED COMMAND W The command syntax is Waaaa dddd lt ENTER gt This command will search memory for the WORD specified with dddd The search will start at memory location aaaa If aaaa is not specified the current memory modificatio
29. When the SYSGEN parameter is used all current device and driver configurations will be stored on the diskette in drive 0 A file named CONFIG SYS will be created to hold the configuration Each time the system is booted the configuration stored in this file will be loaded and set To prevent this automatic configuration hold down the lt CLEAR gt key while the boot is in progress Note that the system configuration will take place before any AUTOed command is executed In addition to the SYSTEM commands and parameters listed in this section the following will be stored in the configuration file by a SYSTEM SYSGEN command 1 All FILTERing LINKing ROUTEing or SETting that has been done 2 Any active background tasks TRACE SPOOL CLOCK or DEBUG 3 Any special utility routines loaded into high memory and protected with the MEMORY command All memory from HIGHS to the physical top of memory will be written to the CONFIG SYS file 4 The present state of VERIFY ON OFF and of the keyboard caps lock the lt SHIFT gt lt 0O gt SYSTEM SYSRES n This command will allow you to reside certain LDOS SYStem overlays in high memory SYS files 1 5 and 8 11 may be loaded using this command Note that each overlay will require 1K 1024 bytes of memory Having certain of these SYS overlays resident in memory will speed up most disk I O operations as these modules will not have to be loaded from disk It will also allow yo
30. bit 5 indicates 2 sided operation the sectors per cylinder will be twice this number bits 5 through 7 contain the number of heads for a hard drive Contains additional allocation parameters bits O through 4 Contain the quantity of sectors per granule that was used in the formatting operation bits 5 through 7 Contain the quantity of granules per track allocated in the formatting process If DCT 4 bit 5 indicates 2 sided operation the granules per cylinder will be twice this number Contains the cylinder where the directory is located For any directory access the system will first attempt to use this value to read the directory prior to examining the BOOT sector directory storage byte in case the READ operation was unsuccessful It is essential that bytes DCT 6 DCT 7 and DCT 8 all relate without conflicts That is to say the highest numbered sector 1 divided by the quantity of sectors per granule 1 should equal the number of granules per track 1 TECH INFO DRIVE CODE TABLE 3 DIRECTORY RECORDS DIREC The directory contains information required to access all files on the disk The section containing directory records is limited to a maximum of 32 sectors due to physical limitations in the Hash Index Table Two sectors are used for the Granule Allocation Table and the Hash Index Table The directory is also contained completely on a single cylinder Thus a 10 sector per cylinde
31. d is any currently enabled drive The LOG utility will provide a way to log in diskette information and update the drive s DCT It will perform the same log in function as the DEVICE library command except for a single drive rather than all drives It will also provide a way to swap diskettes in drive 0 LOG 0 will prompt you and allow you to switch the drive 0 diskette The LOG 0 command must be used when switching between double and single sided diskettes in drive 0 Otherwise it is not needed NOTE Double sided disks cannot be used to boot the system LOG UTILITY 41 gt The LDOS program or data files PATCHing information in for this except t are normally created ASCII wi For PATCH when crea PATCH utility is used to make The syntax is minor changes or repairs t o existing sion FIX PATCH filespecl USING filespec2 YANK PATCH filespec USING information in patch format filespecl Any valid filespec The default exten will be CMD filespec2 Any valid filespec for a PATCH format file The default extension will be YANK Will remove the PATCH specified by filespec2 from filespecl The PATCH to remove must have been in the X nnnn type format abbr NONE command line by pl filespec to be PAT may be done directly from the parentheses following the Command level type of PATCH is hat multiple li
32. load than moves t back to its original he clock YSTEM program DOS H wndteoo Machine patched language would hav code to correct load region interrupts and keyboard debounce routines in User options provide for disabling the event that the programs er operation requires use of an the corrective pa tch code overlayed th tape rors in Editor debounc routine of TRSDOS or or disk files can be appended with a manner similar to the PATCH CMD This Assembler and of course knowledge of n be copied from ngle drive system Command files ca diskette on a si operating system SYSTEM casset memory here Assembler tape files can be tofore only possible the disk each bloc ter 7 For during input of of prin user k of code TO ENT Y ER THE COMMAND FILE UTILIT one provided both diskettes us created via direct COMMAND is displayed to the CRT and The file s transfer address or entry point SYSTEM diskette to another SYSTEM th from non contiguous assembly from the the load address optionally toa files At LDOS REA CMDF II ENT ER gt DY simply type COMMAND FILE will load and execute COMMAND FILE UTILITY ay sam blocks of Editor range line is also displayed COMMAND STRUCTURE
33. lt gt lt SHIFT gt lt gt Ent POS Dum POS Fin Go Ent Mem New er ASCII c ition tot ition to t d Hex stri to the nex ne ASCII Character string p Disk File to printer from current position he Ag C occurre FED LIBRARY haracter modify mode Beginning record Ending record nnnnnn er Hex modify mode Locate Hex load address nnnn ory location of a specified byte Out Pri POS eXi 7I Can Dis File request put a top of form to printer search for cccccc nce of last search Hex or ASCII open a different file nt current record in edit buffer ition to Record nnnn Save current record sector in edit buffer Toggle between 256 and 128 display mode t FED and return to LDOS Ready p through File Load Blocks cel current FED command play FED instruction set Menu Advance one record in the file Backup one record in the file play binary representation of byte Dis Mov Mov Mov Mov CURSOR MOVEMENT e cursor left e cursor right e cursor up e cursor down Position cursor to relative byte X 00 of the current record X 0C 128 byte mode only MENU DISPLAY OF FED INSTRUCTION SET lt D gt lt P gt Forward ONE Record lt BREAK gt Cancels command Backward ONE Record lt N gt lt ENTER gt New File Beginning Record of File lt S gt lt ENTER gt
34. 0 if not bit 6 Set to 1 for DDEN set to 0 for SDEN bit 5 Set to 1 if drive is 8 drive If the drive is a 5 1 4 drive the bit is 0 bit 4 A 1 will cause the selection of the disk s second side The first side will be selected if this bit is a 0 The bit value will match the side indicator bit in the sector header as written by the FDC bit 3 If this bit is set to a 1 it indicates a hard drive Winchester A O in this bit position denotes a floppy device 5 1 4 or 8 TECH INFO DRIVE CODE TABLE bit 2 Used to indicate the time delay between selection of a 5 1 4 drive and the first poll of the status register A 1 value indicates 0 5 seconds while a 0 value indicates 1 0 seconds See the SYSTEM command for additional details If the drive is a hard drive this bit will instead indicated either a fixed or removable disk 0 removable 1 fixed bits 1 amp 0 These contain the step rate specification for the floppy disk controller Again see the SYSTEM command Contains additional drive specifications bit 7 This is reserved for future use It should NOT be used in order to maintain compatibility with future releases of LDOS bit 6 If 1 the controller is capable of double density mode Bit 5 A 1 denotes 2 sided operation while a 0 indicates single sided operation Do not confuse this bit with Bit 4 of DCT 3 This b
35. 2 This command will BACKUP all files whose extensions are 3 characters long ending with the letter S The wcc masks the first two characters of the extension so the extensions BAS TSS SYS etc would all match A BACKUP By Class will be invoked BACKUP UTILITY 5 BACKUP CMD 0 1 This command will BACKUP all files from drive 0 to drive 1 EXCLUDING those that have the extension CMD BACKUP 1 1 This command will BACKUP between two disks in drive 1 You will be prompted to switch between the source disk and destination disk at the appropriate times Neither disk in drive 1 need be a SYStem disk This command could be used to BACKUP a data disk S the next exampl with the x parameter for another example of data disk BACKUPs BACKUP 0 1 x This command will BACKUP a disk in drive 0 to a disk in drive 1 Its primary use is to BACKUP non SYStem diskettes such as data diskettes When using this BACKUP parameter you will be prompted to insert the proper disk in drive 0 You may be prompted to re insert a SYSTEM disk into drive 0 during certain BACKUPs When the BACKUP is complete you will be prompted to insert a SYStem disk back in drive 0 This command is useful for BACKUPs of data disks in a two drive system If the BACKUP will be by Class or a Reconstruct SYS overlays 2 3 8 and 10 must be resident in memory BACKUP 1 2 OLD This command will BACKUP all files from drive 1 to drive 2 onl
36. 3 20ms QUERY will prompt you for DENSITY SIDES STEP and number of CYLinders SYSTEM will add system information to a previously formatted disk ABS If specified will FORMAT the disk even if the disk is already FORMATted and contains data abbr QUERY Q The FORMAT utility is the program that will create the proper information on a diskette so the LDOS system can read and write to that diskette A disk to be FORMATted may be blank or it may have already been FORMATted Note that if the FORMAT command is to be used in a JCL file the disk to be FORMATted must be blank unless the ABS parameter is specified FORMAT UTILITY THE NUMBER OF CYLINDERS FOR AN 8 DIFFER If all parameters are default to 40 cylinders for these parameters to the following examples FORMAT ENTLY WITH THE CYL PARAMET not passed specify the QU T DRIVE WII iL ALWAYS BE 77 EVEN IF SPECIFIED ER in the FORMAT command line they will double density single side step 0 To be prompted ERY parameter on the command line Refer Since no parameters were passed the FORMAT command will ask for them in the following manner DISKETTE NAME Ent MASTER PASSWORD Ent The Bae gil If the disket DISK CONTAINS DATA NAM YOU SURE YOU WANT ARE You N no READY prompt I
37. DC3 Pause transmission XTA DC4 FR OFF LCOMM UTILITY 6 The DC2 and DC4 characters function identically to the FR ON and FR OFF programmed function keys DC3 causes transmission through the CL device to be halted until a DCl is received Reception is not affected You can override a DC3 with the CL ON keyboard command HANDSHAKE may also be turned on with the sequence lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt followed by any non PF key rather than the ON key If this is the case any time LCOMM sends the specified character it will pause transmission until a DCl is received or a CL ON is issued Typically the lt ENTER gt key would be specified EXIT lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt This PF key is used to return to the LDOS command level It does not require any ON or OFF It is a stand alone key Prior to exiting LCOMM the FR device is checked to see if an open file exists In the event that one does it will be closed before th xit to LDOS is made This little feature will protect against your inadvertent exit without overtly saving an open receive fil MENU lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt This PF command will display a menu to the screen It looks like this DUPLX ECHO ECOLF ACCLF REWND PEOF 8 BIT HNDSH EXIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 ZRI DO PR KCT FS ZER ID RES ON OFF Notice that the display will be left to right and in the r
38. Even if you are not an assembly language programmer this disk to tape feature is very useful for making SYSTEM tape backups of your disk load modules Transferring a SYSTEM tape to disk If you want to employ the tape to disk facility all that is needed is to perform the input from tape and not input a second file Just use the single file read in to output it to disk Appending TWO files together is not required COMMAND FILE UTILITY 38 C ONV CONV CMD The CONV utility will allow you to move files from a Model III TRSDOS diskette onto an LDOS formatted diskette Two drives are required The syntax isi CONV s TO d parm parm parm CONV partspec w wcc s TO d parm parm parm s is the source drive It cannot be drive 0 d is the destination drive partspec and wee are as defined in the Glossary The allowable parameters are as follows VIS Convert VISible files INV Convert INVisible files SYS Convert SYStem files NEW Convert files only if they DO NOT exist on the destination disk OLD Convert files only if they already exist on the destination disk QUERY Query each file before it is converted abbr All parameters may be abbreviated to their first character The CONV utility will allow you to move all or groups of files from a Model III TRSDOS disk onto your LDOS disks It provides many different parameters
39. GAME OVER PLAYER lt 10 gt 47 41 4D 45 20 4F 56 45 52 20 50 4C 41 59 45 52 lt gt NEW HIGH SCO lt 20 gt 20 3C 20 3E 4E 45 57 20 48 49 47 48 20 53 43 4F REEN TER NAME lt 30 gt 52 45 45 4E 01 00 B4 97 54 45 52 20 4E 41 4D 45 lt 40 gt 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 C4 W gt Ww a Ww lt 50 gt 57 3A 60 7F CD Fl 57 77 3A 61 7F CD F7 57 77 3A a Ww b Ww b lt 60 gt 61 7F CD F1 57 77 3A 62 JF CD F7 57 77 3A 62 7F Ww 0 lt 70 gt CD Fl 57 77 C9 E6 OF C6 30 23 C9 CB 2F CB 2F CB Le ee PLAYE lt 80 gt 2F CB 2F 18 FO C6 30 23 C9 20 20 50 4C 41 59 45 REESE BT 8B bacet 3 lane ees lt 90 gt 52 20 3C 20 3E 20 20 FE EP OBE ER EB EE CR bo EE EE E e Sis Te Mor eae ey Sate cat ie ce lt AO gt FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FE EEEE Bebe BHE PEE EE obo Pe ae S lt BO gt FF FF FF FF 80 88 B7 B7 B7 B7 9D 80 AE BB BB BB EERE SN INTRU lt C0 gt BB 84 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 20 49 4E 54 52 55 DERS aoaie E lt D0 gt 44 45 52 53 AE 9D AE 9D 88 9B A7 84 88 9E AD 84 0XH x 0 HO H lt EO gt AO 99 A6 90 30 78 48 B4 78 84 30 7C 48 30 F8 48 POINTS20 POINTS1 lt F0 gt 50 4F 49 4E 54 53 32 30 20 50 4F 49 4E 54 53 31 FED MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS lt ENTER gt Display FED instruction menu lt X gt lt ENTER gt Exit FED and return to LDOS Ready lt N gt lt ENTER gt Open a New file for editing A prompt for the filespec will be displayed If you input an invalid or improper filespec an error message will appear and you will be allowed t
40. LIBRARY COMMAND 2 This command SETs a logical device to a DRIVER routine The syntax is SET devspec TO filespec parm parm devspec any currently enabled logical device filespec any valid driver type program parms optional parameters required by the driver program specified with filespec abbr NONE except as allowed by the DRIVER program The SET command will SET a logical device to a driver program It does this by LOADing the specified driver into high memory just below HIGHS HIGHS will then be decremented to protect this driver routin Once a device is SET any I O to or from the device will be controlled by the driver routine LDOS will allow the passing of parameters to the driver program These parameters are totally independen of the driver progra ill be des ither ROUTEd o he device is R W w e E E hen a device is SE troyed R T O ES of m a nce a device ha The driver F ES r T a All If a device is R LS he KI DVR program wil nd then SET again S ny previous FILT the SET command ll re use its original ER ROU been SET program wil and are determined only by E LINK it will or SET of E the needs hat device remain SET until it is high memory allocation i re
41. Load module format programs may also be directly loaded and executed from the DOS READY prompt by simply typing in the name of the program Following are som xamples of the RUN command RUN SCRIPSIT LC SCRIPSIT LC Both of these commands will produc th same results The program SCRIPSIT LC will be loaded into memory and executed RUN BASIC BASIC Both of these commands will produce the same results They will load a program named BASIC CMD and execute it Note that the file extension defaulted to CMD when not specified by the RUN command RUN LIBRARY COMMAND RUN x INVADERS CMD This command is for the single drive user It will LOAD the program INVADERS CMD from any disk whether or not it is an LDOS SYStem disk After the command has been entered you will be prompted with the message INSERT SOURCE DISK lt ENTER gt At this point you should insert the diskette containing the program in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt After the program is loaded you will be prompted INSERT SYSTEM DISK ENTER gt You should now insert your LDOS system disk back into drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt Program execution will begin at this point F The RUN command is identical to the LOAD command except for the fact that control is transferred to the program module transfer address rather than returning to the system RUN
42. Save Record Ending Record of File lt X gt lt ENTER gt Exit FED Position to Record lt H gt Hexadecimal Modify Go to next Load Block lt A gt ASCII Modify Calculate Load Address lt T gt Toggle Display modes Find ASCII String lt F gt Find Hex string Locate Hex Load Address lt G gt Go next occurrence Dump File to Printer lt O gt Output top of form Send Buffer to Printer lt gt Display Binary Value Press lt ENTER gt to Return to Display Mode FED FILE EDITOR Page 4 lt B gt lt E gt lt R gt nnnn FED MANIPULATION COMMANDS Advance one record sequentially in the file For example if FED was currently displaying record X 000C and lt gt was pressed the contents of record X 000D would be displayed provided that a record X QOOD existed in the file An will be displayed directly below the record number when pointing to the last record in the file Issuing the lt gt command will not change the position of the relative byte cursors A will be shown in the command buffer to show positive motion in the file Back up one record in the file If FED was currently displaying record X 0087 and lt gt was pressed the contents of record X 0086 would be displayed issuing the lt gt command does not change the position of the relative byte cursors The lt gt command will be ignored if it is issued when record 0 is being displayed A will be shown in the command b
43. ach primitive manual y is the is interface to in the our particular the Drive Code Table and installation disk I O be thorough A discussion on recommended that Ly familiar this topic is you obtain particular control ler in use capable of doubl e density operation you most likely are using an FDC in the 179X series These primitives are identified herein for such time as you have the knowledge and experience to utilize them SELECT Vector X 4754 This vector will select a drive LDRVS and PDRVS are updated The appropriate time delay specified in your configuration SYSTEM DELAY Y N will be undertaken if the drive selection requires it C gt logical drive number 0 7 A lt error return code Z lt set if no error TSTBSY Vector X 4759 This entry will perform a test of the last selected drive to see if it is in a busy state If busy it will be re selected until it is no longer busy C gt should contain the logical drive number SEEK Vector X 475E This entry is used to seek a specified cylinder C gt logical drive number D gt cylinder requested WRSEC Vector X 4763 This entry will write a sector to the disk H buffer containing the sector of data cylinder to write sector to write the logical drive error return code Set if no error number NPawWuve
44. already exists ACC ACCess password UPD UPDate password PROT the PROTection level VIS VISible file in directory INV INVisible file in directory abbr ACC A UPD U PROT P VIS V INV I For disk ATTRIBs use the following parameters d is an optional drivespec defaults to 0 LOCK LOCKs all VISible non SYStem files by changing the ACCess and UPDate passwords to the Master Password of the disk UNLOCK This parameter removes the ACCess and UPDate passwords from VISible non SYStem files MPW Allows passing the disk s current Master Password in the command line NAME Allows changing the disk name PW Allows changing the disk Master Password abbr NONE ATTRIB LIBRARY COMMAND This section will deal with ATTRIBing a filespec The levels of PROTection associated with the passwords are as follows EVEL PRIVILEGE XEC EXECute only READ READ execute WRIT WRITe read xecut NAME reNAME write read execut KILL All access except re ATTRIB ALL Allows total access FULL Same as ALL 4 he PROTection levels form a hierarchy with the highest PROTection level EXEC allowing the least amount of ACCess When you create a file the password you specify becomes both the access and update password If you don t specify a password a string of 8 blank
45. be allocated with this parameter MEM 10 This command will allocate 10K 10 240 bytes of memory to be used as a SPOOL buffer This memory will be dynamically allocated by the fully integrated SPOOL system processor to provide the most efficient operating environment depending on the particular configuration you have established for your LDOS system If this parameter is not specified 1K of memory will automatically be allocated for the SPOOL buffer PARAMETER DISK This parameter sets th maximum amount of file space to be allocated for the SPOOLing Disk space is allocated in blocks of 1K 1024 bytes th same as memory When this parameter is set the system will CREATE a file of the size specified If this parameter is NOT specified the SPOOL command will automatically allocate approximately 5K of disk space depending on the particular disk type The fil name of this file will be determined by the filespec parameter To prevent the SPOOL command from using any disk space specify this parameter DISK DISK 0 By specifying the DISK parameter with no size the system will not allocate any disk space to the SPOOL command and will not CREATE any file PARAMETER filespec NOTE For the filespec parameter to be valid the DISK parameter must not have set the disk file allocation to zero The filespec is the name of the file the SPOOL command will wr
46. fter n th T25 he lt hen ch O R P NOTE The direc d the user wish to create a KSM type file see KSM utility sion should be KSM This will tell BUILD to prompt ifier as you enter what you wish that key to represent This is detailed in the section on the KSM utility tly available from the enter 254 c parameter uses a packed 5 characters Each line that is entered should be termi ENTER gt key The BUILD will end and the file will be wri the lt BREAK gt key is pressed as the first character of any No line in a JCL file should exceed 63 characters in le HEX parameter will allow you to enter characters ot keyboard Any one byte character EX BUILD will ed in the HEX format nn The line length during a haracters allowing 127 H format EX notation characters to be e H n ted toa nated by pressing tten to new line ngth ND the file you with each key typ e Of the file has been opened all characters that are typed will be placed e file just as they appear on the video Lines are limi length the disk her than value may be tho tered The H BUILD LIBRARY COMMAND with NO spaces or delimiters betw se be EX n bytes For example you could create characters in the following manner a 818A90A10D This HEX format line contains the the byte values ar ntered de
47. key 402D 00150 EXIT EQU 402DH LDOS return entry 4030 00160 ABOR EQU 4030H error abort 4049 00170 HIGHS EQU 4411H highest usable memory 4467 00180 DSPLY EQU 4467H display message 447B 00190 LOGOT EQU 428AH display amp log message 5200 00200 ORG 5200H 5200 1A 00210 ENTRY LD A DE get device typ 5201 E602 00220 AND 2 make sure its an 5203 2839 00230 JR Z NOGOOD output device 5205 D5 00240 PUSH DE save device DCB 5206 214752 00250 LD HL MSG point to initialization 5209 CD6744 00260 CALL DSPLY message and display it 520C DDE1 00270 POP IX recover device DCB 520E 2A1144 00280 LD HL HIGHS reduce HIGHS by the 5211 010F00 00290 LD BC LAST START length of this driver 5214 AF 00300 XOR A clear the carry flag 5215 ED42 00310 SBC HL BC calculate new HIGHS 5217 221144 00320 LD HIGHS HL driver now protected 521A 23 00330 INC HL point HL at new START 521B DD7E01 00340 LD A IX 1 xfer orig DCB vector 521E 329452 00350 LD PUTBYT 1 A to driver CALL 5221 329E52 00360 LD GETBYT 1 A 5224 DD7E02 00370 LD A IX 2 5227 329552 00380 LD PUTBYT 2 A 522A 329F52 00390 LD GETBYT 2 A 522D F3 00400 DI not during update 522E DD7501 00410 LD IX 1 L update DCB vector 5231 DD7402 00420 LD IX 2 H to filter entry 5234 EB 00430 EX DE HL xfer new START to DE 5235 219152 00440 LD HL START load address of driver 5238 EDBO 00450 LDIR move driver to top 523A FB 00460 EI enable interrupts again 523B C32D40 00470 JP EXI ret
48. not he procedures locking up the using this possible to CONTROL ASC on drive 1 changed This is an excellent way to convert a data could be handled by a word processor S the COPY loops can be generated involve devspecs in yo tever it was the the abbreviation will be carried over in the C very importa active in the system Any ROUTEing or SE to the devices may affect system could complex devspec to 128 Note that xampl Th C C so all of the F ONE the F ONE abov The Logical from whatever it was in providing the nt that all devices ting that necessary and lock ur copies involved easily result from structure of the COPY Some caution is and constraints to The use devspec copies and or LINK COPY LIBRARY COMMAND 4 COPY KI TO PR This command will COPY the keyboard to the printer As keys are pressed they will be sent to the line printer Depending on the printer the characters may be printed immediately or may require that a linefeed carriage return be sent before printing The keystrokes will not be visible on th video becaus th ECHO parameter was not specified COPY CL TO PR eal lt This command will COPY CL the RS 232 Comm Line to PR the line PRinter Each character that is received by the RS 232 will be processed by the RS 232 driver and then presented to the li
49. pressed If aaaa is omitted the current memory modification address will be used DEBUG LIBRARY COMMAND 5 EXTENDED COMMAND F The command syntax is Faaaa bbbb cc lt ENT ER gt a specified byte The This command will fill a block of memory with parameters are aaaa The first address to be filled bbbb The last address to be filled GC itso gia The specified byte to fill the locations with EXTENDED COMMAND J The command syntax is J This command EXTENDED COMMAND L The command syntax is La This command will locate the search at address last byte given in a pre EXTENDED COMMAND N The command syntax is This command will posit block This instruction memory that has bee instruction you must pos at the beginning of any the next load block he setting PC to the fi pressing N lt ENTER gt PC requested by the JR in command mode aaa dd lt ENTER gt the firs aaaa If aa vious L co ENT Naaaa lt ER gt ion the is ition the block ader rst byte o will be struction This Press N lt instruction any forward J incremen and the DEBUGger will will Jump over the next byte occurrence of aa memory modification address will be used mmand will be used vertical cursor used to move n loaded directly from location bars
50. ss to restrict offset or lt ENTER gt gt query In ss of the load block addressed to the screen to SETF s been further improved to read the SYS6 SYS and If CMDFILE interprets the module being loaded B COMMAND FILE UTILITY 4 as one conforming to the load format of LDOS s ISAM files then the query File has ISAM overlays enter gt will be displayed If you enter the 2 character overlay number CMDFILE will read only the desired overlay into its memory buffer If you respond with FF then th ntir module will be loaded There is no attempt in the CMDFILE documentation to explain the LDOS ISAM file structure If you want to change the load addresses of the output file offset it nter the new base load address For example if the existing load is from 4300H to 5000H and you want it to load starting at 5300H enter the bas address 5300H After entering the new base address you will receive the query Query 4 DO YOU WANT TO ADD THE OFFSET DRIVER ROUTINE Y N E C gt A response of E will EXIT the program while C will cancel the request and return you to the main query If you do not want the restoring driver routin appended respond with N and proceed to query 7 otherwise respond Y It may not be immediately obvious why you would want to offset a file but not add the appendage On us would be to change
51. to choose the files to be moved PARAMETERS VIS INV SYS If none of these parameters are specified all file groups will be considered Specifying only one parameter will automatically exclude the other two Thus to move all files except the SYStem files you would specify both VIS and INV CONV UTILITY sis PARAMETERS NEW OLD QUERY The NEW parameter is used to move files onto the destination disk only if they do not already exist The OLD parameter will move only those files that already exist on the destination disk Unless you specify QUERY NO CONV will ask you before each file is moved onto the destination disk If you answer the prompt Y yes move the file it will function one of two ways If neither NEW nor OLD was specified you will be additionally prompted with FILE EXISTS REPLACE IT if th file already exists on the destination disk If either NEW or OLD was specified you will not see the additional prompt You may specify a filespec partspec to be used to determine which files to move Wildcard characters are also acceptable Refer to the following examples CONV 22 RE This example will allow you to move all files from drive 2 onto drive 1 You will be asked befor ach file is moved If the file already exists on drive 1 you will be asked again before it is copied over CONV 1 0 VIS Q N This example will move all
52. utilities do not use SVCs A program which is written to use SVCs will not run unless the SVC table is in place The first SVC call will cause an abort back to the LDOS Ready level with a SYS ERROR message Using the SVC table requires that KI DVR be used The system will not function properly if using the SVC table and the ROM keyboard driver TECH INFO SUPERVISORY CALLS FUNCTION Reserved for future use Scan keyboard wait for character Display character at cursor advance cursor Register lt C gt must contain character to display Get one byte from a logical device Write one byte to a logical device Register lt C gt must contain the character to PUT Make a control request to a logical device Register lt C gt must contain the request Send character to the line printer Register lt C gt must contain the character to print xocate origin of CALL DEC HEX LABEL 0 1 01 KEY 2 02 DSP 3 03 CGE 4 04 PUT 5 05 CTL 6 06 PRT 7 07 WHERE 8 9 09 KEYIN 10 OA DSPLY TL OB LOGER 12 OC LOGOT 13 OD MSG 14 OE PRINT 15 16 10 PAUSE 17 11 PARAM 8 20 21 15 ABORT 22 16 EXIT 23 17 CMD 24 18 CMNDI 25 Reserved for future use Accept a line of input Display a message line Issue a log message Display and log a message Message line handler Print a message line
53. you will be prompted with the following questions SINGLE DENSITY This question must be answered Y yes FORMAT in single density or N no Single density use double density DOUBLE SIDED This question may be answered Y yes FORMAT both sides or N no FORMAT only one side If your disk drives are not double sided or if you do not have actual double sided diskettes then this question must be answered N IMPORTANT The disk drive and cable must treat the double sided drive as a Single drive not as two separate drives A drive that treats each side of the disk as a separate drive will NOT work NUMBER OF CYLINDERS This is the number of CYLinders tracks that will be FORMATted onto the diskette Normal 5 FORMAT is 40 tracks although you may specify any number between 2 and 80 If a larger number is specified the disk drive must be capable of stepping to the highest track This question will not be asked for 8 drives as 77 CYLinders is assumed BOOT STRAP STEPPING RATE 6 12 20 30 40 MSECS NOTE The stepping rates shown are for 5 drives The corresponding 8 rates are 3 6 10 20 This is the stepping rate for drive 0 that will be read in from the disk s BOOT track each time the system is powered up or BOOTed This step rate may be changed with the SYSTEM DRIVE d STEP n parameter and stored ina CONFIG file created by the SYSTEM SYSGE
54. 5 Set to 1 if MiniDOS FLT is active Bit 6 Set to 1 if KSM FLT is active Bit 7 Set to 1 if GRAPHIC is on in the system TECH INFO RAM STORAGE ASSIGNMENTS 6 SUPERVISORY CALLS The LDOS supervisory call table SVC table provides an alternative method for accessing system routines and obtaining information about system status within assembly language programs All of the services which LDOS provides to user programs can be requested by means of an SVC instead of a call toa fixed RAM address This is intended to allow programs written for LDOS 5 1 to run on all future versions of LDOS without change even if hardware or ROM differences between different computer models require system ntry points and storage areas to be moved An SVC is requested by loading the A register with the SVC number in the range X 00 X 7F and performing a RST 28H instruction Depending on the function requested the other registers may be used to pass parameters or return results The following table lists the currently defined SVC numbers More may be defined in future LDOS releases Register usage is listed for those functions which differ from the corresponding direct call Refer to the Entry Points section for more information on each call Please note that the SVC table is an optional feature in Model III LDOS 5 1 refer to the SYSTEM library command LDOS 5 1 library commands and
55. BREAK gt to exit program 8 Press lt ENTER gt in response to this prompt to make another mirror image backup Press lt BREAK gt to abort the QFB utility The following prompt will appear Load SYSTEM diskette and hit lt ENTER gt Place a system diskette in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt to return to LDOS Ready If it is desired to use QFB again with different parameters press lt R gt in response to the prompt displayed in step 7 Doing so will cause the drives to be prompted for and prompts will appear for all parameters If QFB is to be restarted or the command QFB Q Y is entered the following prompts for the parameters will occur Duplicate unallocated tracks Y N Verify on same pass Y N Verify on second pass Y N The first prompt relates to the ALL parameter If it is answered with lt V gt all cylinders will be read from the source diskette and written to the destination diskette regardless of whether or not the cylinder contains information If this prompt is answered lt N gt only cylinders containing information will be read and written The next prompt relates to the V1 parameter If it is answered with lt V gt all cylinders on the destination diskette will be verified immediately after all writes If answered lt N gt no immediate verify will be done The final prompt corresponds to the V2 parameter If it is answered with lt V gt all cylinders on the d
56. C gt The E and C responses are as befor A response of N will also return you to query 2 If you want to generate an additional output copy respond with Y If you had selected TAPE output you would be prompted to ready the cassette and another copy would be written using th same fil name as was entered followed by query 9 If you had selected DISK output you would be returned to query 8 so that additional output files could be written to tape or other filespecs COMMAND FILE UTILITY 6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS If you requested an the following routi the new base address offset to the output file s original base load address ne would be appended to the end of the program provided xceeds the old base address ORG DI LD LD LD LDIR HI gt the gt the OW gt the gre INDLOD gt the BGNLOD gt sam OLDTRA gt the Where A A 733 O2Z4Z Tj If the new base ad lower memory then DI Where NEWHI gt the OLDHI gt the NEWHI 1 DRIVER ORIGIN OR NOP INTERRUPTS OFF HL NEWLOW JPT TO OFFSET START DE OLDLOW PT TO WHERE IT GOES BC ENDLOD BGNLOD 1 LENGTH OF MOVE MOVE IT IN PLACE OLDTRA 7GO TO ORIG ENTRY PT highest load address after offset lowest load address after offset original lowest load address ater than 41FFH original highest load ad
57. DCB jump vector address Gl KIJCLS Area X 42BE X 42BF Save area for KIJCL DCB jump vector address LDRVS Address X 4427 Currently accessed drive logical number 0 7 TECH INFO RAM STORAGE ASSIGNMENTS 3 OSVERS Address X 441F Contains the operating system version Number OVRLY Area X 4414 Contains the LDOS overlay currently resident in the overlay region PDRVS Address X 4423 Currently accessed drive physical drive address PRSV Area X 42BC X 42BD Save area for PR DCB jump vector address TIMERS Address X 4288 This is the 33 333 millisecond heartbeat counter TIMES Address X 4217 XK 4219 Contains the time of day IMES O Contains the seconds IMES 1 Contains the minutes IMES 2 Contains the hours Interrupt Processor Task Vector Storage INTIMS Address X 4473 Contains an image of the interrupt latch INTVC Address X 4475 X 4484 This area contains eight vectors one for each latch INTVCS 0 Vector for latch bit 0 INTVCS 2 Vector for latch bit 1 INTVCS 4 Vector for latch bit 2 INTVCS 6 Vector for latch bit 3 INTVCS 8 Vector for latch bit 4 TECH INFO RAM STORAGE ASSIGNMENTS 4 1 2 4 or 8 bit of the interrupt INTVC 10 INTVC 12 INTVC 14 TCBS Address Vector for latch
58. DIRECTORY RECORDS G A T 6 GAT X 00 through GAT X 5F Contains the free assigned table information GAT 0 corresponds to cylinder 0 GAT 1 corresponds to cylinder 1 GAT 2 corresponds to cylinder 2 and so forth As noted above bit 0 of each byte corresponds to the first granule on the cylinder bit 1 corresponds to the second granule etc A 1 indicates the granule is not available for use GAT X 60 through GAT X BF Contains the available locked out table information It corresponds on a cylinder for cylinder basis as does th free assigned table It is used specifically during mirror image backup functions to determine if the destination has the proper capacity to effect a backup of the source diskette GAT X CO through GAT X CA Used in hard drive configurations by extending the free assigned table from X 00 through X CA Hard drives cannot be backed up in a mirror image manner since their re mapped cylinder configuration would exceed core limits Thus there is no need to reserve space for a lockout table Hard drive capacity up to 202 mapped cylinders 404 standard is supported GAT X CB Contains the operating system version used in formatting the disk Disks formatted under LDOS 5 1 will have a value of X 51 contained in this byte It is used to determine whether or not the diskette contains all of the parameters needed for LDOS 5 1 operation GAT X CC This byte contains the number of cylinders i
59. F ILT ER LINK ROUTE S ET 17 ORY HIG es command X 7FF Library will show LDOS always HS decreasing the value in HIGHS USING BASIC WITH LDOS Your LDOS diskette comes with an program contains mos features and enhance are included to pr Instructions for us LBASIC section of t of ments ovide ing he a ma for certain functions If Ey protects not guaranteed to highest unused tility routines you EMORY Library command at do no honor H n high memo F py SYSTI LO iS the cur and M Tted nnot be memory load or IGHS ry and drivers rent LDOS has not loaded X BFFF or X FFFF its own routines enhanced Disk Basic called LBASIC CMD the features of wo utility programs renumbering and er 1 nual please refer to a TRSDOS Disk Basic manual GENERAL INFORMATION 6 TRSDOS Disk Basic LBASIC OV1 r OSS special LBASIC features For standard Disk Basic plus many reference will be found in any for by This new and LBASIC OV2 capabilities the operating commands the EVICE KI DO PR JIL KL SO devices SYSTEM has An LDOS device is used alphabetic characters Ss D DEVICES he LDOS operating system is a truly Devic system uses independent of the hardware located in the BASIC ROM or in RAM me
60. GAT is suspect This error may also occur if the disk was write protected during a GAT write attempt 22 HIT read error x 16 Similar to error 20 but occurring during the reading of the Hash Index Table 23 HIT write error X 17 Similar to error 21 but occurring during the writing of the Hash Index Table 24 File not in directory x 18 You referenced a file specification that could not be located in the directory Note that if your request was to LOAD or RUN the file th rror message displayed would be Program not found Most likely the caus was a misspelled filespec 25 File access denied x 19 The requested file was password protected and the password used was neither the ACCESS nor UPDATE password This will also occur if a password is specified for a non password protected file 26 Full or write protected disk X 1A An open of a new file was requested and the target disk s directory was entirely in use Use another diskette or kill off unneeded files The error could also result if the disk was protected from write requests 27 Disk space full X LBA While a file was being written all available space on the disk was allocated befor the fil was completely written Whatever space was already allocated to the file will still be allocated although the file s end of file pointer will not be updated It may be desirable to kill the file to recover th space after writing
61. I O using the FILTER routine CR FLT For example if CL had been SET to the RS 232 driver this comma port FILTER nd would FILTER I O to and from the RS 232 LIBRARY COMMAND J This command will show the used and available space and files on each disk in the system The syntax is FREE P FREE d P P an optional parameter that directs output to the printer abbr NONE To execute the fr command simply type FREE at the LDOS Ready prompt LDOS will respond with a display similar to this Drive 0 LDOS5 1B 07 01 81 Files 97 128 Space 87 180 K Drive 1 LDOS 5 0 06 01 81 Files 39 64 Space 19 88 K aaaaaaa bbbbbbbb cccccccc ddddddddd eee fffffffffff gggggg Several fields are displayed in each line EF FREE information representing the about one disk The line under the display contains alpha characters to show the fields that will contain the FREE information The information given in each of the fields is aa This field shows the drive number that the rest of the information in the line will pertain to bb This field shows the name of the disk cc This field shows the DATE of creation of the disk dd This shows the number of DIRECTORY entries that are AVAILABLE for use number of files that may be added ee This shows the TOTAL number of direc
62. L gt nnnn lt D gt Go to the next L address last search T the next address it wil Note the lt G gt o data searched the lt G gt o comma is not located occurrence of The lt G gt o comma f the last searc l lt G gt o to works in for is not nd is issued af the current rec the conju Found the position o lt G gt o command search criteria with the cursor Locate Hex to find load a string searches X O000 rathe address is loc address will over this byte will be displa continue After edit buffer pri and the position of the cursors will be is performed message will b conjunction of the same loa List the command starting from printed will b to its completi has been compl edit buffer p stored in the file The lt f the relative c is issued after is not located pointing at load address X nnnn ddress X nnnn the lt L gt ocate command starts its search cursor ated the record containing the byte and the cursors located yed and you will be prompted to press lt ENTER gt record command unaffected appropriate error r than at the be displayed If the address lt ENTER gt to is pr issuing t or on a non load m e displayed Th with the lt L gt command to d address current search criteria nd performs next ter ord will ursors any other in a load current is not h was
63. LDOS operating system as well as explanations of the User s manual layout and conventions 8 If any questions or problems arise that cannot be solved by the User s manual you will find a Toll Free user support number listed in the CUSTOMER SERVICE section and on the Warranty page both in the rear of this manual GETTING STARTED z LDOS FILE DESCRIPTIONS This section will describe the various files found on your LDOS master diskette and explain their functions It will also describe how to construct a minimum system disk for running applications packages FILE GROUP SYSTEM FILES SYS The descriptions of the SYS files can be found in SYSTEM OVERLAYS near the end of the technical section FILE GROUP UTILITIES BACKUP Used to duplicate data from one disk to another CMDFILE A disk tape tape disk utility for machine language programs CONV Used to copy files from Model III TRSDOS to LDOS 5 1 x FORMAT Used to put track sector and directory information on a disk LCOMM A communications package for use with the RS 232 hardware LOG Used to log in a double sided diskette in drive 0 Also updates the drive code table information the same as the DEVICE library command PATCH Used to make changes to existing disk files REPAIR Used to correct certain information on non LDOS formatted diskettes FILE GROUP DEVICE DRIVERS JL
64. Lise t Li fac hi 6 e ne mad provide eight different By plugging could prove quite useful end of a large JCL procedure f a procedure to bring attention to a specific process selected is controlled by a ton h 7 producing the lowest tone Any value entered will be used in its modulo 8 form zero value will be The tone is Tone and silence N n Note the use of the e directory to be is explained in the is in lower case intermixed with uppe This an audible sign tones and a small amplifier xclamation constantly Glossary This is case as r al to direct into the its the You could lso be used It could a number The nu to the use it during and OT producing t That assumed The val followed bya must be repeated fo is be e can renthes o repeat by enclosing t is our d JCL Lo t blink nal display The duration will be used If messag line th the lt ENTER gt flashing will key is immedia S N N a If omitted E ar used the string pressed No display is made as a S a repeating tone cassette port the rt 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 lin on message on a duration of pressed during the fla ly ceas and the next will be fetched JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE EXECUTION
65. N LBASIC PROGRAM RENUMBERING This LBASIC feature will renumber LBASIC program line numbers as well as all line references such as GOSUB and GOTO The syntax is CMD N aaaa bbbb cccc dddd optional parameter to skip the complete scan for errors before renumbering begins aaaa line number of the current program to start the renumbering from bbbb new line number for line aaaa ccecce increment between line numbers dddd the first line number above those to b renumbered minus one LBASIC OV1 must be present on the disk or a Program Not Found error will occur You cannot have a line number zero 0 if renumbering an LBASIC program This renumber feature will allow you to renumber all or parts of the LBASIC program currently in memory The lines to be renumbered can be anywhere in the program However if the parameters you use would result in the renumbered lines being out of sequence a BAD PARAMETERS error will occur If you do not specify the exclamation point character a full scan for errors will be done before the renumbering starts If errors do exist no lines will be changed It is usually much easier to fix the errors before the lines are renumbered If you do specify the any error found will still abort the renumbering However all internal line number references will have already been changed up to the line that cause the e
66. NRN This routine will rewind a file to its beginning and reset the 3 byt NRN to 0 The next record to I O will be the first record of the file E gt FCB for the file to rewind A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful RREAD Vector X 445E This routine will force a reread of the current sector to occur before the next i o request is serviced Its most probable use would be in applications that reuse the disk I O buffer for multiple files to make written REWRIT will decrement the NRN and write the again TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS FILE CONTROL 8 sure that the buffer contains the proper file sector This routine is only valid for byte I O or blocked files DE gt FCB for the file to reread A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful RWRIT Vector X 4461 This routine will rewrite the current sector following a write operation The WRITE function advances NRN after the sector is disk buffer DE gt FCB for the file to rewrit A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful SKIP Vector X 4464 QVI This routine will cause a skip past the next logical record Only record number contained in the FCB will be changed No physical I will take place E gt FCB for the file to skip A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was
67. The LDOS JobLog driver program KI The LDOS Keyboard driver providing Type Ahead Screen Print and special lt CLEAR gt key functions RS232T Used to configure and access the RS 232 hardware FILE GROUP FILTER PROGRAMS KSM Establishes the KeyStroke Multiply feature which allows assigning user determined phrases to alphabetic keys GETTING STARTED 3 MINIDOS Establishes certain immediate functions to shifted alphabetic keys feature PR Allows the user to format printed output FILE GROUP BASIC AND BASIC OVERLAYS LBASIC Enhanced Disk Basic program LBASIC OV1 Renumber overlay used with LBASIC s CMD N feature LBASIC OV2 Cross reference overlay used with LBASIC s CMD x LBASIC OV3 Error and Sort routines for LBASIC CREATING A MINIMUM CONFIGURATION DISK high memory with All files except certain SYS files may be removed from your run time drive 0 disk Additionally if the needed SYS files are placed in the SYSTEM SYSRES command it will be possible to run witha in drive 0 after BOOTing the system For operation SYS files 1 2 3 4 resident in memory SYS 11 must be 8 present only if any JCL and 10 should remain o data diskette n drive O or be files will be used Both Libraries SYS 6 and SYS 7 will be used SYS 5 and SYS 9 needed may be removed if no may be removed if the system When using LBASIC the OV3 overlay must al
68. a pound sign translated MYFILE OBJ 2 HEX P e the pound sign is used to mark off string substitution compiled JCL procedure cannot contain a single pound sign If a is needed use two consecutive pound signs This will be by the compiler into a single symbol JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE COMPILATION 19 EXECUTION The execution phase of JCL processing monitors the ongoing interface between the operating system s activities andthe instructions contained in the JCL fil being executed One requirement of executing a JCL file is that its first line must be a comment an LDOS library command or an executable program command line The first line cannot be an execution phase macro The following comment strings and macros are processed during the execution phase lt comment message string gt Any line beginning with a period is considered to be a comment and will not be included in execution A comment line will be displayed to the screen for informational purposes If you have an active job log in effect the message will also b time stamped and sent to the job log device JL A comment is most useful as a tag identifying the JCL file name If used as the first line you will avoid complications that result if an execution macro comes first There should be a single space between the period and the comment string EXIT The EXIT macro is used to exit t
69. above a certain baud rate It may be necessary to hook the hardware s handshake line such as the BUSY line to an appropriate RS 232 lead such as CTS Problem 3 Random system crashes re occurring disk I O errors system lock up and other random glitches keep happening If you encounter these types of problems the first thing to check is the cable connections between the TRS 80 and the peripherals The contacts can oxidize and this can cause many different random problems Clean th dg card connectors on the CPU unit and the peripherals and be sure all other cable connections are secure If you experience constant difficulty in disk read write operations chances are that the disk driv heads need cleaning There are kits available to clean disk heads or you may wish to have the disk drive serviced at a repair facility IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY zi If you need to frequently clean the disk heads you might be using some defective disk media Check the diskettes for any obvious signs of flaking or excess wear and dispose of any that appear even marginal Tobacco smoke and other airborne contaminants can build up on disk heads and can cause read write problems Disk drives in dirty locations may need to have their heads cleaned as often as once a week One common and often overlooked cause of random type problems is STATIC LECTRICITY In areas of low humidity static electricity is prese
70. be res powerful system utility a sking a questi tricted from JCL en it canno However a will the on try procedure will automatically turn off the DEBU JCL can exceed 63 charac Several other system com following lists those co ers in length mands cannot be mmands not acceptable for JCL execu ete minimize the command inst ver powerful to compile ed in nd program query responses of the JCL at run time then automatically execute user LDOS library commands JCL is to pre establish precludes the running Since it is absolutely essential h JCL file responses any depending For example t be run under JCL Also Gger ted applic ance The Y EV EN BAUD COPY x DEBUG BUILD PURGE RESET KI or RESET SYSTEM SYSGEN JCL can be constructed to run compl intervention It can also be used to frequently used LDOS procedures For requires frequent use of the RS 232 dri establish the RS 232 might be SET CL TO RS232 WORD 7 STOP 2 PARI By BUILDing a single line JCL file with above sequence of characters the Comm entering the command DO SETCL This reduces the keystrok All programs that utilize System Entry Point section JCL file the capability of pre arranging input s required to the line input will be able just as though you t
71. bit 5 Vector for latch bit 6 Vector for latch bit 7 X 4500 X 4517 This area interrupt processor tasks INTVCS millisecond slots eight Bit contains the vecto r addresses for each of the twelve possible executed by the real time clock assigned to 7 Task slots zero through seven ar xecuted at 266 667 intervals and are considered low priority tasks Task through eleven ar xecuted at 33 333 millisecond intervals and are considered high priority tasks TCBS 1 TCB 1 TCB 1 TCB 1 TCB 0 TCB 2 TCB 6 TCB 2 TCB 2 0 2 System Buffers CFCBS Area Task slot 0 currently unassigned Task slot 1 currently unassigned Task slot 2 currently unassigned Task slot 3 assig Task slot 4 currently unassigned Task slot 5 currently unassigned Task slot 6 currently unassigned Task slot 7 currently unassigned Task slot 10 Task slot 11 X 4485 X 44A4 File control block buffer area used during CMD interpreting DBGSVS Area X 405D X 407C Area used during DI During non D save area and must not be disturbed TECH INFO EBUG operation as a register sav ned to the ALIVE function assigned to the TRACE function RAM STORAGE ASSIGNMENTS 5 area Task slot 8 assigned to the LCOMM Communications Line scann
72. defaulted to those of filespecl RENAME H EST DAT TO TEST E This command is not a valid command and will produce the error message DUPLICATE FILE NAME his is because th xtension of filespec2 will default to DAT thereby creating the same filename for filespec2 and filespecl which are the same fil RENAME LIBRARY COMMAND 2 This command will RESET logical devices and provide a way to restore HIGHS highest unused memory location to the top of memory RESET RESET devspec abbr NONE There are two uses for the RESET command The first is a global RESET the second is the RESET of a single device The global RESET will RESET all active devices while the RESET of a single device will affect only that device The single device RESET will restore the devic to its normal power up state If high memory was used when this device was altered it will not be reclaimed by the system However some routines can re us the same memory allocation if they ar nabled again after being disabled or RESET The following will re use their original memory
73. drives until it finds a file named EST DAT and then COPY it onto drive 1 using the filespec TEST DAT COPY LIBRARY COMMAND 2 COPY TEST DAT PASSWORD 0 TO 1 COPY COPY passwords set to CLOSED assigned the name and extension of added the password CLOSED Ifa COPYed it cannot be changed during ATTRIB Notice that password exists This command would COPY the password protected file TEST DAT PASSWORD from drive 0 to drive 1 The file on drive 1 will be named EST DAT PASSWORD Remember that ALL parts of filespec2 will default to those of filespecl if they are not specified EST DAT 0 TO TEST DAT CLOSED 1 TEST DAT 0 TO CLOSED 1 These commands will COPY the file TEST DAT from drive 0 to drive 1 The file on drive 1 will be named TEST DAT and have the update and access the filespecl second command dynamically to filespec2 and then on the file being a COPY To change a password see COPY MYPROG BAS MYNAME 0 1 CLONE This will COPY the file MYPROG BAS MYNAME from drive 0 to drive 1 The CLONE parameter has been specified so both ACCess and UPDate passwords plus the MOD flag the VISibility status and the PROTection level will be transferred with the file from drive 0 to drive The last written to date in the original file on drive 0 will also be transferred
74. file No don t PURGE it is EAK gt key at this prompt If tch the password of the disk the PURGE It will PURGE all files the disk s Master Password is it Once the PURGE IS PURGED IT WILL BE disk but be sure you Password of the disk in entered it will PURGE all with the extension BAS from the before each file is killed as QUERY desired You disk You will NOT be the QUERY was specified as N activity by pressing the lt BR PURGE LIBRARY COMMAND able to stop the purge PURGE S EX1 0 I This command will PURGE all non SYyStem files whose filename has the characters EX1 as the third fourth and fifth characters of the filename The wildcard character masks the first two characters of th filenam the filename may be more than 5 characters in length as trailing characters in the field are ignored The file extension will have no effect on this PURGE command You will be asked before any file is actually PURGED as Q was not specified and defaulted to Q Y INVisible and VISible files will both be shown as the I switch was used PURGE S 2 This command will PURGE all VISible files on drive 2 whose file extension contains 3 characters and ends in the letter S This would PURGE files with the extension of BAS for exampl However it would
75. from the keyboard driver allows type ahead This may be the ROM driver routine or the KI DVR driver that rint and lt CLEAR gt key recognition screen p device which is shown NIL on power up but tandard Input device which will normally be pointed NIL tandard Output and will normally be pointed NIL It may be an asterisk followed by Setting up phantom or real devices is a This device is the Display Output video This device is the line PRinter This is the JOBLOG control must be SET to its driver to be used This is the S This is the S This may be any User created Devic any two alpha characters very important part of the devic LINK ROUTE and SI ET independenc of LDOS see FILTER DEVICE LIBRARY COMMAND 2 These device relationships and specifications will change from time to time depending on the use of the FILTER ROUTE SET LINK SYSTEM and RESET commands Note that the UD device has been ROUTEd to a disk file The filename of the file is shown by the device that is providing the input to that file see ROUTE After you have ROUTEd or SET a device and or driver you may enter the DEVICE command to see how the different devices have been affected After any changes are made to the system the DEVICE command will show where each of the hardware devices is going to enter the first driver dealing with that device as well as the
76. g are further described as follows space drive number This field is the file is file is set to the file name with its extension if one is password protected a P will fol INVisible then an I will al filename If the file has been MODified since sign or MOD flag will also appear in SYyStem file an S will appear S I in any combination to show the file s actual status so appear it was last this This is the length of each logical record in the file This is the number of logical records in the file J extents This is the number of file is written which the non contiguous blocks of This is the amount of space in K takes up on the disk A S indicates a CREA 1024 byte blocks Ed file appear in the first containing descriptions of low the filespec field P and may appear together case letters present Tf If the following the BACKed UP a te st isxa This field shows the PROTection level that has been set for the file space in that the file while a S indicates a normally allocated file DIR LIBRARY COMMAND 3 gg orrect if the date was set during the last write to the file hile the date is set DIR DVR 2 Free space 13 8 K Drive 2 LDOS C gt 12 03 80 RS232L DVR P TAPE DVR RS232 DVR P SERIALPR DVR his is the date that the file was las
77. he DCB follows a strict format that defines the utilization of the non storage fields This format must be followed in all Device Control Blocks established by the user Each DCB is six characters in length The following aL nformation provides specifications for each assigned DCB BYTE Byte 0 TYPE byte Bit 7 This bit specifies that the Device Control Block is actually a File Control Block FCB with the file in an OPEN condition Since there is a great deal of similarity between DCBs and FCBs and devices may be routed to files tracing a path through device links may reveal a device with this bit set indicating a routing to a file Bit 6 amp 5 These bits are reserved for future use Bit 4 If set then the devic defined by the DCB is ROUTEd to another device Bit 3 If set then th device defined by the DCB is a NIL device Any output directed to the device will be discarded Any input request will be satisfied with a ZERO return condition Bit 2 If set then th device defined by the DCB is capable of handling requests generated by the CTL system call S the System Entry Point Table for additional information Bit 1 If set then the devic defined by the DCB is capable of handling output requests which normally come from the PUT system vector Bit 0 If set then th devic defined by the DCB is capable of handling requests for input wh
78. if PUT request 00990 01000 if carry is not set and Z flag is not set 01001 then the request came from CTL This 01002 routine could just eliminate the JR Z PUTBYT 01003 since it is shown strictly for demonstration 01004 of how to differentiate the thr vectors 01005 pea 52AE 79 01010 PUTBYT LD A C 7grab the output byte 01020 01030 any coding for the entrapment of specific 01040 bytes can be done here 01050 pea 52AF F5 01060 PUSH AF save the flag value 52B0 FEOO 01070 TRAPBYT CP 00 space for trap char 52B2 2002 01080 JR NZ S 4 branch if not trapped 52B4 F1 01090 POP AF rcvr flag value 52B5 C9 01100 RET return if trapped 52B6 F1 01110 POP AF rcvr flag value 52B7 C30000 01120 ACCEPT JP 0 output to orig device 52B7 01121 GETBYT EQU ACCEPT or input w o filtering 52BA 01130 LAST EQU 01140 P RR 01150 parameter table format as follows 01160 1 gt 6 character parm word buffered with spaces 01170 2 gt address of word to receive the value parsed 01180 3 gt repeat 1 amp 2 for as many parms desired 01190 4 gt end with an X 00 to indicate the tabl nd 01200 01210 The parameter scanner accepts parms in the 01220 following format 01230 4 PARM X dddd hexadecimal entry max 4 digits 01240 PARM ddddd decimal entry max 65535 01250 PARM string string entry word address 01260 will contain the address of 01270 the lst character of string 01280 01290 On re
79. in use or locked out A reset bit indicates a granule free to be used In the GAT byte bit 0 corresponds to the first relative granule Bit 1 corresponds to the second relative granule Bit 2 the third and so on A 5 1 4 single density diskette is formatted at 10 sectors per cylinder 5 sectors per granule 2 granules per cylinder Thus that configuration will use only bits 0 amp 1 of the GAT byte The remaining GAT byte will contain all l s thereby denoting unavailable granules Other formatting conventions are as follows sectors sectors granules maximum cylinder granule cylinder cylinders 5 SDEN 10 5 2 80 5 DDEN 18 6 3 80 8 SDEN 16 8 2 77 8 DDEN 30 10 3 77 5 HARD 128 16 8 153 8 HARD 256 32 8 256 This table assumes single sided media LDOS supports double sided operation within the confines of the hardware interfacing the physical drives to the CPU A two headed drive will function as a single unit with the second side as a cylinder for cylinder extension of the first side A bit in the Drive Cod Table DCT indicates one sided or two sided drive configuration A Winchester type hard disk can be partitioned by heads into multiple logical drives Information will be supplied along with the particular drive The Granule Allocation Table is the first relative sector of the directory cylinder The following describes the layout of the GAT and the information contained in it TECH INFO
80. ine are LY careful unless you are EXTREM to characters and COPY to a LDOS features do KSM FLT and MiniDOS Ahead Screen Print opt recognition for KSM and routine will be change functions are used Several DO The Video Display The DO device located in RAM and ca the DOWN ARROW key is video driver from being is the v driver instead This programs cause problems with Ty function that uses interrupt processing Note that the DO dri the system or introduce totally unwanted characters specific device or file make use of These ion a other d to set line wrap around th simply ROUTE printer he video instead of going to see reference These user has created LINK ROUTE involving data and creation of the six LDOS system devices individual needs The as well advised NOT progra Keyst functions a loca as the number of lines per page and parameters such the printer to a disk file and all later on a system with a the display and see the the printer to print it to to the represe terms device the six system To crea a device pleas ET It is possible to use h as APPEND COPY and KILL as file specifications or describe all situations devices What this section will Any other device interaction or sophistication and or n terms and S I O suc well as imagine normal KI driver the
81. init to XO0E xfer to reg A stuff in filter reduce HIGHS by the length of this driver Cclear the carry flag calculate new HIGHS driver now protected point HL at new START xfer orig DCB vector to driver CALL interrupts off for update DCB vector to filter entry xfer new START to DE load address of driver NOW move driver to top clock back on return to DOS log error message abort the request le filter to trap control codes CR This filter is for output only CR PUSH DE PUSH HL LD HL MSG CALL DSPLY POP HL LD DE PARMTBL CALL PARAM POP IX JR NZ PARRERR BPARM LD DE 14 LD A E LD TRAPBYT 1 A LD HL HIGHS LD BC LAST START XOR A SBC HL BC LD HIGHS HL INC HL LD A IX 1 LD ACCEPT 1 A LD A IX 2 LD ACCEPT 2 A DI LD IX 1 L LD IX 2 H EX DE HL LD HL START LDIR EI JP EXI ROMER REA error abort ay ite Ne PARMERR LD HL PRM MSG JR ERREXIT NOGOOD LD HL ERR MSG EFRREXIT CALL LOGOT JP ABORT MSG DM Samp 20 66 69 74 6F 20 63 6F 6E 63 6F 64 ERR MSG DM 69 6C 74 20 66 6F 70 75 74 21 0D PRM MSG DB Bad parameters CR 72 61 6D OD Deane Actual FILTER routine to shift up to HIGHS TECH INFO FILTERS amp DRIVERS 4 00960 x 52AA 3805 00970 START JR C GETBYT jump if GET request 52AC 2800 00980 JR Z PUTBYT jump
82. instruction the stack will contain the return address upon entry to the program If this is not needed a JP instruction may be used to enter RUN D T F Di gt FCB containing the filespec of the file to RUN TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS FILE CONTROL 6 Disk file handler routines In general only the flag register and the accumulator are disturbed unless a register is used to return data requested by the system call All file access routines are accessed by a CALL instruction BKSP Vector X 4445 This routine will perform a backspace of one logical record E gt FCB of the file to backspace A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful CKEOF Vector X 4458 Q ad oO Q a forrt nd of file at the current logical record number E gt FCB for the file to check A lt Error return code Z lt Set if not at the end of file LOC Vector X 446D Calculate the current logical record number DI FCB for the file to check BC lt the logical record number A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful la ll Vv LOF Vector X 4470 Calculate the EOF logical record number DE gt FCB for the file to check BC lt the logical record number A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful PEOF Vector X 4448 This
83. interaction between devices and or files T TOQUE The DEVICE command will update disk information in the device table in the following manner Each diskette in a currently enabled disk drive will be examined for number of sides density and location of the DIRectory track If a drive is enabled but contains no diskette the device tabl ntry for that drive will not change The LOG CMD utility program will perform the same function but for a single drive only If the DEVICE command should hang up or return totally incorrect drive information the Driv Code Tabl does not contain the proper size and location of your drives The physical location and size 5 or 8 must be correct for the DEVICE command to log on the drives Should this problem occur reBOOT LDOS with the lt CLEAR gt key held down If using other than 5 floppies use the SYSTEM DRIVE DRIVER command to set the proper drive configuration for your system After checking the drive information with the DEVICE command save this configuration with the SYSTEM SYSGEN command The Options line will show you the system options currently active These options are established with the SYSTEM SET SPOOL and FILTER commands You will also see which SYStem overlays are cu
84. is the only way to BUILD a file without an extension defeating the default JCL extension Note that the file SPECIAL cannot already exist or an error will be generated BUILD MYJOBS JCL APPEND This command would search all available drives for a file named MYJOBS JCL If not found it would be created on the first available drive If the fil already existed any input from the BUILD would be APPENDed onto the end of the file This is the way for example to extend an incomplete JCL file BUILD DISPLAY BLD HEX This command would BUILD a file allowing the use of the packed HEX format The file must not already exist or an error will be generated Information may be entered into this file as HEX bytes and will be stored as a normal BUILD format file This format will allow 127 HEX byte representations per physical line Logical lines may continue on more than one physical line as long as a 0D does not appear which would terminate the logical line The lt ENTER gt is used to terminate a physical line If a non hex digit is ntered th rror message BAD HEX DIGIT ENCOUNTERED will be displayed and the build will abort BUILD MYPROGA FIX 0 This would BUILD a file with the desir d extension of FIX for use with the PATCH utility see PATCH BUILD LIBRARY COMMAND 3 This command turns on syntax is or off the screen display of the real time clock The CLOCK switch switch abbr ON
85. key to break or halt the AUTOed command The lt BREAK gt key will also be disabled from this point AUTO LIBRARY COMMAND 1 To restore the power up sequence to the normal LDOS READY type AUTO This will eliminate any stored automatic key in by removing it from its storage place on the disk kkk NOTE x You can override any breakable AUTO function during power up or reset by holding down lt ENTER gt during initialization This may be your only way of regaining control of the system if the dos command is not a working program If the AUTO function disables the lt BREAK gt key and the AUTOed program is non functional it may seem impossible to regain control of that disk Should this occur simply BOOT another non AUTOed disk in drive 0 When the LDOS READY appears place the non functional disk in drive 0 type AUTO and press lt ENTER gt The runaway AUTO function will then be removed from that disk AUTO LIBRARY COMMAND J This command causes the disk in drive 0 to be BOOTed into the system It has the same effect as the reset pushbutton switch or a power up condition The syntax is BOOT lt CLEAR gt lt RIGHT ARROW gt lt ENTER gt lt D gt Holding down the indicated key during the BOOT will result in the following actions lt CLEAR gt No SYSGENed configuration will take place lt RIGHT ARRO
86. lt F gt command will perform a search for the hex string nn nn nn starting at th relative byt pointed to by the cursors If in the 256 byte display mode the length of the hex string may be from 2 to 6 characters long and must b represented as an even number of characters If in the 128 byte display mode the length of the hex string may be from 2 to 30 characters long and must b represented as an even number of characters The search will begin from the byte over which the cursor is positioned and will scan all records past the current record until the first occurrence of the string is encountered If a match is found the record containing the match will be displayed and the cursors will be positioned over the first character of the record which matches the search string To terminate any search you may press the lt BREAK gt key This will cause the record which was contained in the edit buffer prior to the search to be read back in from the disk If a match is not found an will appear in the command buffer and the cursor will be positioned over relativ byte X FF of the last record Only hex bytes can be entered not hex digits An will appear in the command buffer if an odd number of hex digits are entered If there are multiple occurrences of the specified string you can go to each occurrence by means of the lt G gt o command FED FILE EDITOR Page 7 lt G gt lt
87. no JCL message is displayed to the screen Any prompting for input must come from the running application If the JCL file used as an example in the EXIT discussion was constructed as SET CL RS232 WORD 8 STOP 1 PARITY NO DTR LCOMM CL XLATE X 3B5F STOP then as soon as the first file prompt was entered JCL execution would cease and the keyboard would become alive The respons to the prompt would have to come from the keyboard Bear in mind if you close out a job with the STOP macro and the job has just concluded then th system may appear to hang as no prompt for keyboard input would be given Although the desire was to return to LDOS Ready the STOP keyboard request would come prior to any LDOS Ready prompt and you may not realize it Make sure you use the proper exit macro for the intended job application PAUSE lt comment message string gt This macro will temporarily suspend program execution The entire job will go into a wait state The resumption of the job will take place upon depressing the lt ENTER gt key Pressing the lt BREAK gt key will abort the job this JCL will pause clock on armalarm door 3 window 5 phone 7035551212 pause After pressing ENTER you have 25 seconds to leave delay 250 create joblog 2 s 5 route j1 joblog 2 lbasic b1lk 50 RUN security bas stop This JCL could initiate a proced
88. not PURGE the SYStem files as the S switch was not specified You will be prompted before each file is PURGEd PURGE CMD 0 I This command will PURGE all non SYStem files EXCEPT those whose extension is CMD You will be asked befor ach file is PURGEd PURGE 1 D 02 01 81 02 04 81 This command will PURGE all VISible files on drive 1 as long as their MOD date is between 02 01 81 and 02 04 81 inclusive You will be asked before each file is PURGEd PURGE SCR 2 Q N D 06 02 81 This command will PURGE all VISible files with a SCR extension provided their MOD date is 06 02 81 or earlier You will not be asked before each file is PURGEd PURGE LIBRARY COMMAND 3 This command will R G ENAME a file The syntax is abbr NONE RENAME filespecl TO filespec2 RENAME filespec TO partspec The RENAME command allows you to change th filename and extension of a given file The RENAME command will use dynamic defaults for the filename extension and drivespec of filespec2 This means that any part of filespec2 that is not specified will default to that of filespecl The drivespec of filespec2 if specified MUST be the same as that of filespecl or the RENAME will abort and an error message will be generated ENAME will G not allow the hange or alter a password ENAM H EST DAT 0 TO OL
89. of the program file and verify the memory available in your CPU 37 Illegal access attempted to protected file X25 Gl The ACCESS password was given for an operation that required the UPDAT password 38 File not open X 26 An I O operation was requested using a File Control Block that indicated a closed file S the section on File Control Blocks and the field FCB 0 39 Device in use XxI27 A request was made to KILL a device remove it from the Device Control Block tables while it was in use It is necessary to first RESET a device in use 40 Protected system device X 28 You cannot kill any of the following devices KI DO PR JL If you try you will get this error message Unknown error code Any time the error routine is called with a error number not in the acceptable range this message will be displayed It most likely indicates a software problem TECH INFO ERROR DICTIONARY 6 FILE CONTR The File Control Blo to interface with a dynamic As records fields in the FCB a time period that a unless you are sure of the file During most system reference each fiel initial reference to the FCB address of the FCB follows OL BLOCK FCB ck FCB is a 32 byte region that is used by the system s been opened Its contents are extremely to or read from the disk file specific file that ha are written re modified
90. of the extent what relative granule it is and how many contiguous grans are in use in the extent It is encoded according to the following pattern DIR 22 Contains the cylinder value for the starting gran of that extent DIR 23 bits 0 through 4 contain the quantity of contiguous granules The value is relative to 0 Therefore a 0 value implies one gran 1 implies two and so forth Since the field is 5 bits it contains a maximum of X 1F or 31 which would represent 32 contiguous grans DIR 23 bits 5 through 7 contain the granule of the cylinder which is the first granule of the file for that extent Again this value is offset from zero DIR 24 amp DIR 25 Contain the fields for the second extent The format is identical to extent 1 DIR 26 amp DIR 27 Contain the fields for the third extent The format is identical to extent 1 DIR 28 amp DIR 29 Contain the fields for the fourth extent The format is identical to extent 1 TECH INFO DIRECTORY RECORDS 4 DIR 30 Is a flag noting whether or not a link exists to an extended directory record If no further directory records are linked the byte will contain X FF If the value is X FE a link is recorded to an extended directory DIR 31 This is the link to th xtended directory noted by the previous byte The link code is the Directory Entry Code DEC of th xtended directory record The DEC is actually the position of
91. of the memory block ding address of the memory block ansfer address or execution point ional parameter for an ASCII DUMP End of Text marker ASCII A r file in CIM for non ASCII dumps and specified memory ASCII format The default file TXT for ASCII dumps locations extensions to a are The following restrictions are placed on the DUMP command addresses START he memory block must START above address X 5500 END he ENDing address must be greater than or equal to the START address TRA The transfer address may be any valid address If not specified the transfer address TRA will be back to the system Addresses may be entered in either decimal or HEXadecimal format HEX addresses must be in the form X aaaa The ASCII and ETX parameters ar used to dump the output in a pure ASCII file Address loading information is not present in the file and the file cannot be loaded by the system loader The file is identical to the file structure of most word processor systems such as SCRIPSIT or PENCIL Following the last dump character an End of Text ETX character is written This character is normally an xX 03 but may be changed with the ETX parameter to a character of your choice For example an Electric Pencil file will normally have an X 00 as the ETX character DUMP LIBRARY COMMAND z
92. or LINK that has been done ew KSM file is less than or equal to the he KI DVR program and any other desired features le with the FILTER command larger than the original a This will also original global RESE done first If it is not the message REQUEST EXCE EDS will appear and the FIL ER operation will abort KSM FILTER 3 AVAILABLE must be MEMORY The MiniDOS filter program provides a means to perform certain functions using single keystrokes The syntax is FILTER KI USING MINIDOS FLT abbr NONE The MiniDOS filter allows the keyboard driver to intercept certain keyboard inputs and immediately act on them KI MUST have been previously set to KI DVR program if MiniDOS is to be used To allow the MiniDOS filter to properly intercept all keys it must be last filter applied to the keyboard KI Note that the MiniDOS filter will reside in high memory If KI is reset MiniDOS filter will re use its initial memory allocation if activated again Once the MiniDOS filter is applied pressing the lt CLEAR gt lt SHIFT gt and specified alphabetic key will cause the following lt C gt Toggle the CLOCK display on or off lt D gt Enter the system DEBUGger if activated lt F gt Display FREE space for all active drives lt K gt Kill a file
93. ov in effect incrementing PC by the byte dd not specified th dd is starting current not specified the is Re to the nex load a block of To use this type byt bars logically through disk using DEBUG r the fil NT ER gt and DEBUG will advance to may also be used by R instruction Upon he branching offset remain in the ted by t DEBUG LIBRARY COMMAND 6 EXTENDED COMMAND O The command syntax is EXTENDED COMMAND P The command syntax is This command will Print inclusively The output following manner aaaa bb bb bb GEC aaaa represents bb bb represents a lin cccc represents EXTENDED COMMAND Q is O lt Paaaa bbbb lt ENT ER gt This command is the normal way to return to LDOS R INTER gt a block of memory will contain both CCCCCCCCCCCCCC e of 16 locations from H the current line address HI in Qii lt ENT ER gt The command syntax EXTENDED COMMAND Q The command syntax is This command will send t Qoo dd lt ENTER gt he data by address EX and ASCII formats in EADY to bbbb the aaaa EX notation the ASCII equivalents of the locations This command will display the byte at the input port ii te dd to output port oo EXTENDED COMMAND T
94. phrases should be limited to 63 characters for LDOS command lines and 255 characters for LBASIC lines The BUILD HEX parameter may used to create characters or strings that are not directly available from the keyboard These strings will be shown as the corresponding graphics characters when displayed Following are som xamples of the KSM function in the LDOS command mode A gt DIR 0 This string would appear when the lt CLEAR gt and lt A gt keys were pressed together The command DIR 0 would be shown but would not be acted upon until the lt ENTER gt key was pressed A gt DIR 0 This is the same as the last xample except the DIR 0 command would b xecuted immediately as an lt ENTER gt was the last character of the phrase represented by the semi colon F gt FREE DEVICE This phrase would be read in when the lt CLEAR gt and lt F gt keys were pressed together The LDOS command FREE would be executed and the command DEVICE would execute immediately afterwards Following are som xamples of the KSM function in LBASIC FOR NEXT CLEAR5000 DEFINT A Z DEFSTR S U V DEFDBL D DIM S 100 ei vvv The keys lt F gt and lt N gt could be assigned the phrases FOR and NEXT Whenever these LBASIC commands were needed they could be entered in by pressing the lt CLEAR gt and alphabetic key T
95. press the desired key The keyboard and KI DVR LDOS comes with a keyboard driver program called KI DVR The use of this driver is mandatory if functions such as Type Ahead Screen Print KSM MiniDOS LCOMM and the SVC table are to be used It is strongly recommended that the KI DVR program with the TYPE option be active in your runtime system It requires very little space and will make using LDOS ven more pleasant GENERAL INFORMATION Use also change shifted characte of this key shifted characte will switch betw board driver will speed up the key re the shift case reversal as follows If typi r will appear as lower case If typin r will appear as upper case The lt RI n the upper and lower case modes When using the used Keys may the KeyStroke Mu available when Due to this i screen The Mi certain LDOS fun line printer top The lt SHIFT gt lt BR out and hung u if there was reset th ntir ry E KI DVR program the KSM and MiniDOS fu commands functions be assigned special 7 associated peat rate It will ng in upper case a g in lower case a GHT SHIFT gt lt 0 gt keys nections may also be or characters with functions are then ltiply KSM featur Thes he lt CLEAR gt and desired unshifted key ar t is necessary to press niDOS filter program will give you im ctions such as a disk directory or fr of form command anda disk f
96. read operation will cease You will be returned to query 2 As a disk file is read each block detected will produce the messag BLOCK LOADS FROM XXXX TO XXXX At the conclusion of the file read whether from disk or tape the transfer address the program address that is jumped to after loading to begin its execution is displayed as in TRANSFER ADDRESS ENTRY POINT IS XXXX COMMAND FILE UTILITY 3 At this point you will recy Query 3 cle to the INPUT FROM DISK OR TAPI query 2 F PROGRAM LOADS FROM BASE ADD ESS XXXX TO XXXX ENT ER N F iW BASE ADDR 3 will If you do Query tape lt EN a SYSTEM tape file to disk operating system s residen disk file into memory from system Once in memory original load point be output not need to a The Command File Utility wi ESS OR lt ER gt key and proceed to query ENT ER gt gt if one or mor files wer input from disk or offset the output file just depress the 7 In general if you are transferring and the tape file would ordinarily overlay the t program 4200H 51FFH you cannot load the disk unless it is offset from the resident block move routine can restore to its it ll not offset any part of a load module that loads below 4200H This is t variables or display message load properly If req you
97. routine will position an open file to th nd of file position An nd of fil ncountered error X 1C will be returned if the file is already position to the end Your program may ignore this error DE gt FCB of the file to position A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS FILE CONTROL a POSN Vector X 4442 RI Position a file to a logical record This will positioning to records of a random access file When the be useful for POSN routine is used Bit 6 of FCBtl is automatically set to ensure that the EOF will be updated when th file is closed only if the NRN current ERN zal v DI FCB for the file to position BC gt the logical record number A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful EAD Vector X 4436 RI exceeds the Read a logical record froma file If the LRL defined at open time was 256 0 then the NRN sector will be transferred to established at open time For LRL between 1 and 255 is updated after the read operation DE gt FCB for the file to read HL A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful EW Vector X 443F gt UREC needed if LRL lt gt 0 unused if LRL 256 the buffer the next logical record will be placed into the user record buffer UREC The 3 byte
98. scan the keyboard and return with th key depressed It will not return until a key is depressed A lt the character entered TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS ROM ENTRIES 13 KEYIN Vector X 0040 This routine will accept a line of input until terminated by either an lt ENTER gt or lt BREAK gt During the input the routine will display the entries Backspace tab line delete and 32 cpl mode are supported H L gt user line buffer of length Btl B gt maximum number of characters to input HI points to buffer start B lt the actual number of characters input CF lt set if lt BREAK gt terminated the input E A ll PAUS Gl Vector X 0060 This routine will suspend program execution and go into a wait state The delay is approximately 14 796 microseconds per count BC gt delay count A register is used PRT Vector X 003B This routine will output a byte to the printer If a zero value is passed then the printer status will be returned This method is recommended over checking the port directly A gt the character to print A lt the printer status if a zero was output PUT Vector X 001B This routine will output a byte to a logical device or a file D gt Device or File Control Block of the output device gt the byte to output error return code if disk output lt if output to disk
99. so KILL carefully KILL DELTA DA This command will KILL the file DELTA DAT on the first drive that it is on Be careful Without a drivespec you could KILL the fil where you did not intend to KILL MIDWEST DAT SECRET 0 This command will KILL the password protected file MIDWEST DAT SECRET on drive 0 as long as SECRET is the proper password If the file s ATTRIButes include a PROT level of NAme or higher SECRET must be the U s PDate password to kill the file If the proper password is NOT upplied an error will be generated and the file will not be killed The LDOS system does NOT permit the KILLing of any devspec that is a normal power up device These devices are JL KI DO and PR Attempting to KILL these devices will produce an error message and the KILL will abort KILL LIBRARY COMMAND However any other devices may be KILLed as long as they are RESET first The command KILL devspec will result in th devspec being completely removed from system device spac KILL CL This command will in effect make CL the Comm Line disappear from the system device control table assuming the CL was RESET before the KILL was done xxx NOTE KILLing of logical devices is an advanced feature of the LDOS system and as such should be treated with respect as undesirable results can occ
100. step rate specified in the drive code table Either the cylinder is not formatted on the diskette or the step rate designated is too low a value for the hardware to respond 3 Lost data during read X 03 During a read sector request the CPU was late in accepting a byte from the FDC data register For more information consult the reference manual for the floppy disk controller used in your disk controller 4 Parity error during read X 04 During a read sector disk I O request the FDC sensed a CRC error Possible media failure would be indicated The Drive hardware could also be at fault 5 Data record not found during read SENOS A disk sector read request was generated with a sector number not found on the cylinder referenced TECH INFO ERROR DICTIONARY 6 Attempted to read system data record X 06 A read request for a sector located within the directory cylinder was made without using the directory read routines Directory cylinder sectors are written with a data address mark that differs from the data sector s data address mark Consult the controller referenc manuals for information concerning address marks 7 Attempted to read locked deleted data record X O7 In systems that support a deleted record data address mark this error message will appear if a deleted sector is requested to be read LDOS currently does not utilize the deleted sector dat
101. the ticeable interruption PR SPOOL MEM 10 DISK possible combinations of Any output sent current nections will be carried out SPOOLed bu The other program function oo Sede data will then be written to the disk file T the allowable and 15K of disk space in a file to the printer will be as fast as the printer can program printing functions and the line printer will ffers as fast as it can processing will be carried the 5K memory buffer is EXTFILE SPL on PR This command will create a 10K memory buffer for any data that is to be sent to the line printer PR Ifa data will be immediately sent to printer command is received the the 10K memory buffer and then SPOOLed to the line printer whenever whenever the printer is state Since the data normal program execution the SPOOLed data will was specified without any processing of the current printer has printed enough count below 10K the size of is sent to the will Size If data the memory If you are running printer it is possible that improved by activating the LDOS available free memory and disk space available for your needs the overall the printer not printing or otherwise in continue to be sent to a disk file program functions to bring the an applications program that SPOOLer The size will determine the can accept it i e a BUSY or FAU
102. the Hash Index Tabl byt mapped to the directory record For additional information see the section on the Hash Index Table EXTENDED DIRECTORY RECORDS a Extended Directory records FXDE have the same format as primary Directory records except that only bytes 0 and 21 to 31 are utilized Within byte 0 only bits 4 and 7 are significant Byte 1 contains the DEC of the directory record which this is an extension of An extended directory record may point to yet another directory record so a file may contain an unlimited number of extents limited only by the total number of directory records available 256 TECH INFO DIRECTORY RECORDS 5 GRANULE ALLOCATION TABLE GAT The Granule Allocation Table GAT contains information pertinent to the free and assigned space on the disk The GAT also contains certain data specific to the formatting used on the diskette In order to deal with a wide range of hardware storage devices an entire disk is partitioned into cylinders tracks and sectors Each cylinder has a specified quantity of sectors A group of sectors is allocated whenever additional space is needed This group is termed a granule The choice of a granule size is a compromise over minimum file lengths and overhead during the dynamic allocation process The GAT is configured to provide for a maximum of eight granules per cylinder In the allocation bytes each bit set indicates a corresponding granule
103. the current logical record bb will be in hexadecimal notation cc will be the hexadecimal representation of the byte LIST eal oO d will be the ASCII representation of the byte A period will be used for all non displayable bytes For example the command LIST LBASIC CMD BASIC H would produce a display as shown here 0000 00 01 02 00 52 C3 06 5C 00 4E 45 58 54 20 77 69 74 ne Sa ee ae N E X T w I T 0000 10 68 6F 75 74 20 46 4F 52 00 53 79 6E 74 61 78 20 H c iQ AUL SE F O R S Y N T A X This is a LISTing of the file LBASIC CMD BASIC in HEX format The logical record length was not specified in the command and was found from the directory to be 256 PARAMETER REC This parameter is used for LISTing HEX files It tells the LIST command to start with the specified logical record number of the file The first record in a file is record 0 When specifying a record number REC 1 would LIST the second record of the file The command LIST MONITOR CMD H R 5 would start the LISTing with the sixth record If this parameter is not specified the LISTing will start with record 0 PARAMETER LRL This parameter tells the LIST command to format the output using the specified LRL for each record If the LRL parameter is not specified the LIST command will use the record length in the file s directory entry The LRL parameter is valid only when used with the HEX parameter
104. the last called it automa will be updated on every WRITE record slot tically sets TECH INFO disturbed Any time bit 6 If operation or byte operations of logical record length LRL or operations will be performed sector I O system overhead is me to be 0 indicating 256 An 1 on open that th nd of fil EOF is to if NRN exceeds the current value is to be utilized During random unless you are extending the file the position vector POSN is bit 6 is set to a 0 then EOF FILE CONTROL BLOCK Bat Be aire If set to a O then the disk IJO buffer contains the current sector denoted by NRN If set to a 1 then the buffer does not contain the current sector During byte I 0 bit 5 is set when the last byte of the sector is read A sector read will reset the bit amp show the buffer to be current Bit 4 If set to a 1 it indicates that the buffer contents have been changed since the buffer was read from the file It is used by the system for determining whether the buffer must be written back to the file befor reading another record If set to a 0 the indication is that no buffer modification was performed Bit 3 Is used to specify that the directory record is to be updated every time that the NRN exceeds the EOF Normal operation is to update the directory only when a FCB is closed Some unattended operations may utilize this extra me
105. the manual you may wish to place marker sheets of some sort between the different sections Tabs have been provided for major section divisions The user s manual will be updated each time there is a significant change in a particular operating procedure If a change correction or enhancement becomes available it will be an easy matter to replace the appropriate pages without the need for complete reconstruction of the manual It also makes it easier for the LDOS Support group to send out an immediate update or enhancement notice without worrying about the cost of reprinting whole sections of the manual This will assure you of receiving ALL relevant information as soon as possible COMMAND SYNTAX AND STRUCTURE As you look through this manual you should notice a very distinct structure regarding the command syntax of the LDOS system Each Library Command Utility or Program section will begin with a very brief description of the function involved Immediately following will be a SYNTAX Block This block will be laid out to show the command syntax allowable parameters and abbreviations if any A typical block might show the following THE COMMAND any files or devices parameters W FILES DEVICES DESCRIPTIONS PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ABBREVIATIONS The first line s in the block will show the allowable COMMAND str
106. these routines If you have executed any SYSTEM commands that require the us of this high memory be aware that your overall free memory will be decreased accordingly Most of the following parameters for the SYSTEM command may be used together in the same command line To do this observe the syntax SYSTEM parm parm parm Each parameter must be accompanied by its switch or setting as required Certain SYSTEM parameters will cause an exit from the SYSTEM command Please be awar that SYSTEM parameters will be executed in the following order regardless of their physical location in the command line 1 SLOW 2 FAST 3 BASIC2 4 BREAK 5 BLINK 6 LARGE 7 SMALL 8 TYPE SYSTEM LIBRARY COMMAND 9 GRAPHIC 10 13 DRIVE 14 17 STEP 18 21 SYSGEN Following are complete descriptions of the SYST SYSTEM FAST SYSTEM SLOW These commands are been installed in the endorsed or condemned by support this type of modification in the LDOS system to well as switching the precedenc over before any of the other by these parameters any other ALIVE 11 SVC WP 15 DISABLE DELAY 19 DRIVER used only if a suitable clock speed Speed ef modi processor clock speed TRS 80 computer unit L S I although some They will accommodate the current software controlled clock SYSTEM command and w are carried out commands 12 SYSRES 16 ENABLE 20 SYSTEM
107. to the edit buffer To make changes to disk see lt S gt ave FED FILE EDITOR Page 6 lt S gt lt ENTER gt Save the contents of the current edit buffer to disk The current record pointed to by FED will be overwritten by the contents of the edit buffer Any changes mad after the initial read of the record will be written to disk FED SEARCH COMMANDS NOTE The search commands described below may cause the information in the edit buffer to be overwritten by information contained in subsequent records of the file If edits have been made to the information in the edit buffer they should be saved to the disk prior to issuing a search command In most cases you should issue a B command prior to performing a search This will assure that th ntir fil will be searched and no occurrences of the search string will be missed lt C gt cccccc Find ASCII string cccccc Issuing the lt C gt command will cause a search to be performed for the string cccccc The search will start at the relativ byte pointed to by the cursors The search is identical to the lt F gt ind Hex string command except that the search criteria is an ASCII string of 1 to 30 characters depending on the display mode being used Also the number of characters to be searched for may be an even or an odd number See the lt F gt command for further information lt F gt nnnnnn Find hex string nn nn nn The
108. which case full ACCess would be given Notice that the file will be VISible in the directory ATTRIB LIBRARY COMMAND S RIB ISAM BAS 0 ACC UPD SECRET PROT EXEC INV SECRET P EX I RIB ISAM BAS 0 A U After execution of this command no one will be able to LIST this program when it is brought into BASIC because the PROTection level for the ACCess password has been set to EXECute only The only way this file can be read into the computer is with RUN in BASIC RUN TSAM BAS Notice no password is needed to RUN the program as none was set with the ACC parameter of the ATTRIB command This file cannot be LOADed LISTed or PRINTed without using the UPDate password SECRET FULL ACCess will be granted if the file is specified as ISAM BAS SECRET because the UPDate password has been given The UPDate password will allow complet access regardless of the PROTection level that has been set Notice that this file will be INVisible in the directory because the INV parameter has been specified EXAMPLE RUN ISAM BAS Any attempt to look at this file after it is loaded and RUN will cause the program to be deleted from memory LISTing or LLISTing the program cannot be done in the normal manner unless th program is loaded using the password SECRET RIB ISAM BAS S
109. within braces At this point enter the drive number of the target drive The display will be in the following format NNNNNNNNDDDDDDDD FFFF K Free N the disk name D the disk date of creation F the free K 1024 bytes in Hex notation lt K gt The lt K gt command will allow you to kill a specified file You will see the letter K appear with in braces At this point type in the filespec you wish to kill If no drivespec is included all drives will be searched and the first matching filespec will be killed lt Q gt The lt Q gt command will show the visible files on a specified drive You will s the letter Q appear within braces Type in the drivespec of the target drive and the visible files will be displayed in 4 across format You may also specify a particular file extension 1 The syntax would be d EXT where d is the drivespec and EXT is th desired xtension The wildcard character may be used but all three characters must be specified For example to find all file extensions starting with B B must be specified lt R gt The lt R gt command will repeat the last issued DOS command lt T gt The lt T gt command will issue a Top Of Form to the line printer This will also clear the line counter Entering an invalid parameter for any of the above commands will display the associated LDOS error message MiniDOS FILTER 2 PRINTER FILT
110. without error NP Pp A ll WHERE Vector X 000B Vector used to resolve relocation address of calling routine HL lt the address following the CALL instruction TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS ROM ENTRIES 14 Special Purpose Routines Miscellaneous GETDCT Vector X 478F This routine will obtain the address of the drive code table for the requested drive C gt logical drive number 0 7 TY lt the DCT address DCTBYT Vector X 479C This entry will recover a byte field from the drive code tabl C gt logical drive number 0 7 A gt relative byte desired in the table 3 9 A lt content of the DCT field requested DIRRD Vector X 4B10 This entry will read a directory sector containing the directory entry for a specified Directory Entry Code DEC The sector will be written to the system buffer SBUFS and the register pair HL will point to the first byte of the directory entry specified by the DEC B gt Directory Entry Code of the file C gt Logical drive number 0 7 HL lt points to the DEC s directory entry A lt error return code Z lt set if no error DIRWR Vector X 4BI1F This entry will write the system buffer SBUFS back to the disk directory sector that contains the directory entry of the DEC specified in the calling linkage B gt Directory Entry Code
111. you send in your Master Disk for an update be sure it is properly packaged ina sturdy and bend resistant container The container you send will be re labeled and used to return your disk THE LDOS QUARTERLY NEWSLETTER will be sent to you containing useful information from other LDOS users as well as technical information and editorial content from our development and support team MICRONET BULLETIN BOARD service sponsored by L S I and available for you if you are also a Micronet subscriber The LDOS registration card contains a space for you to register your Micronet user number with our customer servic department You will then be logged into our bulletin board as a valid user The bulletin board will be maintained by our customer service personnel on a regular basis to answer questions and provide timely information NOTE From time to time the hours of our customer service department may vary depending on our work load If the hours have changed the Quarterly newsletter will contain the new hours The normal time period for 800 line service is from 10 00 AM to 12 00 noon and from 4 00 to 6 00 PM Central time CUSTOMER SERVICE i IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS LDOS has been created as a powerful flexible and user oriented system If you do run into problems before you pick up the phone do this 1 Read the IN CAS
112. 0 5K of these one byte records CREATE MAIL DAT 3 This command will CREATE the file MAIL DAT on drive 3 There will be no space assigned to the file at this time The file name is merely placed in the directory This is very useful as it allows the placement of a yet to be used file on a designated drive Since not specified the LRL of this file will be 256 CREATE GOOD DAT REC 50 This will CREATE a file named GOOD DAT on the first available drive There will be space taken for 50 RECords of 256 bytes each since the default LRL is 256 CREATE SMALL FIL 1 SIZE 1 This command will CREATE a file SMALL FIL on drive 1 and take 1 024 bytes of space for the file in actuality 1 gran will be taken as this is the smallest unit of allocation the system can deal with IF THE FILE ALREADY EXISTS 2 0000 CREATE INVENT DAT SIZE 20 It is acceptable to CREATE a file that already exists This is the manner in which you would permanently assign additional space to a file If the SIZE or the LRL times REC would cause this file to become smaller than it presently is the CREATE will abort and the error message Fil xists larger will appear The file will not be harmed CREATE LIBRARY COMMAND 3 The DATE command is B
113. 7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FE COLUMNS TECH INFO DIRECTORY RECORDS H I T 10 The eight directory records for the directory cylinder sector 2 would correspond to assignments in HIT positions 00 20 40 60 80 AO CO and E The following positions are reserved for system overlays 00 gt BOOT SYS 20 gt SYS6 SYS 01 gt DIR SYS 21 gt SYS7 SYS 02 gt SYSO SYS 22 gt SYSS SYS 03 gt SYS1 SYS 23 gt SYS9 SYS 04 gt SYS2 SYS 24 gt SYS10 SYS 05 gt SYS3 SYS 25 gt SYS11 SYS 06 gt SYS4 SYS 26 gt SYS12 SYS 07 gt SYS5 SYS 27 gt SYS13 SYS These entry positions of course correspond to the first two rows of each directory sector for the first eight directory sectors Since the operating system accesses these overlays by position in the HIT rather than by file name these positions are always reserved by the system The design of the Hash Index Table limits the system to a maximum support of 256 files on any one drive With the current state of the art in disk drive technology that limit is not considered to be of major impact even considering large capacity Winchester drives supported by LDOS This system will evolve to support the newer types of hardware coming to the market place as they become available TECH INFO DIRECTORY RECORDS H I T zis LDOS The interfaces with hardware peripherals by means of software drivers drivers are in general coupled to the
114. ASIC programs files The syntax is used to set the month and by LDOS it creates and year for and handles your use with your disks and your DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE abbr mm dd yy mm 2 digit month 01 to 12 mandatory slash dd 2 digit day 01 to 31 mandatory slash yy 2 digit year 00 to 99 Date prompt at system power up with no parameters specified will return the current DATE NONE It is more importa LDOS uses the DATE when creating and FORMATting disks in the directory when it looking at the direc or last written to and NOT be updated When creating new files if the DATE has system you will be promp not been set nt to set If the DAT Lory you ar DATE with and accessing files is not set useful to the DATE If the DATI the file would no ld be able to s was not set Because th tandard three eset 17 hese values I will be placed r t t should be noted that he Technical In the lower center of the screen DATE to be entered You Should you desire not to the DATE will default A s a character bbreviated the day of the month ted for it on LDOS will store urrent DATE These are Day of in RAM memory section at power should answer set the DATE just to 00 00 00 The pro hen be erased and replaced by
115. BACKUP using drive 0 as the source drive and drive 1 as the destination drive If the drives are differently configured a BACKUP reconstruct will be invoked All files will be moved from drive 0 to drive 1 with the exception of DIR SYS and BOOT SYS if a Reconstruct is invoked BACKUP 0 1 This command will force a BACKUP BY Class The first prompt will be for the Master Password if other than PASSWORD The wec WildCard Character causes a BACKUP by class All files will be examined and ALL files except BOOT and DIR will be copied because they will match the single wcc This BACKUP is the way to force a reconstruct in situations where a Mirror Image would normally have been done One reason for this might be to remove unwanted extents from disk files on the source drive by copying them onto a cleanly FORMATted destination drive BACKUP 0 1 Q This command will function identically to the previous example except that you will be asked befor ach file is moved You will also see the MOD date and flag BACKUP 1 2 VIS This command will copy all VISible files in drive 1 s DIRectory to drive 2 A BACKUP By Class will automatically be invoked BACKUP UTILITY s s BACKUP 2 1 INV This command will copy all files that are invoking a BACKUP By Class to drive 1 not be copied BACKUP 0 1 SYS This command will BACKUP invoking a BACKUP By Class INVisib
116. CALL 800 558 6901 CUSTOMER SERVICE This utility is designed to allow for a backup with format to be performed Only floppy drives may be used and the backup performed must be mirror image The syntax is QFB s d parm parm parm s is the Source drive The colon is optional zd is the Destination drive The colon is optional The following optional parameters may be used ALL parameter used to specify whether all cylinders of the source disk will be read and copied to the destination disk or only allocated cylinders will be used The switch ON or OFF may be specified with the default being OFF Vl parameter used to specify whether or not a verify of the destination disk is to be performed on the 1st pass The switch ON or OFF may be used with the default being ON V2 parameter used to specify whether or not a verify of the destination disk is to be performed on the 2nd pass The switch ON or OFF may be used with the default being OFF QUERY Query for parameters not specified The switch ON or OFF may be used The default is OFF abbr ON Y OFF N QUERY Q ALL A The QFB Quick Format and Backup utility will allow for the creation of a mirror image backup of a source disk without having to format the destination disk prior to executing the backup The normal means by which a mirror image backup is made using LDOS is to first format a diskette using the FORMAT utility and then
117. CH INFO ENTRY POINTS GENERAL 10 after the last an L gt points to the lst byte of your message L is returned unchanged an ty zZ D ES izal Vector X 4293 Recover the file name amp extension from the directory DE gt Buffer to receive file name ext B gt DEC of file desired C gt drive number of drive containing the file LOGER Vector X 428D Issue a log message to the Job Log Message is any character string terminating with an lt ENTER gt X OD HL gt points to the first character of the message lin HL is returned unchanged LOGOT Vector X 428A Display and log amessage This will perform the same function as DSPLY followed by LOGER HL gt points to the first character of the message lin HL is returned unchanged MSG Vector X 4402 Message line handler to send a message to any device Fl DE gt Device or File Control Block to receive output HL gt pointer to the message lin HL is returned unchanged PARAM Vector X 4454 This routine can be used to parse an optional parameter string Its primary function is to parse command parameters contained in a command line totally enclosed within parentheses Acceptable parameter format isi PARM X dddd hexadecimal entry PARM ddddd decimal entry PARM string alphanumeric entry PARM flag
118. CII format and the logical record length LRL of the file will be read from the directory The parameters shown may be entered in the same command line such as LIST TESTFILE 0 HEX REC 5 LRL 80 P If an extension is not used in the LISTing filespec a default of TXT will be used If no file with the TXT extension is found the LIST will search for a file with an extension of all blanks Here are som xamples of how LIST handles the default file extension of LEXE LIST TESTFILE 0 The system will first search drive 0 for a file named TESTFILE TXT If not found it will then search for a file named TESTFILE LIST LIBRARY COMMAND 214 LIST TESTFILE The system will search all active drives for a file called TESTFILE TXT and LIST the first file named STFILE TXT it encounters If this file is not found it will search all active drives for a file named TESTFILE again LISTing the first TESTFILE it encounters LIST TESTFILE SCR The system will search all drives for a file called TESTFILE SCR and LIST the first file named TESTFILE SCR encountered If the file is not found the LIST command will not search for TESTFILE TXT The parameters of the LIST command will d
119. COPY TEST DAT 0 TO MYFILE 1 This command would COPY the file TEST DAT from drive 0 to drive 1 with the file on drive 1 named MYFILE DAT Notice that the extension of filespec2 was not specified and defaulted to DAT COPY TEST DAT 0 TO MYFILE 1 This command will COPY the file TEST DAT from drive 0 to drive 1 with the file on drive 1 named MYFILE There will be no extension on MYFILE TN because the COPY DATA NEW 0 TO OLD 0 This command will COPY the file DATA OLD on drive 0 defaulted to that of filespecl DATA NEW The filename was DATA with no other characters was specified in filespec2 named and from drive 0 to a file not specified for filespec2 COPY LIBRARY COMMAND 3 COPY DATA V56 0 TO DATA V28 1 This command wi DATA V28 on drive logical record 1 LRL 128 original file had a record III TRS 80 random by the COPY a reset the LRL by a BASIC that can 256 such as necessary when have different and setting type nd will have of a file is ve deal not b 1l COPY the file DATA V56 These two files will contain the same lengths will th on drive 0 to a file called data but the W will assume that the length of data file a record ry usef with BLOC le 256 The u K sam This would be a normal Model file DATA V28 will be created ngth of 128 bytes This ability to l when converting data ED fil to be used es
120. D This command will DAT R F ENAME ENAM H This extens ST DAT 0 TO RI command would R EAL ENAME ion of filespecl ENAM H his EAL ST DAT 0 TO RI command will DAT was EAL F RENAME the The use of t he extension from defaulting to DAT he with ENAM ST H is DAT TO R command will EAL DAT search the iNAME it R EAL DAT RENAME changing the file TI or the file TI not specified for filespec2 file TE no characters after active z deleting refer to the ATTRIB LIBrary command of a file s EST DAT on drive 0 to REAL DAT and defaul ST DAT on drive 0 to a I EST DAT on drive 0 to OLD DAT password To The ted to that file named in filespec2 kept and drives for the file TI LIBRARY COMMAND EST DAT RENAME H EST DAT TO OLD This command will search the active drives for a file TEST DAT and RENAME it TEST OLD The filename was not specified in filespec2 and defaulted to that of filespecl RENAME DATA NEW SECRET 1 TO OLD This command will RENAME the password protected file DATA NEW SECRET on drive 1 to DATA OLD SECRET The filename and password for filespec2
121. DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LD DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO OS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LD DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO OS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LD DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO OS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LD DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO
122. DOS wi be ROM BASIC none of the cannot return directly to or turn off the computer ng system h K a SYSTEM BREAK switch This command will enable or disable the lt BREAK gt key The allowable Switches are ON or OFF If switch is not specified th default will be ON Once the lt BREAK gt key is disabled by doing a SYSTEM BREAK OFF command pressing it will have no effect and the system break bit will not be set It may be re enabled at any time by doing a SYSTEM BREAK ON command The BREAK ON will also enable the lt BREAK gt key if it was disabled by the AUTO LIBrary command No memory will be used with this parameter NOTE Specifying BREAK OFF will prevent routines such as the BUILD Library command from exiting when the lt BREAK gt key is pressed SYSTEM BLINK aaaa This command controls the LDOS cursor character The parameter aaaa can be represented as ON OFF or as a decimal value The cursor character numbers in the following xamples are the ASCII values in decimal of the TRS 80 character set This command does not use high memory ON eee Turns the blinking cursor on with the cursor character being a graphics character character 176 OFF Turns off the blinking cursor leaving the cursor character unchanged aaaa can also be represented as any displayable ASCII character value For example if the command SYST
123. Date 5 1 S 1 2 K 29 Nov 80 the extension FIX providing that is P The allocation format is used DIR LIBRARY COMMAND 6 I o Il O The DO command executes user created JCL Job Control Language files syntax is DO character filespec QLABEL parm parm character is an optional DO control character filespec is a valid filespec default extension JCL LABEL is an optional LABEL indicating a start point in the JCL file parm optional parameter s to be passed to the filespec program during execution The optional semi colon When used allows a DO command line greater than 64 characters abbr NONI Gl The NOTE Please refer to the Job Control Language section of the manual for the creation of a JCL file and for the allowable passing of parameters he DO command will compile and xecute a series of commands that have reated by the user and stored in an ASCII disk file The default haracters in length The DO command will also pass optional parameter he program being DOne wE a 0QH The DO function is normally a two step operation the compile and execute During the compile a line is read from the specified file and written to a file named SYSTEM JCL If this file does not exist it wi placed on the first available drive Once the line is compiled it is been file xtension of the filespec is JCL No line i
124. E OF DIFFICULTY section and do the checks indicated there 2 READ THE MANUAL Check syntax and spelling carefully Review notes and technical information Verify your understanding of the purpose of the command Check updates received or information in quarterly newsletters 8 RETRY THE OPERATION Repeat the procedure again Reset BOOT and repeat the procedure again Perform the same function in a different manner if possible Let the Utility prompt for information rather than putting it in the command line or vice versa don t abbreviate the parameter remove unnecessary system options etc 4 THINK Did it work last time If so what has changed since then Could it be a faulty diskette Maybe another copy would work Is everything turned on plugged in etc Is a needed file not present on the disk such as a system file data file etc 5 WRITE IT DOWN Make notes on the problem the things you have tried and the exact steps that led to the problem Th mor detailed th notes the better 6 CALL Call the following number during the proper time period Monday through Friday excluding holidays 800 558 6901 IMPORTANT Be sure to have your LDOS registration number handy you will always be asked for it If your problem is technical or very detailed it may be better to write our Customer Service Department Include your complete phone number and registration number We will look into your problem and respond prom
125. ECRE ACC NOWAY UPD SECRET PROT EXEC INV 0 O RIB ISAM BAS SECRE A NOWAY U SECRET P EX I This command will do the same thing to this BASIC file except that now the only way to get the program into memory even to RUN it is to know the ACCess PASSWORD of NOWAY EXAMPLE RUN ISAM BAS NOWAY It will now be brought into memory and executed but it cannot be LISTed Any attempt to interrupt the execution of the program will cause the program to be erased from memory RIB ISAM BAS SECRET 0 ACC UPD VIS RIB ISAM BAS SECRET 0 A U V This command will get rid of all passwords and make the file ISAM BAS visible in the directory Notice that the UPDate password of SECRET was required to re ATTRIB the file RIB HOST CMD 0 INV RIB HOST CMD 0 I This command will make the file invisible to the normal directory command DIR without assigning any passwords to the file To see an invisible file type DIR d I ATTRIB LIBRARY COMMAND 3 The following section deals with ATTRIBing a disk ATTRIB command will allow and the PROTection attributes The Password Any time the of you to change the disk all VISible and non SyYStem files ATTRIB command is used the disk s current Master name the disk Master Password must if it be supplied You will be prompt
126. EM BLINK 42 wer given th blinking cursor character would be an asterisk character 42 SYSTEM BLINK LARGE This command turns on a large character 143 blinking cursor SYSTEM BLINK SMALL This command turns on a small character 136 blinking cursor SYSTEM DRIVE d parm parm This command sets certain parameters for the disk drives in your system Refer to the following for explanation of the allowable parameters This command uses no extra memory Please note that the drive type 5 1 4 8 or HARD DISK and the location of a drive are set by the SYSTEM DRIVE DRIVER command DRIVE d Where d is any valid drive number in your system SYSTEM LIBRARY COMMAND 3 The parameters can be any of the following DELAY OFF This command is valid the time allowed between drive motor only for 5 1 4 drives The DELAY is start up and the first attempted read of the diskette in that drive The OFF parameter sets this delay to 5 seconds DELAY ON This command is valid only for 5 1 4 drives The ON parameter sets the delay between drive motor start up and the first attempted read to 1 second This is the normal DELAY time for all 5 1 4 drives DISABLE This command will remove the specified drive number from the Drive Code table Once disabled any attempt to access that drive will caus t
127. ER PROGRAM PR FLT The FILTER program PR FLT is provided to format the data sent to the 1 printer The syntax is FILTER PR PR FLT parm parm parms are the parameters described below ADDLF Will add a linefeed after a carriage return CHARS The number of characters per printed line FFHARD Will issue an X 0C for a form feed rather than a series of linefeeds INDENT Number of characters to indent from left margin on lines longer than CHARS parm LINES The number of lines printed on each page MARGIN Sets the left margin PAGE Sets the physical page length in lines TAB Causes expansion of X 09 tab characters XLATE X aabb specifies a one character translation aa the character to be translated bb what aa will be translated to ZERO Causes the printer line counter to start at 0 rather than the normal 1 abbr All parameters can be abbreviated by their first character PR FLT is used to FILTER the devspec PR For a complete explanation of FILTER LIBrary command please refer to that section This FILTER program adds certain enhancements to the normal ROM prin driver routine If you have entered a command that uses the printer you will no longer experienc Realize that if the printer is merely in a deselected or alert state system will wait until printer capabilities have been r stablished PRINTER FILTER zis ine the Cer lock up if the
128. EXTENDED UTILITIES BACKUP CMDFILE CONV FORMAT HITAPE LCOMM LOG PATCH REPAIR DEVICE DRIVERS JL KI RS232T FILTERS KSM MINIDOS PR IV JCL THE LDOS JOB CONTROL LANGUAG GI LBASIC V TECHNICAL INFORMATION VI GLOSSARY IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY CUSTOMER SERVICE WARRANTY ADDENDUMS IF ANY QED Second Edition LDOS 5 1 x Model III Copyright 1981 by LOGICAL SYSTEMS INCORPORATED and GALACTIC SOFTWARE All rights reserved LDOS is a Trademark of LOGICAL SYSTEMS INCORPORATED ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The LDOS product is the property of LOGICAL SYSTEMS INCORPORATED and is copyrighted in its entirety No portion of the system code documentation may be reproduced in any manner for any purpose Copies of the serialized Master LDOS disk may be made by the registered owner of that disk for archival purposes only Logical Systems Incorporated does not authorize any LDOS owner or any other person to duplicate distribute LDOS or any portion of LDOS for purposes other than the creation of reserve archival copies for the original purchaser s personal use The following persons were members of the team that made LDOS possible Bill Schroeder Roy Soltoff PROJECT LEADER SYSTEMS ANALYST Chuck Jensen Dick Konop Tim Mann Lance Micklus The LDOS development team would like to thank the many people that provided sug
129. FFicient may hat the command line is entered as nifica ail how provide to compile a JCL for the complete to execution A series of JCL alphanumeric ase of explanation we LIBrary This has the e and two line JCL files be in labeled procedure to by passing its label to the compile phase file In tokens and lues for the hat it can be nt and can contain the letters are treated up to eight one but trea lengt ter se sl for prefix contain CH ECK ERS nd a token can correlate t ll string and selected from the would be established GAME his acti GAME wo are equivalent JCL does ts both as upper case h The values also can be t accepted is A Z a z ash period and most purposes which up to identifies it as a eight alphanumeric PROCLIB a token with the on to BASIC programming uld be a string of the file JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE COMPILATION 3 If the DO command line will exceed Command section for in JCL itself two special field denoted by a Within the substitution NAME and FILESPEC ar consisting of one or more tokens During the compile phase any s file being processed are replaced assigned in the command line as macro identified later For exa parameter in GAME CHECKERS appeared in
130. GE EXECUTION 15 phase in case of reboot auto do demo Example of a menu selection procedure Compilation of LDOS Demonstration Welcome to the LDOS Operating System What would you like me to demonstrate 1 gt Operation of LBASIC 2 gt A sampler of library commands 3 gt Or perhaps the capabilities of the LX 80 interface keyin your selection 1 3 1 LBASIC RUN DEMO BAS CMD S DO exit 2 dir 0 a s i date clock on device lib do exit 3 LX80DEMO hard eight five sio do exit Well I see you did not like my choices BOOT INPUT lt message string gt This macro could very well turn out to be one of the most powerful execution phase macros It provides a means of forcing an input to be fetched from the keyboard rather than from the JCL file When the INPUT macro is detected and executed it will re establish the keyboard as the input device unless som other devic was originally linked to the keyboard Keyboard input will continue until either a lt BREAK gt is detected or the lt ENTER gt key is pressed When ither of the two conditions prevail input fetching will revert to the JCL file The lt ENTER gt key will satisfy the pending KEYIN or LBASIC INPUT statement The lt BREAK gt key will cause an ABORT condition and the executing job will terminate Consider this rewrite of
131. GEN it may be The memory a SYSTEM DRIVE n ENABL may be removed ntir in At the initial n However this will E memory check the verifying detects following message of the memory temporarily disabled the bad on a space memory will be error before command with the area will remain un command ly by using umber of only touched It he MEMDISK the SYSTEM ks prompt if no other T trac work r has been protected K was established HIGHS will be and the DCT location for the moved back DISK you will see the hat MEMDISK is memory if you wish to remove it and releas a disabled dr Followi o show additional high me the last p ive If HIGHS is ng message mory used th memory at a later time MEMDISK DCT Disk drive in memory Page 2 not located rogram executed that uses high This Driver program will accept and configure the RS 232 hardware using the SET LIBrary command as follows SET devspec TO RS232T DVR parm parm devspec is the device to be used with the RS 232 normally CL or the Comm Line parm parameters used to configure the RS 232 port and establish line conditions BAUD sets the BAUD rate to any supportable rate WORD sets the word length 5 to 8 bits STOP sets the stop bits either 1 or 2 PARITY sets the PARITY switch ON
132. However Since the token doit would be a logic FALSE the SET macros would not be compiled JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE COMPILATION 8 RESET lt token gt The RESET macro performs the exact opposite of the SET macro will take on a logic FALSE if it is RESET ASSIGN lt token gt lt string of characters gt The ASSIGNment macro performs essentially the same thing procedure as declaring a token value in the parameter field statement Gl DO PROCLIB ASSIGN BIGNAME desired value achieves exactly the same result as ASSIGN this macro does what the command line did but it can not be altered at run time ASSIGN BIGNAME desired value within A token a JCL The command The difference is that the ASSTIGNment within the JCL procedure can only be altered by editing the JCL file whereas in the ASSIGNment it can be different each time the JCL Nevertheless ASSIGNments can play an important part utility of JCL procedures This macro will be useful when you want to abort the compilation of a JCL to the execution procedure It will abort the processing without going parameter compil overall in is the phase Consider a situation where the JCL requires a parameter token the user does not supply such a token in the DO command line should abort Try this example Q JCL compiling this JCL procedure requires a name token ass
133. If not specified the lead will be ignored The BREAK parameter is provided to allow LDOS to recognize BREAK PAUSE Shift and ENTER characters received from the communications line This would be useful in host type applications The BREAK parameter will cause RS232T to set the system break bit whenever a modem break extended null or an ASCII X 01 is received The system pause bit will be set whenever th ASCII code X 60 is received and the system enter bit will be set whenever a carriage return X OD is received If the parameter is not specified RS232T will never set the break pause or enter bits The following examples show how these driver programs might be used SET CL TO RS232T DVR BAUD 300 WORD 8 STOP 1 CTS SET CL RS232T BAUD 300 WORD 8 STOP 1 CTS This example will configure the RS 232 using the values specified Notice that PARITY was not specified and will default to ON EVEN The use of TO in the command line is optional Also the default file extension for the SET command is DVR CTS was specified so the driver will look at the CTS line for a TRUE condition before sending a character This would be useful for instance if a serial printer had its BUSY line hooked to the CTS line on the computer The device CL will be th devic the system will use to communicate with th
134. KUP is completed At that point the message INSERT SYSTEM DISK ENTER will appear Place the BACKUP you have just made in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt The BACKUP is now complete FOR MULTIPLE DRIVE OWNERS Place a new blank diskette in drive 1 and type in the command FORMAT 1 STEP 3 The screen will clear and the LDOS disk FORMAT utility will be loaded Two questions will appear on the screen The correct response is shown for each question Question Your response DISKETTE NAME LDOS 5 1 lt ENTER gt MASTER PASSWORD PASSWORD lt ENTER gt Answer the questions as shown LDOS will now FORMAT the disk in drive 1 When it is finished the prompt LDOS READY will appear To make the BACKUP type in the command BACKUP 0 1 LDOS will now make a BACKUP copy of itself on drive 1 5 After the BACKUP of your LDOS disk is complete remov the LDOS Master diskette from drive 0 and put it in a safe place Be sur to leave it in its original jacket to protect it from dust and other contamination 6 Label the BACKUP copy of the diskette as an original BACKUP of the LDOS Master diskette You should use this diskette to make any other BACKUPS you require Do not use the Master diskette except to create a BACKUP as just described 7 It is extremely important that you now read the section entitled USING THIS MANUAL That section contains information on the
135. LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO OS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LD DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO OS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LD DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO OS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LD DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS
136. LT background task Note that none of parameter DISK filled the line character printer asa take plac as the memory buffer is will halt until outstanding the buffer involves output to the line efficiency of the program may be of the program and the amount of SPOOLing SPOOL LIBRARY COMMAND 3 ONE NOTE OF CAUTION the SPOOL file on disk will remain open as long as the SPOOLer is active DO NOT KILL this file or remove the diskette without first closing th file Note also that if a SYSGEN is done the file will remain open even after rebooting This is not advisable unless the file is on drive 0 The file may be closed by turning the SPOOLed device OFF The proper syntax is SPOOL devspec OFF SPOOL devspec N Either of these two commands will turn off the SPOOLer and close the associated disk file Please note that the disk file will not be closed by RESETing or KILLing the SPOOLed device Once the SPOOLer is turned off it may be turned on again Doing so will re use the same memory locations allocated when it was originally turned on he following restrictions will apply Hy The original parameters will be stored If turned off and then back on any parameters specified may not exceed th memory or disk parameters originally given or an error will occur However memory or disk space parameters may be diminished The original stored p
137. N parameter k IMPORTANT HE BOOT STRAP STEP RATE HAS NO EFFECT ON ANY DRIVE OTHER THAN DRIV Gl oO This stepping rate will remain in effect unless it is changed by a stored configuration or with the SYSTEM command CAUTION too low of a stepping rate may prevent the disk from being BOOTed FORMAT UTILITY 3 The next question you may see is DISK CONTAINS DATA NAME nnnnnnnn DATE mm dd yy ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO FORMAT IT If the disk contains data this message will appear Answer Y yes FORMAT the disk or N no don t FORMAT this disk The FORMAT command will now show each CYLinder number as it is being FORMATted It will then verify each CYLinder showing with an asterisk each CYLinder that it finds flawed The SYSTEM parameter of the FORMAT command will allow you to add SYSTEM information to a partitioned hard disk after it is formatted FORMAT UTILITY 4 The HITAPE utility will in the LBASIC and CMDFILE permit the use of high programs The syntax is speed 1500 baud cassette I O HITAPE l No parameters are required abbr NONE Due to space constraints and our desire to provide a high level of sophistication through the proper use of interrupt tasks it was necessary to disable the use of 1500 baud cassette loading in the resi
138. NA EXI END MISSING DISK NAME ENTER AS NA ABORT The first two labeled procedures set the FORMAT parameters and use the disk Name LDOS 5 1 see the FORMAT Utility section for default parameter values The last two procedures check to see if a disk Name was passed with the NA token in the DO command line If NA was not passed the IF conditional will not be satisfied and the message MISSING DISK NAME will appear on the screen and the DO will abort An example of passing a disk Name might be DO GEN FOR2DN NA DATA2 JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE EXAMPLES 78 This command will start the DO execution with the label FOR2DN The screen will show the disk Name passed with the token NA and the Master Password as PASSWORD You would see the FORMAT command line appear on the screen and then the FORMAT Utility program would load and execute The parameters specified in the FOR2DN line either satisfy all possible conditions required by the FORMAT Utility or assume default parameters If the ABS parameter was not used the DO would abort if the disk had been previously formatted The SIDES and CYLinders are not specified and will default to one SIDE and 40 CYLinders To enter LBASIC and run a program refer to the following example LBASIC RUN program name STOP The STOP macro is absolutely necessary to prevent an exit back to the LDOS Ready prompt Another practic
139. NAME length typically a six byte field b Byte X 01 indicates a start of block followed by a one byte length of block where the count includes the two byte load address Following this is the two byte block load address followed by the block itself A block length of X 00 indicates a 254 byte block plus two bytes for the load address A block length of X 01 indicates a 255 byte block plus two bytes for the load address OFFH 02H 01H Similarly a block length of X 02 indicates a 256 byte block plus two bytes for the load address 00H 02H 02H Thus the actual code block length can always be obtained by subtracting two from the value specified This is repeated for as many blocks as are in the file c Byte X 07 indicates that the following will be a PATCH NAME field It is followed by the length byte for the actual field containing the PATCH NAME in ASCII This PATCH HEADER will be followed by the actual load blocks of the PATCH When a patch is YANKed or removed the load blocks following the PATCH HEADER will begin with a X 10 which will cause the loader to ignore the blocks d An X 02 is written to indicate the end of the code andthe beginning of the transfer address It is followed by an X 02 block length then the two byte transfer address e The standard byte used to indicate a comment is X 1F A comment may appear between any two blocks in a file NOTE Those header bytes that have not been defined abov are reserv
140. OS Master Disk comes with the disk Name LDOS 5 1 and the disk Master Password of PASSWORD The source disk PACK ID will be duplicated on the destination disk during a Mirror Image BACKUP FOR SINGLE DRIVE OWNERS The screen will Two questions will for each question appear on Type in the command FORMAT 0 STEP 3 clear and the LDOS disk FORMAT utility will the scr n Th correct respons be loaded is shown Question Your response DISKETTE NAME LDOS 5 1 lt ENTER gt MASTER PASSWORD PASSWORD lt ENTER gt Answer the questions as shown You will then s the messag LOAD DESTINATION DISK AND HIT lt ENTER gt At this point insert a new blank diskette in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt After the FORMAT is complete this message will appear LOAD SYSTEM DISK AND HIT lt ENTER gt Put the LDOS Master disk back in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt the comma nd GETTING STARTED Now type in BACKUP 0 0 The message INSERT SOURCE DISK ENTER will appear on the screen Since your LDOS disk is the SOURCE disk simply press lt amp NTER gt The message INSERT DESTINATION DISK ENTER will now appear on the screen Put the disk you have just formatted into drive 0 and press NTER gt You will be prompted several times to swap the Source and Destination disks until the BAC
141. PAUSE example WAIT hh mm ss This macro can be quite useful in an application where certain jobs must be run at a specific time period Providing the system clock is functioning the WAIT macro will put th ntire system in a sleep state until such time as the system clock matches the time specified in the macro operand During the time that the system is asleep it will not be disturbed example nighttime job scheduler compiling night jobs if job assign job standard job end system update clock on include setcl wait 02 15 00 lbasic run job This JCL procedure includes a number of the various macros already discussed It demonstrates default filespec assignments inclusion of other JCL procedures useful LDOS library commands and the running of a JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE EXECUTION 14 BASIC job at a predetermined time period JCL is extremely useful You may even find yourself building entire around the JCL constructs JCL EXECUTION CONDITIONALS The next three macros are used together to establish conditional blocks These are blocks of JCL that are execution phase of the JCL procedure A common use would menu containing various options that the operator could select KEYIN lt comment string gt This mac be used blocks o ro is used to prompt for a to select one of up to JC The entire KEYIN L single character entry ten different execution phase line will be dis
142. PERRERA TRAP LD A DE get device typ AND 2 make sure its an JR Z NOGOOD output device TECH INFO FILTERS amp DRIVERS 3 5205 5206 5207 520A 520 5201 521 521 521 521 521 521 521 5222 5225 5226 5228 522B 522C 522F 5232 5235 5238 5239 523C 523F 5240 5243 5245 5246 a E QAWaAankerE mj 5249 524C 524E D5 ES 215752 CD6744 El 11BA52 CD5444 DDE1 2031 110E00 7B 32B152 2A1144 011000 AF ED42 221144 23 DD7EO1 32B852 DD7E02 32B952 BS DD7501 DD7402 EB 21AA52 EDBO FB C32D40 219B52 1803 217B52 5251 5254 5257 527B 529B CD8A42 C33040 53 61 6C 74 74 65 54 68 65 72 20 42 61 65 6D 74 72 72 T3 69 72 20 6F 64 74 70 65 61 GF OD 73 20 GF 20 65 00530 00540 00550 00560 00570 00580 00590 00600 00610 00620 00630 00640 00650 00660 00670 00680 00690 00700 00710 00720 00730 00740 00750 00760 00770 00780 00790 00800 00810 00820 00830 00840 00850 00860 00870 00880 00890 00900 00910 6C 65 72 20 70 20 6C 20 00920 20 66 69 73 75 74 6c 79 00930 70 61 72 73 00940 00950 save device DCB save command line ptr point to initialization message and display it rcvr command line ptr point to parm table get parms if any recover device DCB
143. R gt lt 3 gt a lt CLR gt lt gt Output being routed to the printer is ful through dynamic memory buffers Therefore it is not necessa printer to be capable of operating at the communica followed by ly buffered ry for your tions line transmission rate Even after transactions cease you may discover the printer still typing away CL lt CLR gt lt 4 gt This PF key references the communications line devi initializes with CL in an ON state You may wish to tempor output from being sent to the CL so as to be able to re prior to transmission Depending on your PF switch setup if a half duplex mode DUPLEX ON after turning off the CL perform a File Send FS which would display the file to without actually sending it to the communications line Of the distant end attempted to send to you while you had the would not receive their transmission FS lt CLR gt lt 5 gt This designates the File Send device With it you can c to automatically be transmitted to the distant end This PF in concert with a number of other keys Other PF keys exis LCOMM UTILITY 3 Cex LCOMM arily block view a file you go to you could your screen course if CL off you ause a file key works t to opena FR This The re one of ID designated file rewind a designated file position to the end ofa designated file and close a designated file As with the other devices d
144. RIVE IN MEMORY The MEMDISK DCT program will allow you to set up an area of memory to Simulate a disk drive This area of memory can then be accessed with any standard disk I O commands The SYSTEM Library command is used to install the in memory disk drive as follows SYSTEM DRIVE n DRIVER l n the logical drive number to be used abbr none You will then be prompted to enter the DCT driver program Respond by typing in the name MEMDISK Before explaining how to enable or disable MEMDISK a brief description of the simulated disk drive is needed MEMDISK organization The simulated disk drive will consist of a short disk driver program and the actual memory allocated for the tracks ach MEMDISK track will consist of 6 granules The track size is adjustable with 1 or 2 sectors per granule Thus a track will take 1 5K or 3K depending on the number of sectors per granule you select Track 1 will always contain the directory regardless of the total number of tracks on the disk There is no space allocated for a track 0 As a result that track will always show up as locked out in the free space map The driver program will automatically take care of any system requests to locate the directory track number normally stored in sector 0 of track 0 The user is allowed up to nineteen 1 sector gran tracks and up to nine 2 sector gran tracks Using 2 sector gran tracks will prov
145. ROCLIB SECOND request This demonstrates the flexibility of JCL procedures DOing other JCL procedures This power is also available from LBASIC LBASIC can implement the command CMD DO PROCLIB GFIRST COMBIN G ry as part of a running program JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE COMPILATION 5 lt COMPILATION COMMENT STRING gt This macro is used to display a comment line message is not the job aborts current compile the the space is a MACRO TOKEN or L INCLUDE lt filespec gt This macro can be used stream It is useful whe procedures can be operational testing By can be effectively brough is possible for INC placed in the SYSTEM JCL file normally displayed to the screen during the compilation phase These compile comment strings The compile comments may require a space following not required if the word that EL during the compile phase messages are will inform you follows the to merge multiple fil n writing large and written as separate compil using the INCLUDE t together It is called nesting maximum nest level is te any one time For example NESTO JCL nested procedur xampl INCLUDE nestl this is the end of the primary JCL EXIT NEST1 JCL this is the first nest INCLUDE nest2 this is the end of the first nest NEST2 JCL this is the second
146. S 8 memory map of complete map of the of the system assembly language the entire vectors tha programmers A LDOS Di STORAGE ASSIGNMEN vectors prefixed wi from release to rel TS ARE FOR VE th the AT as In addi a dollar sign Ss are also to system SIGN sk Operating Rather System is not necessarily it represents what is felt to t could reasonably be used by accomplishe few words of caution are in order RSION 5 1 X MODEL III ONLY Those syste a can be considered to be consisten tion data storage assignments postfixed wit be considered consistent from release t ALL RAM a be d m N O releas More detailed i in the SYSTEM differ from Model III TRSDOS nformation concerning these ENTRY POINTS the Model I version assignments will be Assignments Most location were RAM of STORAGE LDOS and ADDRESS LABEL DESCRIPTION OF LOCATION X OOOB WHER Vector to resolve relocation address X 0013 GET Input a byte from a logical device or a file X 001B PUT Output a byte to a logical device or a file X 0023 CTL Output a control byte to a device or a file X 002B KBD Scan the keyboard and return the character X 0033 DSP Output a byte to the video display X 003B PRT Output a byte to the printer X 0040 KEYIN A
147. S LDOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO OS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LD DOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS L LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS S LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDOS LDO TABLE OF CONTENTS ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I GETTING STARTED USING THIS MANUAL Q Z RAL INFORMATION SYSTEM DEVICES II THE LDOS LIBRARY LIBRARY COMMANDS indicates extended library command APPEND ATTRIB AUTO BOOT BUILD CLOCK COPY CREATE DATE DEBUG DEVICE DIR DO DUMP FILTE FREE KILL LIB LINK LIST LOAD MEMORY PURGE RENAME RESET ROUTE RUN SET SPOOL SYSTEM TIME TRACE VERIFY III
148. S consist of three characters the first of which is an asterisk followed by two upper case alphabetic characters DRIVER A machine language module used to control interactions between the operating system and a DEVICE DO An LDOS system device the Video Display ext The extension of a filespec The use of ext is sometimes optional An extension if used must contain as its first character a slash and may be followed by one to three alphanumeric characters FCB File Control Block a small piece of memory used to control the status and the inputting and outputting of data between the operating system and disk files filespec The name by which a disk file is referenced A filespec consists of four fields and two switches of which the first field is always mandatory A filespec is designated by the following format filename ext password d where wu preceding filename is an optional switch If this switch is set filespec is taken to be absolute This allows the accessing of a filespec that would otherwise be inaccessible i e a filespec that is the same as an LDOS library command filename The mandatory name of the file ext The optional file extension password The optional file password d The optional drive specification wow following d the end of is an optional switch file marker for file after every write to the file GLOSSARY 2 filespec will If this switch is set
149. SHIFT gt which will cause LBASIC to go into a wait state While continuing to hold down the lt SHIFT gt press the lt SPACE BAR gt and the next LBASIC statement will execute After execution of that statement the computer will immediately go into its wait state again Holding down the lt SPACE BAR gt will xecute statements at the normal keyboard repeat rate If you press any key without holding down the lt SHIFT gt then normal program execution will resume Note that this feature also functions when listing a program SYSTEM COMMANDS CMD DOS LIBrary commands that do not affect HIGHS may be executed from LBASIC The syntax is CMD command For example MD DIR MD DEVICE MD LIST DAT MD FREE OPQ E A All of the above will perform the LIBrary command contained within the quote marks and return to LBASIC This type of CMD command will function whether called from LBASIC s command line or from within an LBASIC program The command may also be contained in a string variable or expression and called in the format CMD A Approximately 4K of free memory must be available or an OUT OF MEMORY error will occur LBASIC 5 Several single letter CMD functions are also available They are CMD A Abnormal return to LDOS Any active DO command will be cancelled CMD B switch This command will enable or disable the lt BREAK gt key
150. SHIFT EIGHT lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt 8 gt LCOMM will generate a modem break extended null if you press the BREAK key To produce a normal TRS 80 break code X 01 press lt CTL gt lt A gt A local CLEAR SCREEN function is also available and can be requested by pressing the lt CLR gt lt gt keys LCOMM UTILITY 2 The following PF keys are used to select appropriate devices KI lt CLR gt lt 1 gt This designates the keyboard device When LCOMM is first en KI is in an on state If you desire to turn it of accidentally brushing the keyboard while you are transmitti tered the f to avoid ng a file you can turn off the keyboard by lt CLR gt lt 1 gt followed by a CLR gt lt gt which indicates the off function While the KI is off all still active KDO lt CLR gt lt 2 gt This designates the video display device When LCOMM is fir the DO is in an on state If you desire to turn it off instance the printer has been activated a simple lt CLR gt lt 2 gt a lt CLR gt lt gt will perform the requested function 1 be re activated by a lt CLR gt lt 2 gt followed by a lt CLR gt lt gt PF keys are st entered when FOr followed by The video display will PR lt CLR gt lt 3 gt This PF key references th printer device When LCOMM first initializes this device is Off If you want to direct the communications transactions to your printer do a lt CL
151. TER command JBL LDOS default for JOBLOG files JCL LDOS default for the DO command Stands for Job Control Language KSM LDOS default for KSM Utility Stands for KeyStroke Multiply OVx LBASIC extension for Overlay files Overlay x PCL Used as a default by Electric Pencil for its text files REL Used by some systems to indicate relocatable object code SCR LDOS default for Scripsit text files SEQ Possible extension for sequential files SPL LDOS default for the SPOOL command SYS LDOS SYStem files only Do not use for your own files TXT LDOS default for the LIST and DUMP with the ASCII parameter command Stands for TeXT file LDOS COMMAND INTERPRETATION The LDOS command interpreter will use the following conventions Drivespecs must always be preceded by a colon whether used as part of a filespec or as a stand alone parameter The closing parentheses may be omitted from any of the LDOS commands GENERAL INFORMATION 4 All commands filespecs and devspecs ntered in lower case will be converted to upper case befor being acted upon This results in all file names in directory entries being in upper case LDOS JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE Through the use of the DO Library command and the LDOS JCL Job Control Language it is possible to create a sequenc of commands and functions store them in a disk fil
152. The switch ON or OFF Y OFF N he real hen you enter in this time clo ck in the W locations accurate automatical READY usin POKEd in fr The real t 54 to 61 The cloc ly updat k will the dat g the TIM om LBASIC ime cloc E and DAT See TIM Al E of its disk this by the This seconds or The CLOCK display may also be keys if the MiniDOS filter is active It should be noted that the CLOCK message I O functions message NOTE REAL more notifies TIME commands and DATE k will be turned of like BACKUP 24 ho hours It can corner of under software control only run in the very 24 screen or the TIM and FORMAT CLOCK NO LONGER ACCURATI the screen will the user that because th certain critical functions and is turned the real on and kkk NOTE x take precedenc over whatever CLOCK LIBRARY COMMAND f while the LDOS system You will be notified of GI time clock has system had to turn off the hardware clock during no longer exact command it will activate a background task and display upper right This clock is at print and is fairly but will not established at LDOS and DATE values may be is doing some lost several off with the lt CLEAR gt lt SHIFT gt lt C gt in the upper right hand corner of BASIC may
153. Usually entered in revers notation low byte then high byte LSB MSB GLOSSARY 5 IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY Your LDOS operating system was designed and tested to provide you with trouble free operation If you do experience problems there is a good chance that something other than the LDOS system is at fault This section will discuss some of the most common user problems and suggest general cures for these problems Problem 1 The system seems to access the wrong disk drives or cannot read the diskettes There are two main causes of this problem If you have special hardware it must be configured properly with the SYSTEM DRIVE DRIVER command Check the drive tabl display with the DEVICE command and make sure that it shows the correct drive configuration If you have trouble reading diskettes created on other operating systems refer to the REPAIR Utility That section will explain what is needed to make these types of disks readable Problem 2 RS 232 communications do not work or function incorrectly If you xperienc RS 232 problems the first thing you should do is to make sure both ends are operating with the same RS 232 parameters baud rate word length stop bits and parity If these parameters are not the same at each end the data sent and received will appear scrambled Some hardware such as serial printers require handshaking when running
154. VISible files from drive 1 onto drive 0 You will not be asked befor ach file is moved CONV BAS 2 0 NEW This example will move only those files with the extension BAS from drive 2 to drive 0 Because the NEW parameter was specified only those files that do not already exist on drive 0 will be moved CONV DATA 1 2 OLD This example will move those files that have the characters DATA as the fourth through seventh letters in their file name You will be asked before each file is moved and only those files that already exist on drive 2 will be considered CONV UTILITY This is the command that allows a diskette to be FORMATted with cylinders tracks sectors and a directory so that it may be used by the system Th syntax is FORMAT d parms parms The following optional parameters may be used NAME The name that will be given to the disk MPW wo HW he Master PassWord assigned to the disk xDEN The density that will be used to FORMAT the disk DDEN double or SDEN single SIDES The number of sides to be FORMATted either or 2 CYL The number of CYLinders tracks that are to be placed on the disk up to 80 STEP The BOOT track STEP rate that will be put on track 0 either 0 1 2 3 These values represent the step rates in milliseconds 5 0 6ms 1 12ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 8 Q 3ms 1 6 ms 2 10ms
155. W LBASIC COMMANDS New commands have been added to LBASIC They function as follows RESTORE nnnn This command is similar to a regular RESTORE command except that a line number may be specified The data pointer will be moved to the beginning of the specified line Any subsequent READ statement will start at the specified line when looking for DATA statements The line need not contain any DATA statements but th lin number must be for an existing line A variable may NOT be used in place of the line number RUN filespec V line number The V parameter of this command will allow saving all current variables and string space when running a new Basic program A line number may be given to start execution of the new program at the specified point The line number may NOT be specified as a variable If no line number is given the new program will begin execution at its first statement An Out of Memory or Out of String Space error may occur depending on the length of the new program the number of active variables and the amount of string space cleared Be aware that DEF statements DEFINT DEFDBL etc will not be carried to the new program RUN filespec line number This command is similar to the abov xample xcept that preservation of variables will not be done The new program will begin execution at the specified line number SET EOFn This command will allow a file opened in
156. W gt The video driver used will be the ROM driver rather than the LDOS driver lt ENTER gt No breakable AUTO commands will be done lt D gt The system DEBUGger will automatically be entered Note that no SYSGENed configuration will be loaded abbr NONE NOTE Only double density diskettes may be used to BOOT the Model III LDOS operating system Holding down the lt RIGHT ARROW gt key during BOOTing will prevent the LDOS front end to the video driver from being loaded The system will use the ROM video driver instead This may be necessary for certain machine language programs CAUTION Using the ROM video driver will cause problems with Type Ahead Lcomm the Spooler and any other LDOS function that uses interrupt processing and should NOT normally be done By typing this command the LDOS system disk in drive 0 is BOOTed back into the system All devices will be returned to their normal power up configuration as if the system had been turned off and then turned on again Any required FILTERing LINKing ROUTING SETting or setting of SYSTEM parameters must be done again at this point unless a SYSTEM config file has been generated on drive 0 by the use of SYSTEM SYSGEN See SYSTEM command If the DATE has not been set it will be asked for at this time If the system has been SYSGENed the user configuration will be loaded and
157. a address mark 8 Device not available X 08 A reference was made for a logical device that could not be located in the device control blocks Most likely your device specification was in error A DEVICE command can be used to display all devices available to the system 9 Parity error during header write X 09 This is the same type of error as error 1 except that the operation requested was sector WRITE Gl 10 Seek error during write X OA This is the same type of error as error 2 except that the operation requested was sector WRITE 11 Lost data during write X OB During a sector write request the CPU was not fast enough in transferring a byte to the FDC so it could be written to the disk 12 Parity error during write X N CA A CRC error was generated by the FDC during a sector write operation 13 Data record not found during write X OD Similar to error 5 the sector number requested for the write operation could not be located on the cylinder being referenced Either the request is erroneous or the cylinder is improperly formatted TECH INFO ERROR DICTIONARY 2 14 Write fault on disk drive X 0 zal This error message results when the FDC returns a write fault error Consult your FDC reference manual 15 Write protected disk X OF A write request was generated to a disk which had a write protected diskette or was software write protected On 5 1 4 diskettes
158. a covered up notch will protect the diskett from being written On 8 media an exposed notch will perform the same thing If you want to write on a diskette you must observe the proper notch condition 16 Illegal logical file number x 10 A bad Directory Entry Code DEC was found in the File Control Block FCB This usually indicates that your program has altered the FCB improperly 17 Directory read error X 11 Any disk error sensed during the reading of directory information will result in this error It could be media failure hardware failure or program crashes 18 Directory write error X112 Similar to error 17 but the error condition is sensed while attempting to write a directory sector back to the disk The integrity of the directory is now suspect This error can also occur if a disk is write protected when attempting a directory write 19 Illegal file name X 13 The file specification provided to the system has a character not conforming to the file specification syntax S th referenc manual section on filespecs 20 GAT read error X 14 Any disk error sensed during the reading of the granule allocation table will result in this error It could be media failure hardware failure or program crashes TECH INFO ERROR DICTIONARY 3 21 GAT write error ulna ta Similar to the above except that the error was sensed during a WRITE request The integrity of the
159. a display abbreviation t show the true doing BACKUPs or FORMATting LDOS will make last writte LDOS than other systems because n making BACKUPs no date entries tual DATE file was created n to DATE will last written to DATE ill use 00 00 00 Gl When power is so the system will this prompt with a val mot and the name tant in the LDOS prompt for the id DATE string the Year and will remain details the DATE LIBRARY COMMAND z and the year xpanded as two other numbers cal and Day of constant unl press enter at this prompt and you entered will howing the day of the week in the the month also 19xx lculated from the k These values less the DATE is locations and patterns of ry E It should be noted that the DATE will power applied to it providing the user applications Therefore when after the DATE has been set the sy that was last set and will not bothe that had been set will be displayed a ry E stay set DAT ES R s nd ETing or the system wil as long as E storage area is not executing tem will automatically with prompting for the ll contin the computer has overwritten by the BOOT command recover the DAT DATI he DAT ue Pe Pi tem simply type the system will of month y
160. ach line will be executed from this file The parameters D 5 and E 6 will be passed as needed during the execution The following examples show what will happen if the space is omitted in a DO command DO TEST JCL The use of the character normally tells the DO command to skip the compile phase and directly execut ach line of the JCL file If the space between the DO command and the is omitted the compile phase WILL BE DONE This means that the TEST JCL file will compile to the SYSTEM JCL creating the SYSTEM JCL file if none exists DO LIBRARY COMMAND 3 DOSTEST JCL The character normally tells the DO to compile the TEST JCL file without executing it If the spac between DO and the character is omitted the execution WILL BE DONE DO This command will ignore the asterisk and generat th rror message FILE SPEC REQUIRED DO LIBRARY COMMAND 4 This command DUMPS a specified block of memory to a be in load module or ASCII format The DUMP command DUMPs an exact image of th load module or disk disk file The dump may The syntax is DUMP filespec START END TRA ASCII ETX filespec is any START is the END is the en TRA is the tr ASCII is an opt ETX optional abbr START S END E TRA T valid filespec default extension CIM starting address
161. acters the PATCH code may be entered as an ASCII string enclosed within quotation marks type of PATCH code representation can be used in all LDOS PATCH MODES X nnnn nn nn nn nn nn nn Hexadecimal load location format This is the forma ending module will then load with the program and ov code at X nnnn where nnnn is the HEX load address The PATCH to be loaded is shown as nn s which rep this PATCH mode will extend the disk file even if is to the inside of the program Because this merely be added to the end of the file to be PATC removed with the YANK parameter Drr bb nn nn nn nn nn nn This is the DIRECT PATCH mode The rr is the PATCHed and the bb is the BYTE in that record wher begin nn are the HEXADECIMAL bytes that are to record replacing those that are there This typ parameter NOTE Applying unauthorized PATCHes of this type diskette may VOID your warranty PATCH UTILITY 2 PATCH modes This t that will cause a load module to be built at the end of the file being PATCHed This erlay or extend the for the PATCH line resent the HEX bytes that are desired at the specified load address It must be noted that all of the PATCHing type of PATCH will Hed it may later be record number e the PATCH to be is to be placed in the e of PATCH line does not extend th file and is applied directly to
162. al use for the JCL feature is to use it as an alert function from LBASIC to notify you when a long unattended process is complete Refer to the following example of a JCL file called ALERT JCL Your process has completed Please press lt ENTER gt to continue your program falter 104770 exit If an appropriate amplifier were hooked to the cassette port you would hear an alternating tone when this JCL executed Note the exit macro ending the JCL This is necessary if control is to be returned to the LBASIC program You could call this JCL from LBASIC with a program line such as 100 CMD DO ALERT JCL JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE EXAMPLES a ke This is the syntax to be observed when entering LBASIC LBASIC parm parm parm command LBASIC used to re enter LBASIC with the program and the variables intact The allowable parameters are as follows BLK parameter that specifies Blocked file mode either ON or OFF ON is the default FILES parameter that specifies the maximum number of files LBASIC will be able to access 1 to 15 If not specified 3 is assumed MEM parameter to set the highest memory address to be used by LBASIC All memory above this address will be protected If not specified all memory up to HIGHS will be available HIGH Parameter that sets the cassette baud rate LOW either HIGH or LOW HIGH 1500 and LOW 500 The default is HIGH comma
163. allocation if re activated after being disabled See the individual sections for exact command syntax and specifications SPOOL library command KI DVR including the TYPE and JKL Options MiniDOS FLT PR FLT KSM FLT Here are som xamples of the RESET devspec command RESET PR If you had your printer PR FILTERed with the PR FLT routine the RESET PR command would restore the normal I O path between the printer DCB and its power up driver RESET DU Suppose you had a dummy device DU ROUTEd to a disk file TEST TXT and had your printer PR LINKed to DU This configuration would cause all output to the PR to also go to DU and into the disk file TEST TXT If you RESET DU the device table would show DU Nil and the file TEST TXT would be closed However PR would still be LINKed to DU Since DU Nil any output sent to the PR would be ignored by DU The printer PR would function normally To clear the LINK issue a RESET PR command DU would continue to be shown in the device table until the system is reBOOTed DU is KILLed or a global RESET is performed RESET LIBRARY COMMAND The RESET devices with command will be devices will be LINKing ROUTEing closed The Drive Cod 1 4 configuration system drive has been se to insert a system disk RESET or S The If certain system SPOOL or the memory If this is the ca CAN T RESET MEMORY T
164. although allocated This reduces th but rather to a device that has been appropriate software device any other the CL device while using LCOMM since the its own spool buffer a file for receiving interfaces with the user system overhead by utilizing keys used in concert with the KSM Since you Filter uses most of the top row a brief become familiar the lt CLEAR gt user menu with the This menu can be displayed by simultaneously depressing the lt CLEAR gt lt SHIFT gt lt gt keys FROM THIS POINT ON KEYS INCLUDING THE lt CLEAR gt AND lt SHIFT gt KEYS WILL BE REPRESENTED BY lt CLR gt WILL REPRESENT THE lt CLEAR gt KEY lt CTL gt WILL REPRESENT THE lt LEFT SHIFT gt lt DOWN ARROW gt KEYS lt SH gt WILL REPRESENT THE lt SHIFT gt KEY lt gt WILL REPRESENT HE ACTUAL KEY THAT IS TO BE USED SUCH AS lt gt lt gt lt gt lt 6 gt lt 9 gt etc Some of the PF keys ar used to select logical devices so as to be able to turn them on or off indicating whether th device should be acceptable f
165. ameter field The labels are not written to the SYSTEM JCL file and the JCL execution overlay cannot process a label line If you attempt to skip the compilation of a labeled procedure the execution phase will abort It is possible to combine labeled procedures in JCL conditional blocks For example consider the following brief JCL PROCLIB Master procedure library Version 5 0 FIRST Compiling the FIRST procedur please standby xample procedure to concatenate labeled procedures This is the first procedure IF COMBINE DO PROCLIB SECOND END SECOND Compiling the SECOND procedure this is a second phase of the total procedure This is the second procedure Two procedures are identified in this PROCLIB These are labeled FIRST and SECOND If the DO command line is entered as DO PROCLIB FIRST only the JCL from FIRST to SECOND is compiled since the token COMBINE is not passed as a parameter and is considered to take on the logic state of FALSE Thus the IF macro conditional will be FALSE If the DO command line is entered as DO PROCLIB SECOND only the second procedure will be compiled However if the command line is entered as DO PROCLIB FIRST COMBINE or DO PROCLIB COMBINE FIRST then the procedur labeled FIRST would be compiled with the LDOS command DO PROCLIB SECOND as part of its job stream At the conclusion of the FIRST procedure the PROCLIB will automatically be re compiled by the DO P
166. an LDOS system present on either diskette COPY LIBRARY COMMAND 5 The colon and drive on some drive other several times in or perform the transfer You will be prompte drive doing the COPY INSERT SOURCE COPYed T INSERT SYSTEM diskette which number are optional so that you can choose to COPY a file than drive 0 This command requires swapping diskettes der to utilize the LDOS operating system modules to d for the correct diskette and when to insert it into the ing The prompts are as follows just press lt EN INSERT DESTINA file You must ntir file t appear twice i You cannot COPY X any type file made source and destinati master password After the COPY X follows The file will If a password automatically passwords If file then th DISK ENTER The disk that contains the file to be DISK ENTER This is any LDOS SYSTEM diskette If the is currently in drive 0 contains the complete system TER gt TION DISK ENTER This is the diskette to receive the have enough space left on that diskette to contain the ob COPYed Under certain conditions this prompt may na row logical devices only disk files The disk files can be with any LDOS compatible operating system Note that the on disks MUST have different pack IDs disk name and or the destination disk file will have its ATTRIButes
167. and executed No configuration file will be loaded and all memory above X 5200 will be untouched lt ENTER gt This key will prevent the execution of any breakable AUTO commands from taking place Once the system has displayed th message LDOS READY it is ready to accept a command from the user LDOS SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Certain LDOS features can be configured by the user and stored in a disk fil They will automatically be loaded each time the system is powered up or rebooted The Library command SYSTEM gives a description of the configuration procedure in its SYSGEN parameter section Using the DEVICE library command wil show the current system configuration including active disk drives device I O paths and some user selected options currently active Onc saved on disk any configuration may easily be changed deleted or bypassed if the user desires FILES DEVICES AND LDOS Throughout the manual you will s references to filespec and devspec These are abbreviations for file specification and device specification Refer to the Glossary for allowable filespecs and devspecs Due to th device independence of LDOS it is possible to interchange these two terms in most Library commands For example you can copy your keyboard to your line printer or to a disk file You can even append information from a device onto the end o
168. anguage application software by using the LDOS DEBUG command If your operation will not require this debugging tool you may purge this overlay SYS6 SYS This overlay contains all of the algorithms and routines necessary to service the LIBrary commands identified as Library A by the LIB command This represents the primary library functions Very limited use could be made of LDOS if this overlay is removed from your working SYSTEM disk SYS7 SYS This overlay contains all of the algorithms and routines necessary to service the LIBrary commands identified as Library B by the LIB command A great deal of use can be made of LDOS even without this overlay It performs specialized functions that may not be needed in the operation of specific applications Use the PURGE command to eliminate this overlay if you decide it is not needed on a working SYSTEM diskette SYS8 SYS This overlay is needed to dynamically allocate file space used when writing files It must be on your working SYSTEM diskettes TECH INFO SYSTEM OVERLAYS 2 SYS9 SYS th EXTended This overlay contains the routines necessary to servic debugging commands available after a DEBUG EXT is performed This overlay may be purged if you will not need th xtended debugging commands while running your application In addition if you purge SYS5 SYS then keeping SYS9 SYS would serve no useful purpose SYS10 SYS Th
169. aracters during a screen print If this parameter is used any graphics characters on the screen will be sent to th lineprinter during a screen print command either from the DOS level or with LBASIC s CMD DO NOT use this parameter unless your printer is capable of reproducing the TRS 80 graphics characters SYSTEM TYPE switch This command will turn on or off the task processing of the KI DVR type ahead feature If you have SET KI to the KI DVR driver and wish to temporarily suspend the typ ahead feature us th SYSTEM TYPE OFF command The type ahead task processing may be restarted with the SYSTEM TYPE ON command SYSTEM SVC This command will load a SuperVisory Call SVC table into high memory A complete description of the SVC table can be found in the technical section of the manual SYSTEM LIBRARY COMMAND 5 SYSTEM SYSGEN switch This command creates or deletes a configuration file onthe drive 0 diskette where switch represents the following parameters ON Sins creates a configuration file OFF deletes the configuration file If switch is not specified ON is assumed SYSTEM SYSGEN is the same as SYSTEM SYSGEN ON After a SYSTEM SYSGEN OFF command has been given the current configuration of the system will not change until the system is booted again
170. arameters will not be affected by turning the SPOOLed device off and then back on SPOOL LIBRARY COMMAND 4 This command is used to configure the user definable areas of your LDOS system The syntax is SYSTEM parm parm Allowable SYSTEM parameters are ALIVE BASIC2 BLINK BREAK DRIVE FAST GRAPHIC SLOW SVC SYSGEN SYSRES SYSTEM TYPE Parameter arguments will be detailed in this section abbr ON Y OFF N The existing configuration of your LDOS system can be seen by doing the DEVICE and MEMORY commands The SYSTEM command can set or change the disk drive configuration as well as turn on or off different keyboard video and hardware drivers Each valid SYSTEM command will be discussed in this section Once your LDOS system has been configured you may store the configuration on the drive 0 disk with the SYSTEM SYSGEN parameter Please read this section thoroughly to determine the different SYSTEM command uses and to discover exactly how other LDOS commands will affect the SYSGEN parameter Certain of the SYSTEM commands must load driver routines into high memory to accomplish their functions When they do this they determine th highest unprotected memory location referred to as HIGHS and load directly below this location After loading the LDOS system moves HIGHS down to protect
171. ard LO HI reverse format with location X E100 changing to X 3E and X E101 changing to X OA The following would be displayed after this command X E100 57600 X 0000 gt X 3E0A High X E000 aaaa bbbbb Cec XXXX dddd All of the display is identical to the last xample xcept the contents of the WORD changed will be shown represented in the display as XXXxX MEMORY ADD X E100 BYTE X O0D This command will change the BYTE of memory at the specified ADDress X E100 to X OD The display after executing this command would be X E100 57600 X 0000 gt X 0D00 High X EOOO aaaa bbbbb CCEC XX dddd All of the display is identical to the last example except for the modified BYTE change shown here with the XX MEMORY GO X EO00 This command would transfer control to memory ADDress X EOOO Note that the Go parameter may NOT be abbreviated MEMORY LIBRARY COMMAND J The PURGE syntax is command allows f or CONTROLLED multip le KILLs of disk files PURGE d PURGE d QUERY sw MPW aa D bb I S PURGE partspec w wcc d QUERY sw MPW aa D bb I S PURGE partspec w wcc d QUERY sw MPW aa D bb 1I S d is an optional drivespec defaults to 0 partspec and partspec are as described in the LDOS glossary and under general information wcec Wild Card Character lt gt used as necessary for masking characters
172. as 3 grans per cylinder as it is a 5 double density disk The grans per cylinder will vary according to diskette size density and number of sides A gran will be represented as one of 4 characters explained here period will represent an unused gran will represent a locked out gran X will represent a used gran D will represent a gran used for the Directory This display may also be sent to PR by using the P parameter FREE LIBRARY COMMAND 2 This is used to delete the specified file or device from the system The syntax is KILL filespec KILL devspec abbr NON eal KILL only deletes th directory entry The file is still present until the file area has been written over by the system However it is beyond the scope of this manual to explain how to recover KILLed files To deal with KILLing several files it is often easier to use the PURGE command in LDOS which in effect is a controlled MASS KILL This may be the case if the files to be KILLed contain a common filename or extension as the PURGE command can deal with these files as a group See the PURGE command Here are som xamples of KILLing files KILL ALPHA DAT 0 This command will KILL th fil named ALPHA DAT that is present on drive 0 After execution of this command the file and the data in it will no longer be accessible to the system
173. ase or command The actual Qw PY VV NV and will continue up to Z gt the file a The fol owing rules will will IMPORTANT shifted alphabetic ll NOT be allowable when using the KSM filter load up to 26 These phrases will lt CLEAR gt are held down together kkk phrases from be taken as key and the default Th will display the use the BUILD command in the foll The extension of the filespec MUSI keys file extension alphabetic keys on display will the use of any the specified file though they were typed unshifted for the specified lowing manner T be KSM at atime and allow be Once all 26 characters have been assigned be closed and the BUII LD will be terminated The BUILD may be terminated any time before reaching Z gt by pressing the lt BREAK gt key in response to any character prompt F a Each phrase shou ace ld be an lt ENTER gt character at signifies the end of the phrase the govern the entry of phrases duri ng the BUILD terminated by pressing lt ENT ER gt This does not end of the KSM FILTER ays phrase but merely o embed an lt ENTER gt into a phrase use the semi colon character The semi colon will be translated into an lt ENTER gt whenever it is encountered in a phrase Length of
174. asure of file protection It is specified by appending an exclamation mark to the end of a filespec when th filespec is requested at open time Bits 2 0 Contain the access protection level as retrieved from the directory of the file For specific bit patterns see the directory record explanation FCB 2 Is reserved by the system for future use FCB 3 4 Contain the buffer address in lo order hi order format This is the buffer address specified in register pair HL at open time Contains the relative byte offset within the current buffer for the next I O operation If this offset is a zero value then FCB 1 Bit 5 must be examined to determine if the lst byte in the current buffer is the target position or the 1st byte of the next record If you are performing sector I O of byte data i e maintaining your own buffering then it is important to maintain this byte when you close the file if the tru nd of file is not at a sector boundary FCB 6 Contains the logical drive number in binary of the drive containing the file It is absolutely essential that this byte be left undisturbed It and FCBt7 are the only links to the directory information for the file TECH INFO FILE CONTROL BLOCK Contains the directory entry code DEC for the file This code is the relative position in the hash index tabl wher th hash code for the file appears Do not tamper with this byte It and FCBt6 are n
175. at the file has not been backed up since its last modification The BACKUP utility is the only LDOS facility that will reset this flag It is set during the close operation if the File Control Block FCB 0 Bit 2 denotes a modification of file data TECH INFO DIRECTORY RECORDS J Bit 5 This bit is reserved for future use If you want to maintain compatibility with future releases of LDOS do not utilize this bit for any purpose Bit 4 If the file was modified during a session where the system dat was not maintained remember that prompt during the BOOT this bit will be set to a 1 to indicate that the packed date of modification if any stored in the next fields is not the actual date when the modification occurred If a 1 the directory command will display plus signs between the date fields if the A option is requested Bits 0 through 3 contain the binary month of the last modification date If this field is a zero DATE was not set when the file was established nor since if it was updated This byte contains the remaining date of modification fields They ar ncoded as follows Bits 3 through 7 contain the binary day of last modification Bits 0 through 2 contain the binary YEAR 80 That is to say that 1980 would be coded as 000 1981 as 001 1982 as 010 and so forth Contains th nd of file offset byte This byte and the ending record number ERN fo
176. ather than 1 as is the normal default This may be necessary for compatibility with existing software FILTER PR USING PR FLT CHARS 80 INDENT 6 PAGE 51 LINES 45 FFHARD This command will establish the PR FLT program in high memory and FILTER the following parameters for the PR line printer output CHARS 80 will allow a maximum of 80 characters per printed line If a line contains more than 80 characters the excess will be printed on the next line s INDENT 6 will indent 6 spaces the remainder s of any line that exceeds 80 characters determined by the CHARS 80 parameter PAGE 51 sets the physical page size to 51 lines LINES 45 will allow for 45 lines to be printed on a page Since the page length is 51 lines determined by the PAGE 51 parameter the PR FLT program will normally send 6 linefeeds after the 45th line has been printed These linefeeds are determined by the formula PAGE minus INES If no linefeeds are required do not specify either PAGE or LINES NOTE Since the FFHARD parameter was used an X OC top of form character will be sent instead of the 6 linefeeds FFHARD will cause an X 0OC to be sent rather than 6 linefeeds when the line count reaches 45 FILTER PR USING PR FLT MARGIN 10 CHARS 80 INDENT 6 FILTER PR PR M 10 C 80 I 6 This example will cause all lines to start 10 spaces in from the normal left hand starting position MARGIN 10 Any line longer than _ 80 characters will be indente
177. attempt to print at the screen locations occupied by the display Copies data from one file or device to another file or devic The syntax is COPY filespecl TO filespec2 LRL nnn CLONE COPY filespecl TO partspec LRL nnn CLONE COPY filespecl TO d LRL nnn CLONE COPY filespec d X COPY devspec TO filespec LRL nnn ECHO COPY devspec TO devspec ECHO COPY filespec TO devspec LRL is an optional parameter where nnn th logical record length at which filespec2 is to be set 1 to 256 CLONE indicates the desire for an exact duplicate of the directory entry of filespecl All ATTRIButes will be COPYed with the file ECHO will cause any characters copied from a devspec to be echoed to the screen X is an optional parameter that will allow a single drive copy from a non system diskette abbr LRL L CLONE C ECHO E The COPY command in LDOS is greatly enhanced and xpanded over similar commands in other systems The user of LDOS should become familiar with this important command as it is used in the LDOS system so the full power of this feature can be utilized Special attention should be given to the ECHO LRL and CLONE parameters which are totally NEW to the COPY concept LRL is a parameter that allows the establishment of a new Logical Record Length for a file during the COPY process If not specified LRL will default
178. ault to X OE on character which if se cause expanded character matrix printers if CURSO in control codes from being sent to the device being filtered ilize this routine trates the use of the operating system n be passed in the ter If not entered the infamous cursor nt to a printer will mode on a lot of dot R ON is sent to PR To filter the printer output issue h FILTER PR using TRAP BYTE X dd r Roy Soltoff September 30 1980 eam eats LF EQU 10 CR EQU 13 lt ENTER gt key EXIT EQU 402DH DOS return entry ABORT EQU 4030H error abort HIGHS EQU 4411H highest usable memory DSPLY EQU 4467H display message PARAM EQU 4454H parameter scanner LOGOT EQU 428AH display amp log message ARR A LDOS uses a SET amp FILTER library command which loads at X 5A00 This provides R the opportunity to load all relocatable drivers initially at x 5200 The driver loader should then relocate to high memory honoring 7 the HIGHS pointer amp resetting it as needed RERE YS ORG 5200H ARA After processing the command line the SET FILTER command runs the driver On entry to the driver register pair DE 7 contains the device code table address n for the device identified in the command line The driver loader initialization follows
179. b Control Language section of the manual for a complete list of these features and limitations CHARACTER The character will rerun the last DO command that was compiled by using the existing SYSTEM JCL file If this file does not exist nothing will be DOne and an error message will be generated DO LIBRARY COMMAND j DO DRIVE JCL This command will compile and execut a file named DRIVE JCL The system will search the drives for a file named DRIVE JCL and compile it to a file named SYSTEM JCL executing each line after it has been compiled DO DRIVE JCL This command will execut the fil DRIVE JCL without compiling it to the SYSTEM JCL file DO DRIVE This command will compile the file DRIVE JCL to the SYSTEM JCL file The file will not be executed Note that the filespec DRIVE will use the default extension of JCL DO MY JCL 0 THIRD This command will compile and execute the program MY JCL All instructions in the program will be ignored up to the LABEL THIRD Execution will begin at this point and will continue until the next ABEL or End of File is reached DO This command will execute the SYSTEM JCL file If the file does not exist an error will be generated DO TEST NEW 2 D 5 E 6 This command will compile and execute the fil TEST NEW on drive 2 The file will be compiled to the SYSTEM JCL file and e
180. been set then no files would have been displayed If the SYS extension had not specified then the system files would have been displayed along with all other files on the disk DIR LIBRARY COMMAND 4 been DIR SYS 2 S A Free space 13 8 K Drive 2 LDOS C 12 03 80 Filespec Attributes Prot LRL Recs Ext File Space Mod Date BOOT SYS SIP EXEC 256 3 1 2 K SYS6 SYS SIP NO 256 60 2 S 15 0 K 30 Nov 80 DIR SYS SIP READ 256 Ose 2 5 K SYS7 SYS SIP NO 256 5 4 V2 RK SYSO SYS SIP NO 256 18 5 0K SYS8 SYS SIP NO 256 4 22K SYS1 SYS SIP NO 256 4 22K SYS9 SYS SIP NO 256 5 7 2K SYS2 SYS SIP NO 256 527 2K SYS10 SYS SIP NO 256 3 oe K SYS3 SYS SIP NO 256 4 2K SYS4 SYS SIP NO 256 Sf ef K SYS5 SYS SIP NO 256 Sif eK This example displayed the same files as the previous example but they are displayed in the allocation format because the A switch has been set DIR BAS 2 Free space 13 8 K Drive 2 LDOS C 12 03 80 BASIC OVN BASIC FIX BASIC OVX This command will display all VISible files on drive 2 provided that the first three characters in the filename are an exact match with BAS DIR BAS 2 I Free space 13 8 K Drive 2 LDOS C gt 12 03 80 BASIC OVN BASIC FIX BASIC OVX BASIC CMD IP This command will do the same thing as the previous example with the exception that INVisible files will also be pro
181. ccept a line of input X 0049 KEY Input a byte from the keyboard X 0060 PAUSE Suspend program execution X 3033 DATE Get today s date format xx xx xx X 3036 TIME Get time of day format xx xx xXx X 4015 X 401C KIDCBS Keyboard DCB X 401D X 4024 DODCB Video DCB X 4025 X 402C PRDCBS Printer DCB X 402D EXIT Normal program exit and return to LDOS X 4030 ABORT Abnormal program exit and return to LDOS X 4033 DVRHK Device Driver hook from ROM for byte I O X 403D ADTSK Add an interrupt level task X 4040 RMTSK Remove an interrupt level task X 4043 RPTSK Replace the currently executing task vector X 4046 KLTSK Remove the currently executing task X 405D X 407C DBGSVS DEBUG and SYSTEM storage area DO NOT USE X 4217 TIMES Contains time of day X 421A DATES Contains the current date X 421D ICNFG Initialize configuration TECH INFO MEMORY MAP moved for compatibility with found s that ADDRESS ABEL DESCRIPTION OF LOCATION X 4220 JDCB Storage area for DCB address during JCL execution X 4222 JRET Storage area for RET address during JCL execution X 4225 INBUFS Buffer area of 64 bytes for user command input X 4265 JFCBS JCL FCB during DO processing X 4285 KITSK Task processing during KBD scan X 4288 TIMERS This is the 33 333 ms heartbeat X 4289 DFLAGS The syste
182. ceiver has received the last character of the FR OFF otherwise the key after performing the FR OFF re engage keyboard contact ES and maybe FR RESET LCOMM UTILITY 8 ntries will also go into th file is actually riod DUPLEX ON the sender breakneck speed while it The sender must wait until file fil advises and performed a The receiver the sender to The following arrangement is suggested for the most satisfactory method of operation The sender should be set DUPLEX OFF or full duplex The receiver should be set DUPLEX ON and ECHO ON This will provide for the receiver sending back to the sender what actually got received while it is being received It should be easier for the sender to note when the file s transfer has been completed However the sender must still wait for the receiver to acknowledge that FR OFF has been performed GENERATING SPECIAL CODES Say you need to generate special characters not generatable using the TRS 80 keyboard You may set up a KSM file with the special characters use the BUILD utility to generat the codes in their hexadecimal form Then define the special keys for A Z using FILTER KI KSM USING KEYS where KEYS is your keycode file LCOMM UTILITY 9 LOG LOG CMD LOG is a program that will log in the directory track and number of sides on a diskette The syntax is LOG d
183. cessed as the search for files that begin with BAS is taking place This is why BASIC CMD IP appears in the display for this example but not in the previous example s display DIR S 0 A Free space 175 0 K Drive 0 LDOS 41 01 15 81 Filespec Attributes Prot LRL Recs Ext File Space Mod Date SPEC DIR ALL 256 7 41 S 2 5 K 16 Jan 81 SCRIPSIT FIX ALL 256 3 1 S 2 5 K 16 Jan 81 SB CMD ALL 256 2 fd Ss 2 5 K 18 Jan 81 SYSTEM JCL ALL 256 1 1 S 2 5 K 15 Jan 81 SS L ALL 256 43 1 S 12 5 K 15 Jan 81 SHIFTB CMD ALL 256 22 fe SS 2 5 K 15 Jan 81 SYS7A FIX ALL 256 1 1 S 2 5 K 15 Jan 81 DIR LIBRARY COMMAND 5 This DIRectory command displays all VISible files on drive 0 that begin with the letter S They are displayed in the allocation mode because th A switch has been set DIR SS 2 A Free space 13 8 K Drive 2 LDOS C 12 03 80 Filespec Attributes Prot LRL Recs Ext File Space Mod Date BASIC OVN ALL 256 7 2 S 2 5 K 29 Nov 80 BASIC FIX ALL 256 10 1 S 2 5 K 29 Nov 80 BASIC OVX ALL 256 10 1 S 2 5 K 29 Nov 80 MASS DAT READ 128 90 2 S 10 2 K 22 Dec 80 TASKS OVX ALL 256 Loy i 2 2 5 K 15 Jan 81 This example shows the use of the as a wcc or Wild Card Character By using SSS as the desired filespec all VISible files that have a third character of S in their filename will be d
184. cified RAM address GLOSSARY 3 LSB MACRO MSB NIL partspec partspec PARAMETER parm password PATCH PR The Least Significant Byte in a hexadecimal word sometimes referred to as the low order byte Statements or verbs used in JCL The Most Significant Byte in a hexadecimal word sometimes referred to as the high order byte A setting of a device indicating an inactive state All I O to from this device will be ignored An abbreviation representing PARTial fileSPEC A partspec may be used with certain LDOS LIBRARY commands in lieu of a filespec A partspec may be composed of any combination of the four fields defining a filespec No switches i e the leading and trailing in a filespec may be contained in a partspec In addition the filename and ext fields of a partspec may be abbreviated with leading information and or wildcarded Examples of partspecs are given in the LDOS manual where applicable Identical to a partspec except that it is used as exclusion criteria during certain functions The information that follows a library command or a utility on the command line This information is passed to the job that will be executed to tell the job how you wish execution to take place Parameters usually follow the command and are enclosed in parentheses H a he abbreviation for parameter described above The password associated with a filespec
185. d TECH INFO SUPERVISORY CALLS 4 88 58 89 90 5A 91 5B 92 93 5D 94 5E 95 99 100 64 101 127 DIRWR MULTEA MULT DIVEA DIVIDI Ed HIGHS Directory record write Reserved for future use 8 bit by 8 bit unsigned integer multiplication lt C gt contains multiplicand lt E gt contains multiplier 16 bit by 8 bit unsigned integer multiplication lt C gt contains multiplier lt HL gt contains multiplicand Reserved for future use 8 bit unsigned integer divide lt C gt contains divisor lt E gt contains dividend 16 bit by 8 bit unsigned integer division lt C gt contains divisor lt HL gt contains dividend Reserved for future use Contains the highest unused RAM address If HL 0 then HL is loaded with current HIGHS If HL lt gt 0 then HIGHS is changed to HL Reserved for future use TECH INFO SUPERVISORY CALLS 5 A system as complex and flexible as LDOS would occupy considerable memory space to be able to provide all of its features LDOS however makes xtensive use of overlays in order to minimize the amount of memory reserved for system use Th compromise in using an overlay driven system is that while a user s application is in progress certain disk file activities requested of the system may require th operating system to load different overlays to satisfy the request This could cause the system to run
186. d is not invoked ER DAT Es all R DA E N e system file PRIN will be device to a availabl ry E command maintenance see use ON and the after th ET is RES ER DAT it finds to the end of the PRIN ll be created on the first allocated disk fi any data sent to the line None of the characters will be printed by the line on the video display 7 the exc Line printer with the be hoo ing use th DU EO l1 show the as long a printer PR to the This command being tha the ROUTE but are ked to the system if PR e command RESET PR eption t TEST TXT on lished h an entry a disk file ROUTEing wit s the device DU is not h the R ES Py data normally sent to the search Any d ER DAT avai high will in T DU command prior to line printer PR to all active drives and ta sent to the PR will file If the file does lable drive An FCB and memory and the file a R is R G iS ET le it isa dvisable to determine th le on the diskett Mak sure th file mo of the t Glossary each buffer is en the EO which will Ring t properly space full ed all data up t closed error is en the la to countered disk is adequate to hold the amount of data you wis
187. d 6 spaces when wrapped around FILTER PR PR TAB ADDLF FILTER PR PR T A This example will cause expansion of all X 09 characters to their normal 8 column tab position Also a linefeed will be sent ev ac arriage return is sent PRINTER FILTER 3 ery time FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER PR PR XLATE X 2A2E PR PR X X 2A2E This example will translate all X 2A characters asterisks to an X 2E characters periods This may be useful to change the appearanc of a report forma PR PR PR PR FFHARD Z EF 2 This example wi character not a counter will sta specified ERO ll issue a Top of Form as an X 0C Top of Form s a series of linefeeds Additionally the printer line rt from 0 rather than 1 as the ZERO parameter was PRINTER FILTER s s CONTROL L The Job Control Language Disk Operating System sequence of commands or o LDOS commands user ANGUAGE JCL is one of the most JCL allows the user ther keystrokes stor program commands fication provides for dynamic modi passed to the procedure by the user requiring no additional input by sequence restrictions on inc the Th Some must be noted First hands off execution unpredictable queries be in synchronization wit It lusion of concept o in itself a ade i could be capable of environment must
188. d adjacent to the pack name GAT X EO through GAT X FF Contains the AUTO command buffer This is the command that will be executed during a BOOT operation If there is no AUTO command in place then GAT X EO will contain an X OD TECH INFO DIRECTORY RECORDS G A T 8 INDEX TABLE disk accesses H The procedure that th HIT The Hash Index Table is the key to addressing any file in the directory designed so as to pinpoint the location of a file s directory with a minimum of A minimum quantity of disk accesses is useful to keep overhead low while providing rapid file access ake the file nam ame left justified nserted padded with blanks f the 11 byte field and hich produces a si val alue of X 00 ngle byt lt 3 0HD5O The hash code is then more than one 11 byte string can collisions exists for a matching code entry the matching HIT position directory with that provided in directory has been found col The position of the HIT entry in Entry Code DEC of the file All For this reason will then r and will u stored in the Hash Index corresponding to the directory record containing the file s directory to identical the search al hash Tt ts system uses to locate a file s directory is to first xtension and construct an 11 byte field with the file and padded with blanks and will occupy the three least significant bytes This field is th
189. dard the standard drive configuration will DDE ELAY 1 SID ST D 40 N ES 1 EP 30 SYSTEM LIBRARY COMMAND s s driver program configuration Upon appear as follows The purpose of the DRIVER command is to parse the command line parameters and then call a disk driver program that will place the correct information about a disk drive type in the DCT Please note that the file extension DCT is the default extension for disk driver programs Information about specific use of this command will be provided with the driver program for the particular hardware SYSTEM DRIVE d WP sw This command will allow you to software write protect any or all drives currently enabled The parameters are as follows da the drive number affected sw the switch ON or OFF ON will set the write protect status and OFF will remove it and allow the drive to be written to The command with no drivespec specified will act globally That is SYSTEM WP ON will write protect all drives in the system and SYSTEM WP OFF will remove any software write protection that has been done on any drive The WP OFF parameter will have no effect on a disk physically protected with a write protect tab Note that if the flag ON or OFF is not specified ON is assumed SYSTEM GRAPHIC This command informs the LDOS system that your lineprinter has the capability to reproduce the TRS 80 graphics ch
190. dent LDOS system We still wanted to have the 1500 baud tape capability in the system so a small utility was added The utility is called HITAPE CMD and is invoked by simply typing HITAPE lt ENTER gt at the LDOS Ready prompt You may then use 500 or 1500 baud tapes in the normal manner If HITAPE is in when a SYSTEM SYSGEN is performed it will be saved with the configuration file Both CMDFILE and LBASIC allow the use of high speed cassette only if HITAPE has been executed If HITAPE has NOT been executed and a 1500 baud tape load is attempted the tape will not load It may be necessary to depress the lt BREAK gt key to regain control of the system HITAPE UTILITY The LCOMM utility is a sophisticated program that provides communications capabilities between two TRS 80 systems between a TRS 80 and a Bulletin Board System such as Forum 80 PSBBS or other similar systems or between a TRS 80 and a large timesharing system such as The Source tm MicroNET tm or other main frames LCOMM provides the capabilities of keyboard send receive automatic spooling to a printer through a dynamic memory buffer and the transfer of files from system to system without the need for handshaking when operating at 300 baud The syntax of the LCOMM command is LCOMM devspec XLATE X aabb devspec is a valid LDOS active de
191. device assigned by the user to spare slot may be removed from the system after the device is RESET by ng the KILL devspec command The LDOS defined devices ar protected and not be killed TECH INFO DEVICE CONTROL BLOCK DRIVE CODE TABLE DCT The Drive Code Tabl DCT is the way in which LDOS interfaces the operating system with specific disk driver routines This table is one of the examples of the versatility of the system Ingenuity and oddball hardware will mix well to provide an easy interface Pay particular attention to the fields indicating t t he allocation scheme for the drive This data is an essential ingredient in he allocation and accessibility of file records The table contains a maximum of eight records one for each logical drive designated 0 7 The TRS 80 Model III supports a standard configuration of four drives This will be the default initialization when LDOS is BOOTed Here is the table layout The lst byte of a 3 byte vector to the disk I O driver routines This would be an X C3 If the drive is disabled see SYSTEM command this will be an RET instruction X C9 DCT 1 amp DCT 2 This will contain the vector transfer address of the disk I O routines driving the physical hardware DCT 3 Contains a series of flags for drive specifications They ar ncoded as follows bit 7 Set to 1 if software write protected
192. dicating Query each file before moving The switch ON or OFF may be specified will BACKUP only those files already existing on the destination disk will BACKUP only those files NOT already on the destination disk wi allow you to specify a range of MOD dates M1 D1 Y1 M2 D2 Y2 will BACKUP only those files whose MOD dates fall between the two dates specified inclusive M1 D1 Y1 will BACKUP all files with MOD dates equal to the specified dat M1 D1 Y1 will BACKUP all files with MOD dates less than or equal to the specified dat M1 D1 Y1 will BACKUP all files with MOD dates greater or equal to the specified dat allows BACKUPs with no SYStem disk in drive 0 ON Y OFF N BACKUP UTILITY to a x k EXTREMELY IMPORTANT Due to the complexities involved with handling many different disk drive configurations the LDOS BACKUP utility demands that destination disks MUST be FORMATted before the BACKUP begins This FORMAT before BACKUP requirement is found in most large operating systems including the TRS 80 Model II Having the destination disk FORMATted will allow the BACKUP utility to determine if a Mirror Image BACKUP is possible or if it will be necessary for the BACKUP utility to do a Reconstruct The BACKUP command will move all or part of the data from a specified source disk to a specified destination disk The parameters of the BACKUP command may be used to determine which data
193. diskette 5 Cylinder 0 of the destination diskette will be verified Steps 2 5 will be repeated for all remaining cylinders 7 The following message will appear after the last cylinder has been verified oO Duplication complete 1 disk created Replace destination disks and press lt ENTER gt to repeat lt R gt to restart with new parameters or lt BREAK gt to exit program 8 Press lt ENTER gt in response to this prompt to make another mirror image backup Press lt BREAK gt to abort the QFB utility The following prompt will appear T Load SYSTEM diskette and hit lt ENTER gt Place a system diskette in drive 0 and press lt ENTER gt to return to LDOS Ready If it is desired to use QFB again with different parameters press lt R gt in response to the prompt displayed in step 7 Doing so will cause the drives to be prompted for and prompts will appear for all parameters If QFB is to be restarted or the command QFB Q Y is entered the following prompts for the parameters will occur Duplicate unallocated tracks Y N Verify on same pass Y N Verify on second pass Y N The first prompt relates to the ALL parameter If it is answered with lt V gt all cylinders will be read from the source diskette and written to the destination diskette regardless of whether or not the cylinder contains information If this prompt is answered lt N gt only cyl
194. dress e as OLDLOW original transfer address dress is less than the old base address offset towards the driver routine appended would look like this NEWHI 1 DRIVER ORIGIN OR NOP INTERRUPTS OFF HL NEWHI 7PT TO OFFSET END DE OLDHI PT TO WHERE IT GOES BC ENDLOD BGNLOD 1 LENGTH OF MOVE MOVE IT IN PLACE OLDTRA 7GO TO ORIG ENTRY PT highest load address after offset original highest load address Appending two or more files In order to append keep responding to q each file resides buffer When th 1 depressing lt ENTER gt address jumped to o transfer address det provide control to address to one of yo concatenate two or more files into one contiguous file uery 2 with the D or T indicator depending on where in order to read all the desired files into the memory ast file has been read in respond to query 2 by to initiate the output cycle Note that the transfer n initial loading of the concatenated file would be the ected from the last file input Thus if you want to another address use query 7 to modify the transfer ur own choosing COMMAND FILE UTILITY afs If you also have to offset the concatenated file it cannot be done during this output writing Complete the above procedure thereby creating the appended file Now re input th appended file and offset it This second operat
195. dure file has been reached The primary reason for the LABEL parameter is to allow many different functions to be built into one large file This will greatly conserve disk space as a series of small JCL files would take up a minimum of 1 granule apiece For complete definitions of JCL LABELs refer to the JCL section of the manual If the LABEL and parameters cause the DO command line to exceed 64 characters the semi colon character will allow you to continue passing parameters once the DO has started The proper use of the semi colon is as follows 1 Terminate the DO command line by enclosing as many parameters as you can in the parentheses Clos th parentheses then insert the semi colon character and press lt ENTER gt 2 A question mark will appear on the screen At this point you may nter th remaining parameters making sur they ar nclosed in parentheses Refer to the following examples and descriptions as a guide to the uses of the DO function CHARACTER The character will DO the compile phase only without actually executing the commands The DO will compile your JCL file to the SYSTEM JCL file This will test if the syntax of a new JCL file will compile properly CHARACTER The character will skip the compile phase and directly execute your JCL file Be aware that some of the JCL features will be ignored if the compile phase is skipped Refer to the Jo
196. e and recall and execute them at any time The JCL will allow for inputs variables and conditionals and even has a screen flash and audio tone alert mode A JCL file is merely an ASCII file that contains a series of commands or JCL statements The JCL is an extremely versatile and somewhat complex feature of the LDOS system It will be well worth your time to study the special JCL section and to experiment with the language until you become familiar with it You will find your day to day operating becomes much easier with a few well thought out JCL files USE OF LOWER CASE LDOS will permit the use of lower case for all command syntax and parameters except where specifically noted in the manual Th screen messages and prompts will all appear in upper and lower case even though they are shown as upper case only in the user s manual COMPATIBILITY WITH EXISTING OPERATING SYSTEMS LDOS has tried to remain upward compatible with TRSDOS like operating systems Most documented system calls have remained unchanged and nearly all Basic programs should run unmodified Total compatibility is not possible as LDOS cannot control the design of operating systems released by other vendors LDOS has made every effort to remain upward compatible with TRSDOS like operating systems and have provided many utilities and commands to transfer data and files between operating systems Assembly la
197. e RS 232 hardware AI SET CL TO RS232T DVR BREAK SET CL RS232T BREAK This example will configure the RS 232 hardware to the default values Because the BREAK parameter was specified certain system functions will recognize break pause or enter characters from the RS 232 as if they came from the keyboard SET CL RS232T RTS CTS BREAK This example is identical to the previous except that the RTS line will be held in a constant TRUE state and the driver will not transmit any characters unless the external device raises the CTS line RS232T DEVICE DRIVER 29 The program KSM FLT allows associated with the keyboard inputs This device filter The syntax is the use of files unshifted alphabetic keyboard keys containing pre defined phrases to be used as direct FILTER KI TO KSM FLT USING filespec filespec is an existing KSM type file abbr NON Gl is Please refer Because The KSM FLT filespec from the alphabetic in the shifted alphabetic key wil into memory linked to the keyboard KI with the FILTER command to the LIBrary command section for a complete explanation of the FILTER command kkk MiniDOS filter uses program will keyboard when the key filespec is KSM To create a KSM file BUILD filename KSM This BUILD command you to input your desired phr
198. e greatest value out of the system it will be necessary to read and study the user s manual This section will deal with generalized conventions that exist throughout the operating environment It will also give an overall view of the total LDOS system Let s start by listing some of the hardwar related features that you will find when using LDOS HARDWARE RELATED FEATURES 1 THE KEYBOARD will originally use the ROM keyboard driver This will provide key debounce and key repeat The debounce will prevent multiple characters from dirty or loose keyboard contacts If a key is held down for about 1 second the repeat feature will automatically repeat that key at the rate of 8 per second Note that the two lt SHIFT gt keys on the Model III can act separately Therefore certain functions will require th use of a specific lt SHIFT gt key These functions will be indicated as needed in the manual by the use of lt RIGHT or LEFT gt along with the lt SHIFT gt The keyboard also has a built in shift case reversal Your keyboard characters will normally be entered in upper case By pressing the lt RIGHT SHIFT gt and lt 0 gt keys together any key pressed with the lt SHIFT gt held down will appear in lower case Control characters may be entered by using the lt LEFT SHIFT gt and lt DOWN ARROW gt keys as the control key Simply hold down the shifted down arrow and
199. e performed when dealing with the assures that the expected amount of se by this file This file will be expanded if the CREATEd siz in size below its current size requir not used the drive NOTE switch set will Fo Fo The the da CR E E a CR a normal fil normal file ta in the file more space than is available ona system will attempt toc if T EAT has been C show a le Ed EAT Ed Sis S file e nn nn equal sign will be repla doing a is xceeded but it will never A file cannot be CREATEd that would disk Remember if a drivespec is reate the file on the first available DIRectory command with the A ced by a colon to indicate that length is the result of a CR KATE rather than the actual size of the see DIR command for a c EATE F N EWFIL E DAT 0 LRL 128 REC 100 F CREATE a file n allocated to ac This command will have enough space each omplete display example amed NEWFIL commodate 0 It will 128 bytes E DAT on drive 100 records of CREATE LIBRARY COMMAND ay CREATE ASCII DAT 2 LRL 1 REC 5120 This command will CREATE a file named ASCII DAT in which records will have a length of 1 byte and there will be space taken on the disk for 512
200. e sent to th the time Real default the JL Time Clock JL Once set a specified file or stamp will be determined see the TIME library extension will be JBL device if it is routed to a disk T he RESET JL command will terminate the any associated disk file made to add a constant definition in the GLOSSARY list the contents of the file to the screen or to the printer to a its driver you must first used when be appended to the end of the file if However JL is SET again a RES IL the trailing exclamation point to EOF maintenance will be invoked The LIST library command will F SO wow S ETting JL any information rather than a used in the device such as PR would be JOBLOG DEVICE DRIVER sis The KI DVR program will set the LDOS keyboard driver The syntax is TYPE JKL abbr The allowable parameters are as follows SET KI TO KI DVR parm parm activates the type ahead featur activates the screen print option NONI Gl The KI DVR program allows the user to establish the type ahead and screen prin options and also activates the lt CLEAR gt key This driver must be set if SYSTEM SVC KSM MiniDOS LCOMM or any other program that utilizes the lt CLEAR gt key as a As this driver control key is to be used is
201. e to b ASCII imag type fil the pure ASCII range load though stored in ven r HEX the line input length should be The BUILD will be terminated when the EAK gt key is entered as the first character in a line Following are som xamples of the BUILD command BUILD THISFILE 2 This will check drive 2 for a file named THISFILE JCL If it exists a File already exists error will occur Otherwise th fiL will be opened on drive 2 Note that the default extension JCL was used as no extension was specified All JCL files requir less than 64 characters per line to b ntered BUILD MYKEYS KSM This command will search all available drives for a file named MYKEYS KSM If the file exists a File already exists error will occur Otherwise this file will be created on the first available drive Since the extension was specified as KSM the prompts A gt B gt C gt D gt etc will appear one at a time so each of the alphabetic characters may be assigned the character string s they are to represent see KSM This BUILD will terminate after the letter Z or when a lt BREAK gt is used as the first character of a line BUILD LIBRARY COMMAND 9 BUILD SPECIAL 0 This will BUILD a file using the name SPECIAL with no extension Using the with no following characters
202. e user byte within the sector e show where on the screen commands inputs of sever mode you are in 256 or 1 different manner When in the 256 charact ENTERING FED FED lt ENTER gt at the LDOS Ready prompt Doing so will xecuted The first prompt you will see will ask c Answer this prompt by giving the filespec of the odify If you wish to exit FED at this point press will be returned to the LDOS Ready prompt If an spec is given the appropriate error message will lowed to r nter the filespec Th g FED using the syntax FED filespec lt ENTER gt filespec prompt s been given the FED 256 character mode will appear rst record record 0 will be contained in the edit record of the file s memory The edit buffer will contain one 256 byte e There will be two cursors flashing within the buffer will refer to the be in the ASCII portion of display portion and upon th screen the other initially accessing a be positioned over relative byt X 00 of record documentation the term relative byte will be he byte number 0 255 relative to the sector in relative byte number question Also hexadecimal notation X nn will be used to represent the t cursor located on the bottom right portion of the referred to as the n where commands are ssage Command This will be ll be the place on th scr lways be displayed there When in
203. e word This abbreviated form is only acceptable when typed on a command line not in a program line or JCL file A represents the command AUTO D represents the command DELETE E represents the command EDIT E L represents the command LIST The following commands are implemented by pressing the indicated key as the first character in the command line No carriage return is necessary the indicated action will take place immediately period This will perform the same function as the command LIST lt ENTER gt which will instruct LBASIC to list the currently active line LBASIC 4 comma This will perform the same function as the command EDIT lt ENTER gt which will instruct LBASIC to nter th edit mode for the currently active line lt UP ARROW gt This will cause LBASIC to display the next lower numbered line in the program lt DOWN ARROW gt This will cause LBASIC to display the next higher numbered line in the program lt LEFT ARROW gt This will cause LBASIC to display the first line of the program lt RIGHT ARROW gt This will cause LBASIC to display the last line of the program LBASIC SINGLE STEPPING This new feature allows the LBASIC programmer to step through each program statement singly with a HOLD after each step To invoke this feature simply do a normal pause lt
204. ear active the system is currently Should you wish to examine the DATE that is set in the sys DATE and press enter If the DATE has been properly set return the currently set DATE in day of week month day format The current DATE will also be sent to the Job Log if Should you wish to set the DATE to one other than using simply enter DATE mm dd yy F ai The new DAT will be set by the system EXAMPLE DATE 01 04 80 Sets the DATE for the first month January the 4th day and the 80th 1980 year At power up the DATE is set to 00 00 00 and the system will prompt you for a DATE to be entered Should the lt ENTER gt key be depressed as the response to this prompt the DATE will remain as at power up 00 00 00 Because the Real Time Clock TIME and DATE may need to be correct is turned off during certain d ad ay clock for exact timing functions DATE LIBRARY COMMAND J ach day Do not depend on the I O functions the system The DEBUG command turns the LDOS system s DEBUGing utility on or off The syntax is DEBUG switch EXT switch is the switch ON or OFF If not specified ON is assumed EXT turns on the EXTended DEBUGger abbr EXT E ON Y OFF N Unlike the other LIBrary commands the DEBUG command does not immediately produce a visible result It loads the s
205. ec BUT that does not cause data to be written to the file When you want to actually start receiving you have to turn the file on with a FR then ON Once the file is ON anything coming into your file in addition to any other device which and FR RESET when you are ready to close the file computer FILE TRANSFER To for transfer an ASCII the transmission of ASCII files since bit 7 file from one system to another will be directed to the is ON Don t forget to FR OFF LCOMM is only useful is stripped from every manual The byte received you need to provide some because LCOMM does not provide any itself prepare the receiving file with an FR ID sending end should perform After keyboarding to each provide a 10 second pause while th not depress any other key The sender FS ON The sender will typically see his befor th ntire file is sent This is other as to becaus and appropriate filespec the FS ID and provide the appropriate the readiness receiver performs the after the wait disk drive handshaking This is receiving end should The filespec sender should FR ON and does sends the file with stop running long the th spooled through memory and will usually be read in a short time pe If both receiver and sender are in half duplex will s the file appear on the video screen at goes out the communications line at 300 baud the re
206. ed devic nd to find out S h DE c poin deta Regi file of syst and defi defa The rout to non Samp writ To the Cc c In eith case control t ontaining the address of the d pec XY ntrol block is not defined in your configuration ET establishes a device control hen passes to vice code tab define an existing device a interface a filtering routi rol Block tables m the command line SET XY to ables for a matching device use the DEVICE block for the new ER with register pair the SET device This F the DRIV il TOT T F E ts to the TYPE cod s t iled explanation of the TYPE b ry ster pair spec and parsing em vector HL points to the co optional parameters a parameter string b What differentiate provide an error messag d he section on yte mmand line c This provide y using a par s FILT vic not avai ned i e you can only FILT ult file extension of FLT whi ER an existing device ET uses DVR le SI SET ine and FILTER commands are should be ORGed at addres high memory The routine must destructive HIGHS must be les of filters are provided ing the P Lace it m ER E a FILTER software properly pl existing DRIV designed su s X 5200 and load between roperly set which should relocating driver por
207. ed for system us Som ar used in LDOS 5 1 while others are planned for future use Any byte larger than X 1F encountered wher a header is expected by the system loader will cause a Load file format error message TECH INFO FILE FORMATS 214 Tape File Object Code Format A SYSTEM tape has a similar format however the control bytes are different The SYSTEM file structure is as follows a X 55 indicates the start of the FILENAME followed by the six character file name buffered with blanks X 20 to fill out to six characters X 3C indicates the start of a block followed by a one byte block length This in turn is followed by the two byte block load address The tape block length does not include the load address The block of code follows Immediately following the code block is a one byte checksum determined by the modulo 256 sum of each byte in the block plus each byte of the load address modulo 256 is achieved by performing 8 bit register addition ignoring all carries out of the high order bit b is repeated for as many blocks as are needed An X 78 is written to indicate th nd of file followed by the two byte transfer address TECH INFO FILE FORMATS 2 LDOS trea rou the are syst for handshaking the keyboard contains command level proce devi dures that pr references so that modifications may be made to ovide easy access to device the way in w
208. ed to enter the curr is other than PASSWORD and not passed with the MPW ATTRIB 0 UNLOCK NAME MYDISK nt Master Password parameter This command will remove all ACCess and UPDate passwords from the user s VISible non SYStem files on drive 0 It will also change the disk s name to MYDISK Since the current Master Password was not specified with the MPW parameter you will be prompted for it before this command is actually executed if it is other than PASSWORD ATTRIB 1 NAME DATA PW SECRET MPW BOSSMAN This command will change the name of the disk in drive 1 to DATA It will also change the Master Password to SECRET Note that the current Master Password was specified as BOSSMAN with the MPW parameter ATTRIB LOCK This command will first prompt you for the disk s Master Password if other than PASSWORD It will then change the ACCess and UPDate passwords of all the user s VISible non SYyStem files to the disk s current Master Password This command will be carried Out on drive 0 as no drivespec was used ATTRIB 1 NAME This command will first prompt you for the drive 1 disk s Master Password unless it is PASSWORD It will then prompt you for the new name to be given to the disk ATTRIB LIBRARY COMMAND 4 The AUTO command lets you modify the power up sequence by specifying a command to b xecuted immediately after power up reset or BOOT The syntax is
209. ee eA Sak Ras ee BD 6De essa eats thee R B BD_ Rep 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OF OF 40 gt ED 4B F9 60 OB ED 43 13 52 01 0000 ED 43 OF 52 Hex 50 gt 21 OD 6 22 OA 52 3E 1C CD 33 00 CD 55 55 C9 3A Rep 60 gt 01 52 B7 CC 10 5A FE 04 D4 10 5A 11 ED 60 CD 42 70 gt 44 C2 33 60 11 ED 60 CD 36 44 C2 33 60 21 OD 62 80 gt 11 0D 61 01 00 01 ED BO CD E3 5B C9 CD 28 55 CD 90 gt DE 5D C9 ED 4B OF 52 C5 11 ED 60 D5 CD 42 44 C2 AO gt 33 60 CD 36 44 C2 33 60 21 OD 62 11 OD 61 01 00 BO gt O01 ED BO D1 Cl 2A 13 52 B7 ED 42 C8 03 CD 42 44 FED CMD Drive 5 Record 13 X 000D Relative Byte gt 82 Command R Values X 61 97 FED FILE EDITOR Page 2 To enter FED simply type cause FED to be loaded and you to enter a filespe file you wish to examine m the lt BREAK gt key and you illegal or improper file appear and you will be al may be bypassed by enterin After a valid filespec ha on the screen and the fi buffer The term edit currently in the computer record at any given tim record one cursor will cursor will be in the Hex file these cursors will X 0000 Throughout this used and will indicate t current record number and There will also be an inpu screen following the me command buffer and wi entered The current command in use will al the 128 character mode portion of the screen Also shown on the scree importance to th
210. eeded to properly close the file Contains th nd of file byte offset This byte is similar to FCBt5 except it pertains to th nd of file rather than the next record number Contains the logical record length in ffect when th file was opened This may not be the same LRL that exists in the directory The directory LRL is generated at the file creation and will never change unless another file is cloned to it FCB 10 11 Contain the next record number NRN which is a pointer to the next I O operation When a file is opened NRN is zero indicating a pointer to the beginning Each sequential sector I O advances NRN by one FCB 12 13 ERN of the file This is a pointer to the sector that contains the end of file indicator In a null file one with no records ERN will be equal to 0 If one sector had been written ERN would be equal to 1 FCB 14 15 Contains the same information as the first extent of the directory This represents the starting cylinder of the file FCBt14 and the starting relative granule within the starting cylinder FCB 15 FCB 15 also contains the number of contiguous granules allocated in the extent This will always be used as a pointer to the beginning of the file referenced by the FCB FCB 16 FCB 19 This is a 4 byte quad that contains cumulative granule allocation information for an extent of the file Relative bytes 0 amp 1 contain the cumulative number
211. egard to the destination disk Be sure to understand the differenc between these two functions 1 A Mirror Image BACKUP will do a cylinder for cylinder copy from the source to the destination disk All cylinders including the DIRectory and the BOOT cylinder will be moved When this BACKUP is finished the destination disk will be an exact duplicate of the source disk including the PACK ID BACKUP UTILITY 2 2 A BACKUP By Class or a BACKUP Reconstruct is actually a mass copy function The data to be moved will be copied one file at a time from the source to the destination disk Files existing on the destination disk but not on the source disk will remain untouched by these BACKUPs When these BACKUPs are finished the destination disk will contain all files moved from the source disk PLUS any other files that existed on the destination disk before the BACKUP The DIRectory and BOOT files are NOT copied from the source to the destination disk and the destination disk PACK ID will remain the same If the drives in a Mirror Image BACKUP are not configured the same a BACKUP Reconstruct will be invoked If a Mirror Image BACKUP is desired use th DEVICE command to log on diskettes of the proper configuration in the drives to be used All diskettes in the LDOS system will have a PACK ID assigned to them when they are FORMATted This PACK ID consists of the disk Name and Master Password D
212. elative positions of the KEYS which are used for the functions This is NOT intended to be a complete menu it is like having a built in quick reference card The lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt may be executed at anytime The screen display will be altered to display the menu scrolled 4 lines but no data will be lost as LCOMM will still be buffering the incoming characters The buffered characters will be displayed after the menu is placed on the screen USAGE TIPS The beginning LCOMM user may find it useful to make up a tape containing each key s function and plac th tap directly above the keys Avery self adhesive removable labels may be used for this purpose Any other label will suffice such as Press a Ply The labels can even be typed to provide a neater appearance Your keys should be labeled as follows LCOMM UTILITY SJs KEY UNSHIF TED SHIFTED T saiee eet 3 ERI iye suore DUPLEX Zen okn aee EDOM TY See Reka ECHO SEEE SPR ronne ECHO LF De eaei POD seca bane ees ACCEPT LF OS genital fax tne aie EO area esa ee a REWIND Ore le Sag KER ey Sane pati tore PEOF D2 ered a ae TD dery iinoa 8 BIT Ooh Presented sie RESET segdi not used E E E ON wea tee sie ahs HANDSHAKE TPES aa o a OBE ais e usas EXIT FILE DOWNLOADING Downloading a file is easy First identify the filespec with FR then ID You will be prompted for the filespec You enter th filesp
213. en processed through a hashing algorithm in the range X 01 is reserved to indicate a spare HIT position Th fil xtension is then through X FF a hash Table HIT at a position Since the opportunity for scan the HIT codes gorithm will ad the directory record corresponding to compare the filename ext stored in the the file specification If both match the If the two fields do not match Llision and the algorithm continues its search the hash tabl the HIT entry was a e itself ar entry and use up more than one quantity of file slots available wherever possible AL Ts to the first directory record record and so forth directory sector The the directory cylinder col and so forth xtended beyond four extents will have D is called the Directory files will have at least one DEC Files that ECs for each extended directory filename slot Therefore to maximize the you should k Each HIT entry is mapped to the directory sectors by Conceptualize the HIT as eight rows of 32 byte mapped to one of the directory records in a directory second H Each column of the HIT first column is mapped not including the GAT lumn corresponds to sector number 2 The maximum quantity the of HIT governed by the disk formatting according to t per cylinder minus two In the cylinder are possible formats will per cylinde 5 1 4 single density use more co
214. end of the file STEP 2 The printer can now be LINKed to the file with the following command LINK PR DU The printer is now linked to the device DU which in turn is ROUTEd to the disk file PRINT TXT All output sent to the line printer will also be sent to the device DU in effect written to the disk file PRINT TXT Please note that the file PRINT TXT will remain open until a RESET DU is done If you wish to break the LINK between the printer and the file without closing th file then use th command RESET PR For further information please refer to the ROUTE and RESET commands LINK LIBRARY COMMAND 2 The LIST command will send a LISTing of a file to the video display or line printer The syntax is LIST filespec NUM HEX TAB P LINE aa REC bb LRL cc NUM Sets line NUMbering mode for ASCII text HEX Sets HEXadecimal output format TAB Sets TAB expansion for ASCII text P Directs output to the line printer aa LINE in text file where ASCII LIST is to begin bb RECord number where HEX LIST is to begin cc The Logical Record Length to be used to display a file when in the HEX mode abbr NUM N HEX H TAB T REC R LRL L All parameters shown after the filespec are optional and need not be used If no parameters ar specified the LIST command will LIST the file in AS
215. es It is also with non essential fil on each JCL macro recommended that experimentation be done es prior to implementing JCL fully JCL COMPILATION MACRO S VERBS The following Job Control the compile phase of JCL If your Language macros are evaluated procedures contain any of these macros a mixture lue Toke either JCL JCL ne included the character Any token lly declared to ns can of the SET and as well as is essential that you perform the compile phase for proper results LABEL This defines th beginning of a Job Control Language procedure procedure will start from the line immediately following the LABEL will extend to but not include any subsequent LABEL found in processed stream The procedure will also conclude if the end of the file is reached befor any other label is found JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE COMPILATION 4 of three Parentheses do not change left to is recommended that all and processed during aise The and the JCL It is not without an LAB necessary for a JCL EFL is considered to be a single procedure does contain labeled procedures file to contain it is necessary LABI an EL Any JCL file If the JCL file the command line to for designate an LABEL in the par
216. established with the SET Library command it must be applied before any other KI filters When first initialized the driver will reside in high memory If KI is RESET and then SET again to KI DVR the same high memory space will be used However if any parameter was not specified initially additional high memory will be assigned for that parameter if KI is RESE and then SET again with additional param ters specified The keyboard repeat and debounce features ar part of the ROM keyboard driver and will be available even if this driver is not used However using the KI DVR program will provide an increased key repeat rate Specifying the provide a 128 YPE parameter nables th Typ Ahead feature This will character buffer and will allow typing ahead even when th system is performing other functions such as disk I O If you make a mistake while typing ahead pressing the lt CLEAR gt lt gt keys will empty the type ahead buffer To temporarily disabl th type ahead function use the command SYSTEM TYPE OFF It may be re enabled with a SYSTEM TYPE ON command The screen print option will send the contents of the video screen to PR usually a line printer whenever the lt LEFT SHIFT gt lt DOWN ARROW gt lt gt keys are pressed KI DEVICE DRIVER MEMDISK DC T DISK D
217. estination diskette will be verified upon completion of all writing to the diskette If answered lt N gt there will be no second pass verification If an error occurs an appropriat rror message will be displayed and a prompt will appear requesting the course of action that is desired During any OQFB operation the lt BREAK gt key will be active and can be used to abort the process IMPORTANT QFB assumes that a mirror image backup is desired and performs no check on the destination diskette with respect to the existence of data Any existing information on a destination diskette will ALWAYS be destroyed Also QFB will NOT clear the Mod Flags of files on the source diskett QFB Utility Page 2 FED THE LDOS FILE EDITOR FED is an all purpose screen oriented fil ditor to be used with the LDOS operating system Its wide range of capabilities make it excellent for the advanced user but its simplicity makes it easy to use for the novice The editor supports both Model I and III upper and lower case and all drive types and sizes supported by LDOS Some points need to made concerning FED This is a file editor NOT a file copier text editor or word processor It is for displaying printing and modifying existing files Fed works on a file level not a track sector level FED was not designed to repair damaged disks or recover lost files but it could be used to do so by the experienced LDOS user
218. etermine the output format of the information in the LISTed fil Refer to the following section for a complete explanation and the proper use of these parameters Note that the NUM and LINE parameters are for ASCII LISTings only and will be ignored if the HEX parameter is specified PARAMETER NUM This parameter will number the lines of the file as they are sent to the video display or printer Line numbers will start with one 1 and be in the format 0001 Lines are determined by the occurrence of a carriage return Linefeed characters will not generate a new line number PARAMETER LINE This parameter may NOT be abbreviated The LINE parameter is used with ASCII files It will start the LISTing with the specified line of the file Lines ar determined by the occurrence of a carriage return character in the file An example of the proper syntax would be LIST TESTFILE TXT LINE 14 This would LIST the ASCII file TESTFILE TXT starting with the line of the file after the 13th carriage return IMPORTANT The NUM and LINE parameters will ALWAYS be ignored if the HEX parameter is specified PARAMETER HEX The HEX parameter will cause the file to be LISTed in the following format daddi bb Co CC ice ce EG Ce CC CC COCE Ce rece Cc ec Ge ce da d d d d d d d d dd d dod ad aaaa represents the current logical record of the file in HEX format starting with record 0 LIST LIBRARY COMMAND 2 bb represents the offset from the first byte of
219. etween the regular 256 byte mode and the extended 128 byte mode By pressing lt T gt the user shifts to the other mode The 128 character mode has all of the same commands as the 256 character mode Th display is a window of the 256 byte record and 128 bytes will be displayed By moving the cursors usually with the lt UP gt and lt DOWN gt arrows you will notice a scrolling effect The ASCII display will be at the top of the screen instead of the 16 leftmost columns The current record number is displayed in decimal as well as hexadecimal All inputs will be taken horizontally instead of vertically ASCII and hex search inputs will allow 30 characters instead of 6 mi N USING DRIVERS FILTERS OR PROGRAMS WITH FED rks harmoniously with other programs as long as FED is not tampered User from programs should not use any memory below X 7700 When returning some other function the display may appear to be garbaged Simply press lt BREAK gt and the FED display will be re established As far as drivers and filters are concerned FED uses keyboard video and printer DCB S so any vectors changed by another driver will be picked up by FED NOTE For FED to function properly the user must maintain standard ASCII values and restore any registers DCB s devices etc to their original values You may also use FED in conjunction with a machine lang
220. evice When a file is closed the directory is updated which is essential All files that have been written to must be closed DE gt File or Device Control Block A lt Error return code Z lt Set if no error existed FEXT Vector X 444B This routine will insert a default file extension into the FCB if the file specification entered contains no extension This must be done before the file is opened DE gt File Control Block HL gt Pointer to default extension 3 characters FSPEC Vector X 441C This routine will fetch a file or device specification from an input buffer Conversion of lower case to upper case will be made HL gt buffer containing file specification DE gt 32 byte File Control Block HL lt points to the terminating character found DE lt points to the beginning of FCB A lt the terminating character Z lt set if valid file specification found INIT Vector X 4420 INIT will open an existing file If the file is not found it will be created according to the file specification HL gt 256 byte disk I O buffer DE gt File Control Block containing the file specification B gt Logical Record Length to be used while the file is open HL lt Remains unchanged DE lt Remains unchanged A lt Error return code CF lt Set if a new file was created Z lt Set if no error detected TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS FILE C 5
221. evice type DCB 1 Driver address low order DCBt 2 Driver address high order DCB 3 Unused DCB 4 Unused DCB 5 Unused S1DCB X 42D4 X 42D9 First spare Device Control Block S2DCBS X 42DA X 42DF Second spare Device Control Block S3DCBS X 42E0 X 42E5 Third spare Device Control Block S4DCBS X 42E6 X 42EB Fourth spare Device Control Block TECH INFO RAM STORAGE ASSIGNMENTS 9 System Control Information Gl DATES Address X 421A X 4211 Contains the current date DATES O Contains the two digit year 80 DATES 1 Contains the day of the month DATES 2 Contains the month DATES 3 Contains bits 0 7 of the day of the year DATES 4 BIT O aenn Contains bit 8 of the day of the year Bits 1 3 Contain the day of the week Bits 4 6 Reserved Birt cle abe ROED Set to 1 if leap year DOSV Area X 42BA X 42BB Save area for DO DCB jump vector address EXDBGS Area X 4400 X 4401 Pointer to location in high memory of the extended DEBUGger HIGHS Address X 4411 X 4412 Contains the highest unused RAM address JDCBS Area X 4220 X 4221 Storage area for DCB Address during JCL execution JRETS Area X 4222 X 4223 Storage area for RET Address during JCL execution KISV Area X 42B8 X 42B9 Save area for KI
222. example shows the use of the FILTER command with the LDOS FILTER program PR FLT FILTER PR USING PR FLT CHARS 80 INDENT 6 FILTER PR PR C 80 I 6 These two FILTER commands will produce identical results Note that the use of the word USING is optional Also the default extension for the filespec is FLT This example will FILTER I O directed to the line printer through the FILTER routine PR FLT The PR FLT program is described in the Filter section of the manual As a result of the above FILTER routine printed output will be limited to 80 characters per line Also any single line which is greater than 80 characters in length will wrap around and be indented 6 spaces on the next line FILTER LIBRARY COMMAND 1 Another FILTER routine provided o provides the KeyStroke Multiply feature of LDOS FIL ER KI USING KSM FLT USING MYK ETI ER KI KSM MYKEYS The abov xamples would prod of how to set up a KSM FILTER would use the file MYKEYS KSM information on KSM refer to th FIL ER CL REMCR his command would FILTER the found in a program called REM n your LDOS diskette is called KSM FLT It EYS KSM uce identical results and are illustrations The KSM feature will now be enabled and to provide the KSM phrases For complete e Filter section of the manual CL device s
223. f This about on drive 2 The top is a the simple DIR command DIRectory display Several things should be noted line of all DIRectory displays will show the FREE space remaining on the disk in K 1024 byte block followed by the drive number the disk name and the date that the disk was created Also note the sign after four of the filenames in the display These may appear on any DtIRectory display indicating that the filename that precedes it has been written to MODified since it was last BACKed UP BACKUP deals with this MOD flag in very important ways see BACKUP A Free space 13 8 K Drive 2 LDOS C 12 03 80 Filespec Attributes Prot LRL Recs Ext File Space Mod Date PATCH CMD P EXEC 256 9 S 2 5 K 30 Nov 80 MAP CMD ALL 256 3 2 K SYSTEM JCL ALL 256 1 1 S L 2 K 29 Nov 80 HARD DCT ALL 256 2 1 S 1 2 K 29 Nov 80 MAIL DAT P READ 128 100 S 13 2 K 16 Jan 81 MAIL BAS ALL 1 10811 S 11 0 K 16 Jan 81 RS232L DVR P ALL 256 4 S 2 K 29 Nov 80 aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa bbbb ccc dddd ee ffffffffffff ggggggggg This DIRectory command used the A Allocation parameter When the A parameter is used th DIRectory will appear as it does above The FREE disk name and creation date will line The next line will be the heading line the columns below it These columns indicated by the lower a
224. f a disk file Each Library command will give detailed instructions and examples of the interchanging of filespecs and devspecs if applicable Certain LDOS Library commands and Utilities allow the use of partspecs partial filespecs This will allow you to use the filenam and extension fields to create groups of files with common filespecs and then access thes files as a group LDOS creates default extensions in the filespec during some operations Other operations will use these default extensions when searching for a file Following is a list of LDOS default extensions along with suggestions for others that may help you standardize your file access GENERAL INFORMATION 3 ASM The extension used by some Editor Assembler programs for source files BAS Possible extension for BASIC programs Used by some BASIC compilers CIM LDOS default for DUMP command It stands for Core IMage Gl CMD LDOS default for LOAD and RUN commands and PATCH and CMDFIL utilities Used to indicate load module format files COM Used by some systems to indicate COMpiled object code DAT Possible extension for data files DCT LDOS default for the SYSTEM DRIVER command Drive Code Table DVR LDOS default for the SET command Usually indicates a driver program FIX LDOS default for files to be used by the PATCH utility FLT LDOS default for files used with the FIL
225. f caution Other operating systems designed to run on the TRS 80 may not support all of the system entry points identified herein If you want to assure yourself that your application is compatible you may have to contact the other suppliers of operating systems for their technical data if they even provide it However you may want to mak xtensiv us of this operating system so as to create sophisticated applications by utilizing the enhancements in LDOS TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS ay Program Control Routines ABORT Vector X 4030 This JUMP entry will cause an abnormal program exit and return to LDOS Any JCL execution in progress will cease EXIT Vector X 402D This is the normal jump vector to perform a program exit and return to LDOS LDOS Control Vectors ADTSK Vector X 403D This routine will add an interrupt level task to the real time clock task table The task slot can be 0 11 however most slots are already assigned to certain functions in LDOS Slot assignments 0 7 are low priority task are high pri STORAGE secti DE gt Task A gt Task HL Regi Note The DE driver but address of t s executing every 266 667 milliseconds while slots 8 11 ority tasks executing every 33 334 milliseconds See the on for the slot assignments used by LDOS Control Block TCB slot assignment ster pair is used register is a pointer not
226. f the disk 5 or 8 will appear DEVICE LIBRARY COMMAND z dd ee ff gg hh Li jj his shows the D minifloppy driv after starting the the drive his shows the DI show either DD an access here Th This is the type of drive FLOPPY or FIXED refer to logical drive command his is the number of CYLin drive when it was last accessed ENSITY of t EN or SDEN D his shows the step rate in ELAY time hard shown This is the PHYSICAL BINARY location of the drive on its cable 1 2 4 or 8 will appear S numbers are the physical locations that 1 2 and 3 respectively see SYSTEM DRIVER ders tracks on the disk that was in the he last disk accessed in the drive and will ouble Single D ENsity his shows the number of sides on the las and will be a 1 or a 2 MS that th t disk accessed by the drive drive is set at that will be Th d lay refers to drive motor before it imposed when accessing a 5 the time the system will wait attempts to access the disk in It does NOT refer to the tim The following briefly describes what each of additional information see the section on DEVIC KI DO PR JL SI SO UD the drive will stay on after the xx devspecs refer to For ES and DRIVERS This device is the Keyboard Input which is controlled
227. f the disks contain an r the desired disk name r the desired Master Password up to 8 characters up to 8 characters standard FORMAT configuration that will be used is DRIVE DDEN CY DRIVE SDEN CY will see the name created The prompt wil don t FORMAT this disk 40 SIDES 1 STEP 30ms 77 SIDES 1 STEP 10ms te contains data the following message will be shown E nnnnnnnn DATE mm dd yy TO FORMAT IT of the disk nnnnnnnn andthe date the disk was ll accept either a Y yes go ahead and FORMAT or a Answering N will return you to the LDOS incomplete or non standard FORMAT one of the following messages may appear in place of the NAME nn message UNR NON NON At STANDARD FORMAT EFADABLE DIRECTORY INITIALIZED DIR ECTORY this point the FORMATted one ata be verified If any is flawed and could actual FORMAT time When all track number not be prope ting wil appears ly FORMAT l begin The CYLinders will be CYLinders are FORMATted they will then with an asterisk that track ted FORMAT UTILITY 9 CJ FORMAT 1 NAM iOS MPW PASSWORD Q This command line will pass the disk Name and Master Password to the FORMAT command and they will not be asked for in the FORMAT Since the Q parameter was specified in the command line
228. f this file If this is a new file this command will be identical to the normal OPEN O command OPEN EN 1 TEST DAT This statement OPENs a new file and positions it to add to the end of this new file If the file already exists an error will occur This command is identical to the OPEN ON command LBASIC 3 OPEN EO 1 TEST DAT This statement OPENs an existing file and positions it to add to the end of the existing file If the file does not exist a File not found error will occur OPEN O 1 TEST DAT This command OPENS a sequential file for output It makes no difference if the file already exists or not If the file does not exist it will be created OPEN ON 1 TEST DAT This command OPENS a sequential file for Output ONLY if the file does not exist If th fil does xist LBASIC will return a File Already Exists error OPEN 00 1 TEST DAT This statement will OPEN a sequential file for Output ONLY if the file already exists The file will be positioned at its beginning and all previous contents of this existing file will be destroyed If the file does not exist LBASIC will return a File Not Found error ABBREVIATED COMMANDS Each of the following LBASIC commands may now b represented as single characters When using a single character command the effect will be identical to using the entir
229. f you are going to write system code to deal with this directory scheme you properly deal with the FPDE FXDE entries S the section on directory records for additional information The following chart may help to visualize the correlation of the Hash Index Table to the directory records Each byte value shown represents the position in the HIT This position value is called the DEC The actual contents of each byte will be either a X 00 indicating a spare slot or the 1 byte hash code of the file occupying the corresponding directory record COLUMNS Row 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF VO 21 12 13 24 25 16 17 18 19 LA 1B Le 1D TE AF Row 2 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 3 9 SA 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F Row 3 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A SB SC SD SE SF Row 4 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 68 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F Row 5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 DA 9B 9C 9D YE OF Row 6 AO Al A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 AY AA AB AC AD AE AF BO Bl B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF Row 7 CO Cl C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF Row 8 EO El E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF FO Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F
230. file is open that its alte It is ext you avoid ration will remely important that during the changing the contents of the FCB in no way effect the integrity access of t d of data Re he FCB the IX index register is used to gister pai Contains the TYPE code of the control block Bit 7 URE If s condition if se tested to determi et to 1 wi t to 0 the ne the open ill indicat file is or closed Bits 6 3 reserved for future use Bit 2 will system on this f Bits 1 and 0 be set to 1 if any WRI r DE is used primarily for the The information contained in each field e that the file is in an open assumed closed This bit can be status of a FCB E operation was performed by the ile It is used specifically to update the MOD flag in the directory record when the file is closed reserved for f uture use Contains status flag bits used in read write operations by the system Bit 7 If set full sector opera less than 256 If If you are goin reduced by specif to a 1 it indicates that I O operations will be either tions set to a o g to utilize only sect only full ying the LRL at open ti LRL of other than 256 will set bit 7 toa Bit 6 ss If set Oca MN cart be set to ending record number indicates NRN only of EOF This is the case if random access access the EOF will not be beyond
231. for a occurrence of that string ssed th he lt L gt odule file a continuation string If the last search was for an occurrence nction with the last search one of two things will happen an lt L gt command and the address be read in from disk will be unaffected of that string or of the it will go to address If the If and If the search command and the the last record will be displayed relative byte X FF The lt L gt command allows the user module file Unlike the the will an at record position If the at that load be positioned error message to the which was in will be retrieved If a lt L gt ocate e lt G gt o command may also be used in FED OUTPUT COMMANDS to the printer D gt command wil in the l print all the current r e read in from t on depress the eted or termina rior to printin edit buffer a unaffected R in the edit b prior to issuin taken to If the printe printing FED printer has b work in conjun alize that if ch uffer these cha g the lt D gt comm ecord he disk lt BREAK gt ted g will nd the be number To halt the key After the record same format records All w retrieved from disk cursor posi locate multiple occurrences as the lt P gt rint in the file records to be printing prior the printing hich was in the and remain tio
232. for the LBASIC users All JCL capabilities available at the DOS level are equally as available at the LBASIC level excluding library commands that alter high memory A running LBASIC program can initiate a JCL procedure by using the following format in a program line CMD DO filespec parml parm2 The JCL will compile execute and return to your LBASIC program to continue JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE 3 PROCESSING During compila examined will NOTE file without execution testing and examination of your of the JCL The label will adva For The the pa The labels A token is similar to a variable in LBASIC significant characters in length characters same the not The general compile files can be melded into for each distinctly refer ntage of not wasting valuabl that matter only limit parameter Acceptable parameters will depend parameter field may token line by be acted and token written to to the second p the That is distinguish between upper or lower case tion line upon subs a file called phase can al SO the JCL If parameters ar Additionally titution is performed as required Th SYS hase the execution of the compiled SYS file speci fied in other EM JCL he DO Library Command sectio This is a useful fu implement a to this file one S large JCL passed i condi
233. fy mode the lt BREAK gt key must be pressed To modify a byte 1 Position the cursor to th desired byte to change 2 Type in the ASCII character to replace the original After making a modification the relative byte cursors will move to the next byte of the record Note no changes are made to disk only to the edit buffer To make changes to disk see the lt S gt ave command Enter the Hex Modify Mode In this mode the user can modify bytes in the currently displayed record Modifications can be made by positioning the cursor over the bytes to be changed After the H command is issued the command buffer will display an H From this point on any characters entered will be taken as modifications to the bytes in the record The arrow keys may be used to position the cursor for additional edits To exit the Hex modify mode the lt BREAK gt key must be pressed To modify a byte 1 Position the cursor over th desired relative byte in the record 2 Enter the hex digits that you wish to overwrit the current information with As digits are ntered the previous hex digits will be replaced by the digits entered from the keyboard The first hex digit entered will modify the first hex digit in the byte and the second hex digit entered will modify the second hex digit in th byte After an entire byte has been modified the cursors will move to the next byte in the record Note no changes are made to the disk only
234. g and await your next command At this point the file is open and ready but is NOT turned ON see ON lt CLR gt lt gt If a receive file is already open the system will ignore your ID request and issue the warning message FILE ALREADY OPEN This is to guard against inadvertently issuing another FR ID before you have closed the last file received The same protection is available to FS Only one FS file can be open at atime You should close your send file after transmitting it RESET lt CLR gt lt 0 gt The RESET PF key performs the function of closing either a receive fil or a send file A receive file must be closed so its directory is updated Don t forget to turn off a receive file before closing it You also must close a receive fil to be able to receive a subsequent file If a device is reset its buffer is cleared LCOMM UTILITY 4 ON lt CLR gt lt This PF keys to receive FR ON before any data will be written start transmitting after the FS ID OFF This PF key performs the opposite function conjunct screen two step you FR OFF by lt CLR gt lt 6 gt fol gt key is used with one of the six previously mentioned devic PF turn on the device For instance once you have defined a file to the system with the FR ID functions you must doa lt CLR gt lt gt ion with any printer s If you want co
235. gestions and support during the creation of the LDOS products ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS GETTING STARTED Please observe the following steps exactly 1 PLEASE FILL OUR AND RETURN THE WARRANTY CARD found in the rear of this manual Especially important is the Name and Address information which will assure you of receiving the quarterly newsletter and any update information If the WARRANTY card is not returned to LDOS Support Services within 30 days of purchase your WARRANTY may be void 2 Your LDOS master disk is WRITE PROTECTED with a small adhesive tab DO NOT REMOVE THE WRITE PROTECT TAB 3 Power up your TRS 80 system and all peripheral hardware Place the LDOS Master diskette in drive 0 and press the RESET button to boot the LDOS diskette into the system Th LDOS logo will now appear on the screen Enter in the correct date mm dd yy and the message LDOS READY will appear 4 The first thing you should do is to make a BACKUP of your LDOS Master diskette Follow the step by step procedures listed below All diskettes in the LDOS system will have a PACK ID assigned to them when they are FORMATted This PACK ID consists of the disk Name and Master Password During a Mirror Image BACKUP the PACK ID s will be compared If they are not the same you will b asked whether or not to continue the BACKUP Your LD
236. h messag Illegal Drive Number to appear The drive can be re enabled with the ENABLE parameter ENABLE This command will enable the specified drive number and place its configuration information in the Driv Code tabl If you enable a drive that has not been set up with the SYSTEM DRIVE DRIVER command totally unpredictable results may follow STEP Stirs seed This parameter will set the stepping rate for the specified drive number where n is a number 0 to 3 The following table lists the different stepping rates for 8 and 5 1 4 drives n 0 8 step rate 3 ms 5 1 4 step rate 6 ms n 1 8 step rate 6 ms 5 1 4 step rate 12 ms n 2 8 step rate 10 ms 5 1 4 step rate 20 ms n 3 8 step rate 15 ms 5 1 4 step rate 30 ms SYSTEM DRIVE d DRIVER filespec To access the disk drives LDOS will use information stored in memory in the Driv Cod Table DCT No special configuration should have to be done unless drives other than 5 1 4 floppy drives are used To configure the system for other drive types it will be necessary to use the SYSTEM DRIVER command If the command is entered without the filespec parameter you will be prompted for the DCT program as follows ENTER DCT DRIVI ER lt CR DEFAULT gt could nter th disk At this point you Note that the defa LDOS will come wi initial power up CYL filespec of your ult file extension is DCT th four 5 1 4 drives as the stan
237. h the RESE or KILL commands ROUTE LIBRARY COMMAND j ROUTE ROUT R Before a O G PR DO This video display printer is very with the LINK is ROUT command will ROUT DO but instead will be shown similar characters are not prin ry E to ted To remove ai G OUTE moun n th Disk he OUTI ry E DU TO TI This command will EST TXT ry E ROUT drive 0 in high memory of A File LINK PR DO by the 1 The line printer need not Ed to DO the ROU Ei a user device Control Block and a blocking buffer will be establ Th devic DU gt TEST TXT F R TES he file ESET he file XT wil MUST l re be table wil main open closed wit removing the diskette from the drive PR TO PRINT his command disk file P se the firs hen be APPI ot exist it locking buf RINTE py ry E W Oo e e T ROUTI Of E Hing any t REE space e r space full error will to a file via the ROUT EOF 3 constant ing to disk n G Py NERAL INFORMATI pee Se me ee a ile ain ntil s no Disk nvok ntac to be enance the ROUT ROUT PRIN NDed wil fer R DAT will remain open until the P LES update
238. h to ROUT L hang up the system if de may be railing c This writte will no properly c E the data written to it may when th st full buffer writ and the file will be readable by the system ROUTE LIBRARY COMMAND 2 will EOF mainte space available E to it A writing encountered when useful to invoke when haracter with filespecs cause the EOF End Of to the file If EOF be written to the file lose the file If a file not b recoverabl If a nance has been the file will be n ten to The RUN command will load a program into memory and then execute it The program must be in load module format The syntax is RUN x filespec parm parm filespec is any valid LDOS filespec of a file in load module format x is optional to execute the program from a non system disk for the single drive user parm optional parameters to be passed to the filespec program abbr NONE The RUN command will load in a load module format program that resides above X 5SIFF and then execut the program The default extension for the filespec is CMD If the program resides on a non system diskette the x parameter may be specified to load the program from that diskette and begin execution only after a system disk has been reinserted in drive 0 kkKK NOTE x IF THE x PARAMETER IS USED THE PROGRAM MUST LOAD ABOVE X 52FF
239. han an LDOS system disk The system will prompt you to insert the diskette with the LOAD file on it with the message INSERT SOURCE DISK lt ENTER gt After the LOAD is complete you will be prompted to place the system diskette back in drive 0 with the message INSERT SYSTEM DISK lt T INTER gt At this point the LOAD is complete LOAD LIBRARY COMMAND 21 The MEMORY command allows you to reserve a portion of memory s the current HIGHS highest byte of unused memory modify a memory address or jump toa specified memory location The syntax is MEMORY HIGH addr ADD addr WORD dddd BYTE dd GO addr MEMORY CLEAR CLEAR Will fill memory from X 5200 to HIGHS with X 00 HIGH Will set the specified address as HIGHS addr must be less than the current HIGHS ADD Displays the word at the specified address Also specifies the address for WORD and BYTE GI WORD Changes the contents of ADD and ADD 1 BYTE Changes the contents of ADD GO Transfers control to the specified address This parameter is always executed last addr Any address in HEX or DECIMAL notation dddd Any HEX word other than X 0000 dd Any byte in HEX notation other than X FF abbr HIGH H ADD A WORD W BYTE B In all MEMORY commands the GO parameter if used will be the last parameter to b xecuted regardless of it
240. have inpu uesting to OFFS a progr the pro Program loads below 4200H Enter Address to restrict This gives you the option o specified address For insta to the screen it would h You can maintain that load by entering the lowest addr ADDRESS LOAD LOG in respons offset to any portion of t greater than the screene addresses for any block load purposely affect system video 3COQOH 3FFFH to O permit programs that s to the memory mapped am gram file that loads below 4200H and you are the following message will be displayed EN offset or lt ER gt gt f restricting the offsetting operation below a nce i the program loaded a message directly ave a load block within the range 3COOH 3FFFH block in its original location to the screen ess abov the screen area as identified in the e to the above query This would provide the he program originally loading at an address nd 3FFFH and maintain the original load ing into an area below the address entered For example the ADDRESS Block loads from 3C00 Block loads from 5200 Block loads from 5283 The entire program module can in response to the Enter Addre this manner the load addre memory will be retained as 3C00 The Command File SYS7 SYS ISAM Utility has module of LDOS LOAD LOG begins with to 3C7F to 5282 to 5304 be offset starting at 5200 by entering 5200
241. he lt C gt key would insert the entire line associated with it into the program It is possible to assign the most common LBASIC keywords and commands to a KSM file so they may be instantly inserted while programming in LBASIC It is not absolutely necessary to use the BUILD command with the KSM file extension to create the KSM files Any file in ASCII format can be used by the KSM FLT program If you wish to use the BUILD command without the KSM extension a BASIC program or a word processor to create the KSM file observe the following format KSM FILTER 2 When the file is read in according to lines This return X 0OD will be as next carriage return tot left undefined a carria by the KSM FLT program signed to the letter lt A gt he letter lt B gt etc If ge return must be inserted for it is stored a key is to be that Remember that the semi colon character will be translated into an the KSM FLT program Once KI is filtered with following manner Use a RESET KI comman in memory means that all characters up to the first carriage all characters up to the skipped or character lt E NTER gt by a KSM file a different KSM may be utilized in the d to remove the current KSM remove any other ROUTE If the length of the n KSM file re establish t Now apply the new KSM fi If the new KSM file is filter SET FILTER
242. he execution of JCL processing and return to the LDOS Ready prompt displaying the message JOB DONE This type of JCL exit should be used if the conclusion of the JCL command file also represents the conclusion of the job that is running If the application is to continue then use th STOP macro For example suppose you generated the following 3 line JCL file SET CL RS232 WORD 8 STOP 1 PARITY NO DTR LCOMM CL XLATE X 3B5F EXIT When you would DO this JCL it would function until the first file prompt request was performed in LCOMM Then since EXI would be executed a return to LDOS would take effect not quite what you would want to happen The EXIT macro should only be used if your job is to terminate ABORT The ABORT macro is quite similar to the EXIT macro A return to LDOS Ready will take effect after displaying the message JOB ABORTED JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE EXECUTION ae i eee It would be used if your JCL processing logic detected an invalid run time condition and wanted to display a different informative message Also any error that the operating system detects that will result in a jump to the ABORT DOS routine will disable further JCL processing and display the above message The STOP macro is used to cease further JCL execution and return to the application originating the KEYIN request Since control is returned to the keyboard
243. he system its devices andthe disk drives in almost any manner KkKKK NOTE kkKKK Once a normal LDOS device has been pointed away from its original driver routine it may be returned to its normal power up state with the RESET Library command A user created device may be either disabled or completely removed via the RESET and KILL commands Refer to these two commands for the exact and allowable parameters Besides just sounding impressive this Device Independenc featur has many PRACTICAL aspects For example the line printer is normally controlled by a very simple driver routine However the printer output may be FILTERed with the PR FLT program supplied with LDOS LDOS SYSTEM DEVICES This FIL TER program allows the in you to dent on characters per line the page length If you don t have a printer printing will be saved en printer You could also R characters appear on Throughout this manual devspec and logical qd abling you OUTE the you will evice devices PLUS any devices refer to the Library comman certain Library commands with device specification filespecs It is not p involving the possible use do is to explain creation will be determin imagination of the user KI The Keyboard The KI device keyboard debounce rou reversal functions You is the F th ds S devspecs ossible to S ed by the keyboard
244. hich devices are ted by the system All tine that is used to special features and already implemented within ei em to handle standard devices video he RS 232 port operating t Som DOS har nst arr his L c i filt DOS L set to a The LE t comma devi comma DRIV devices ar environme teristics ance suppose your nt Other devices of a driver may b printer ac requirements of ces requir handshake the device with the system the device hardware ther the ROM For instance and parallel completely supported with the existing drivers may need a e modified by required a li iage return to advance the pa function Instead of writing er need be included to add tha provides two commands to aid nd is used to defin a new per The ROM p a completely t single func in interfacin som typ of driving program and cater to Some drivers interpreter or the operating the ROM includes drivers for printer LDOS contains drivers total s The ER For of a provide only a in the little more suppor introduction of a FILT ne feed upon receipt rinter driver does not new printer driver ion g drivers and filters The SI device or r hat device to a driver FILT existing device located in t n SET command takes the devic ER is used to he Device Con fro Ss co im Py R and searches the devic request
245. ich normally come from the GET system vector Byte 1 Low order Vector This contains the low order address of the driver routine that supports the hardware assigned to this DCB TECH INFO DEVICE CONTROL BLOCK The Con are The The blo As def or app a usi can This contains the high order address of the driver routine that supports the hardware assigned to this DCB Thes thr bytes ar reserved for variable storage of parameters associated with each driver It is up to the driver software to assign their use system maintains space in low memory for the storage of the Device trol Blocks This space is assigned as follows note address assignments shown in hexadecimal Address Range Assignment 4015 401C KI Keyboard 401D 4024 DO Video Display 4025 402C PR Printer 42C2 42C7 JL Job Log 42C8 42CD SI Standard Input 42CE 42D3 SO Standard Output 42D4 42D9 lst Spare 42DA 42DF 2nd Spare 42E0 42E5 3rd Spare 42E6 42EB 4th Spare 2 character devic names will be stored in memory starting a X 42EC re is space for 10 device names corresponding to the 10 device control cks can be observed space for up to four additional devices not currently ined in LDOS has been made available Additional devices may be defined existing devices redefined by using the SET command coupled with an ropriate user supplied DRIVER routine Any
246. ide 80 directory slots with 16 of these being reserved for System SYS files When using 1 sector gran tracks the directory space is limited to 32 files with only 8 of these spots reserved for system SYS files When using this smaller track size there are system slots available for only the following SYS files BOOT and DIR SYS0 and SYS1 SYS6 thru SYS9 You should not attempt to put any of the other system files onto the memory disk if you are using the 1 sector gran tracks They may be put into memory with the SYSTEM SYSRES feature LDOS 5 1 only Also the file BOOT SYS is never physically present in the drive Enabling MEMDISK After typing in MEMDISK in response to the driver prompt you will see the following display 1 or 2 Sectors Granule 0 disable MEMDISK DCT Disk drive in memory Page 1 The initial prompt sector grans will directory as explained following prompt abov efficient storage After selecting the gran size will ask you to select 1 or 2 sectors per granule provide the most Using 1 but will also limit the you will see the Note Each track equals x xK of space Number of free tracks 1 nn The space per track will be 1 5K for 1 sector grans and 3 0K for two sector grans The maximum number of tracks will be nineteen for a 1 sector gran disk and nine for a 2 sector gran disk MEMDISK will not allow an allocation which w
247. ied in the co The D switch allows you to choose for the PURGE without dates will NOTE The files Following ar BOOT SYS and DIR SYS are not NEVER appear during execution of any PURGI 7 PURGE 0 MPW S This command will purge all ECRET a range of MO Only those files meeting the L never be shown if the m xamples and explanations of VISible files Master Password of the disk and wait entered PURGI zal This is a very POW including SYStem files than PASSWORD you will be it will remove ALL YOU WILL NOT BE ASK TIC In other words other starts DIR SYS AUTOMAT disk 17 PURGI CI BAS 1 This command will first ask for if it is not PASSWORD VISible files asked Y N drive for No until a Y Yes PURG To abort the PURGE the Master Password does not ma will abort with an error message 1 Q N I S ERFUL and DANG from drive 1 EROUS command files from the disk except BOOT SYS and This is a very convenient don t actually need any file on t Q N end up with a blank formatted way to clean a To include INVisible and SYStem files mmand line D dates to be use as criteria range will be used Files h was specified to be PURGEd and will the PURGE command on drive 0 assuming that the he PURGE will show each
248. ignment IF name you did not supply a name I must abort QUIT END LIST name hex If you DO Q without passing the parameter NAME the not be performed This is useful because the LDOS command filespec It should be noted that if the token NAME is passed assigned a value which represents a legitimate filespec I the token NAM I the JCL line Led f LIST command will LIST requires a it must be F SE EC R EQUIR 5 was passed and not assigned a value the error message FI will appear JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE COMPILATION 9 F s TOKEN CONCATENATION One fina concaten string v examples value value O tes LIST LIST After co tes l topic to be included in the compilation phase is that of string ation Whenever a string value is being compiled any adjacent alues would be concatenated to form a longer string The following of string concatenation assume that the token a has the string MYFILE b has the string value ASM and c has the string BU ting string substitution and concatenation at b secret 2 TAB NUM P a t c 2 HEX P mpilation this example would appear as ting string substitution and concatenation LIST MYFILE ASM SECRET 2 TAB NUM P LIST NOTE Sinc fields
249. ile Here are som xamples that will show the different PATCH formats PATCH BACKUP CMD 0 USING SPECIAL FIX 1 PATCH BACKUP SPECIAL These commands would produce identical results The default file extensions are CMD for the file to be PATCHed and FIX for the file containing the PATCH information The PATCH information in SPECIAL FIX might look like this SPECIAL PATCH FOR MY BACKUP SYSTEM ONLY X 6178 23 3E 87 X 61A0 FF 00 00 This is an example of a PATCH using the X nnnn load location format Note the comment line in the PATCH on the PATCH file This line will have no effect PATCH UTILITY 3 PATCH SYS2 SYS PASSWORD USING TEST FIX PATCH SYS2 SYS PASSWORD TEST Note the abbreviated syntax of the second xample Th USING and default FIX extension are not necessary The information in the PATCH file TEST FIX might look like this This will modify the SYS2 Module DOB 49 EF CD 44 65 DOB 52 C3 00 00 EOP his is an lines in this PATCH SYS6 SYS LIB1 This command L54 X 4987 32 20 PATCH MONITOR CMD 0 This command example of the Direct PATCH mode It will PATCH the specified record and byte in the file SYS2 SYS There are 2 comment PATCH file Neither will have any effect on the PATCH will PATCH the SYS6 Library module The PATCH file IB1 FIX might contain the following information DE AF 00 C3 66 00 T This patch is i
250. ile kill c 5 disk dri driv hould EAK gt AK gt key will re select a p the system This may happen if a no diskette in the drive etc It s is currently act 2 doub course HE DISK DRI le single si you must ai NOTE We recogn non Tandy disk discourage this system regardles floppy disk con E Ps 3 THI G CASSETTE baud mode Use HITAPE CMD drive high speed tape 4 ALL routing structu such as the v anyway you cou device etc SYSTEM Once you have power some extent reset date Note comput ther the prompt system Do not use the lt SHIFT gt lt BR ive VES can be 5 8 or hard disk the lt SHIFT gt lt CLI pressed together EAR gt to clear the mediate access to ee space display ommand a ve that has timed e door was open or prevent having to keys if the system des a have nd density and up to 80 tracks o the appropriate hardware and drive ize that be systems substantial savings can for the Model III W nei LDOS will support n floppy disks Of rs for this made by ther purchasing practice and will make every attemp s of the vendor that provides your dr roller FDC must be completely Radio Sh on the Model III can be used in eith ncourage or t to support your ives However the ack compatible er the 500 or 1500 of the high speed 1500 baud m
251. inders containing information will be read and written The next prompt relates to the V1 parameter If it is answered with lt V gt all cylinders on the destination diskette will be verified immediately after all writes If answered lt N gt no immediate verify will be done The final prompt corresponds to the V2 parameter If it is answered with lt V gt all cylinders on the destination diskette will be verified upon completion of all writing to the diskette If answered lt N gt there will be no second pass verification If an error occurs an appropriat rror message will be displayed and a prompt will appear requesting the course of action that is desired During any OQFB operation the lt BREAK gt key will be active and can be used to abort the process IMPORTANT QFB assumes that a mirror image backup is desired and performs no check on the destination diskette with respect to the existence of data Any existing information on a destination diskette will ALWAYS be destroyed Also QFB will NOT clear the Mod Flags of files on the source diskett QFB Utility Page 2
252. ine feeds will be accepted This may be desirable if the distant end is another TRS 80 REWIND lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt The REWIND function works only with the FR and FS devices FILES It is used to rewind either fil back to its beginning For instance say during the transmission of a file the transmission is aborted prior to its completion In order to re send it it should be rewound to its beginning so the NRN pointer is pointing to the first record REWIND performs that function PEOF lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt amp gt This function is used to position a file to its end A common use would be to append to an existing receive file If you open a file for receiving by means of the FR ID and then do a FR PEOF the existing receive file would NOT be overwritten with the new data but rather the new data received will be concatenated to the old data 8 BIT lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt The 8 BIT switch is used to indicate that all 8 bits of each character received from the communications line are valid If it is not turned on bit 7 is stripped from each character received Do not specify this switch unless the RS 232 word length was set to 8 HANDSHAKE lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt If the handshake switch is turned on LCOMM will respond to the following four control codes received from the communications line X 11 DC1 Resume transmission Dene ee DC2 FR ON X 13
253. ing function Task slot 9 assigned to the SPOOLer function and to the LCOMM printer despooling function assigned to the TYPE ahead function and pointer EBUG operation this area is used by the SYSTEM INBUF Area X 4225 X 4264 Buffer area of 64 bytes for user command input It contains the last command input by the user JFCBS Area X 4265 X4284 Buffer area of 32 bytes for SYSTEM JCL file control block during DO processing SBUFS Area X 4300 X 43FEF A 256 byte buffer for system disk I o SFCBS Area X 42A1 X 42B4 A 20 byte file control block used for loading system overlays System Flags SFLAGS Address X 442B Bit 0 Set to a 1 if SVC table active Bre 1 Set to 1 if RUNning an EXEC only file Bit 2 Set to a 1 if LOAD called from RUN Bit 3 1 if SYSTEM FAST O if SYSTEM SLOW Bit 4 1 if lt BREAK gt disabled 0 if lt BREAK gt enabled BLED 1 if DO is in effect 0 if DO is not in effect Bit 6 If set to 1 will force extended error messages Bit 7 1 if DEBUG is to be turned on 0 if it is to remain off DFLAGS Address X 4289 Bit 0 Set to 1 if SPOOLer is active in the system Bit 1 Set to 1 if TYPE ahead is active in the system Bit 2 Set to 1 if JKL is active in the system Bit 3 Set to 1 if PR FLT is active in the system Bit 4 Set to 1 if KI DVR is active Bit
254. ing logic operator example this comment line will be written to the SYSTEM JCL file IF rel amp lst rel and lst were both passed as tokens ELSE IF rel only rel was passed as a token ELSE IF 1st only lst was passed as a token ELSE neither rel nor lst was passed as a token END END END IF rel lst Pleas three combi what DO DO DO DO either rel or lst or maybe both were passed as tokens END IF rel rel was not passed as a token END IF lst Ist was not passed as a token END EXIT e study this example fully There is much logic contained in it Al operators are used to generate various expressions Just about all nations of logic states ar xplored After you think you understand is going on try the four following example DO commands LOGIC LOGIC rel LOGIC lst LOGIC rel lst or DO LOGIC lst rel JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE COMPILATION The ELSE macro when used after an IF macro specifies an alternative course of action in case the logical result of the preceding IF test is FALSE The example provided with the IF macro should be sufficient for proper understanding of this macro The FOR NEXT loop in BASIC can be easily correlated with the IF END in JCL If you are using nested FOR NEXT loops then each FOR mu
255. ion in the directory specially for those that write catalog programs Sinc th directory nformation is so vital to the friendliness of programs much information is isplayed in the directory command as noted in other sections of this manual A tandard system vector has been included to either display an abbreviated irectory or place its data in a user defined buffer area For detailed nformation on this facility see the DODIR vector in the section on LDOS ystem vectors HQrRanakr OW kN The following provides detailed information on the contents of each directory field TECH INFO DIRECTORY RECORDS zis This byte contains the entire attributes of the designated file It is encoded as follows Bits 0 2 contain the access protection level of th file The 3 bit binary value is encoded as follows O FULL 1 KILL 2 RENAME 3 UNUSED 4 WRITE 5 READ 6 EXEC 7 NO ACCESS Bit 3 Specifies the visibility if 1 the file is INVisible to a directory display or other library function where visibility is a parameter If a 0 then the file is declared VISible Bit 4 is used to indicate whether the directory record is in use or not If set to 1 the record is in use If set to a 0 the directory record is not active although it may appear to contain directory information In contrast to other operating systems that zero out the directory record when you kill a fi
256. ion will provide for your transfer address as the control point after the driver routine restores the loaded module to its original load point Patching programs Programs can be patched in a manner similar to LDOS s PATCH command PATCH applies program corrections at the end of a load module so that the corrected bytes will overlay the incorrect bytes during the load process Once you are made aware of the patch code assemble it using the Editor Assembler You may need to employ a series of ORGs and data assembly statements DEFBs DEFWs etc The assembled object file can now be appended to the end of the original program During the load operation of the patched program the original code is first loaded but is then overlayed by your appended patch code Transferring a disk file to tape Any load module written using the format shown in the technical specifications can be transferred to tape as a SYSTEM file This feature is especially useful to assembly language programmers developing machine language programs for commercial sale By using a disk EDTASM such as the MISOSYS DISK MODified EDTASM your assembly language development can proceed using disk I O Even programs whose source is too large to load into the text buffer can be assembled in segments and later concatenated into one contiguous file The file can then be transferred to a tape cassette to create a master for duplication
257. ional parameter that will echo the characters to the screen when APPENDing a device to a file STRIP is an optional parameter that will backspace the destination file 1 byte before the APPEND begins filespecl and filespec2 are valid LDOS file specifications devspec is any valid active device capable of generating characters abbr ECHO E APPEND copies the contents of filel onto the end of file2 Filel is unaffected while file2 is extended to include the contents of filel The files must each have the same Logical Record Length or the APPEND will be aborted with the error message FILES HAVE DIFFERENT LRLS and neither file will be touched For example suppose you have two customer lists stored in data files WESTCST DAT and EASTCST DAT You can add the WESTCST DAT file onto the end of EASTCST DAT file with the command APPEND WESTCST DAT TO EASTCST DAT EASTCST DA will now be extended to include WESTCST DAT while WESTCST DAT will remain unchanged You can also APPEND a device capable of sending characters to a file For example APPEND z LIBRARY COMMAND APP APP APP END KI TO WESTCS T DAT This command will cause characters that are input on the keyboard to be APPENDed to the file WESTCST DAT Depressing the lt BREAK gt key at any time will term inate this type of APPEND Note that the keystrokes will not be shown specified on the display during this APPEND as ECHO
258. irs will be followed by the contents of the 16 bytes of memory they are pointing to The PC register will show the memory address of the next instruction to b xecuted Th display to the right of that address shows the contents of that address to that address X OF The bottom four lines of the screen show the contents of the memory locations indicated by the address at the left of each line Refer to the list of DEBUG commands for information on use of the DEBUGger Note that in ALL examples any parameter dealing with an address ora quantity must be entered as a HEXadecimal number The DEBUGger will not accept the backspace key If an incorrect command has been entered it may be cancelled with the X key Also DEBUG only looks at the last four numbers entered in response to any address question In the following examples the first line following a command will give the syntax of the command There are 3 ways the DEBUG commands can be entered The first requires the lt ENTER gt key b pressed The second requires the lt SPACE gt bar be pressed The third type is immediate and will execute whenever the command key is pressed as the first character in the command The following commands are allowed in both the regular and the EXTended DEBUGger DEBUG LIBRARY COMMAND 3 COMMAND A The command syntax is A This command will set the display to the alphanumeric mode COMMAND C The command syntax is C This command wil
259. is identical to the last one except that the End of Text marker will be written as an X FF DUMP LIBRARY COMMAND 2 The FILTER command establishes a FILTER for a specified I O path The syntax is FILTER devspec USING filespec parm parm devspec any valid LDOS device filespec the filespec of a FILTER program parm optional parameters for the filespec program abbr NONE The FILTER command is used to set an I O path through a FILTERing routine contained in the specified program Any data needed by the program may be passed via the optional parameters The function of the FILTER program is to filter data as it passes between the specified device and its driver program A FILTER program can provide many useful functions during I O processing Lines and or characters could be counted with certain actions taking place when preset limits are reached Character conversions could be performed such as simply changing each linefeed to a null or a complete conversion from ASCII to EBCDIC FILTER programs may be provided by the user The ability to write FILTER programs will require knowledge of Z 80 Assembler A complete description of FILTER routines and how they are written can be found in the technical portion of this manual where several actual FILTER programs are shown Several FILTER routines are provided on your LDOS diskette This
260. is system overlay contains the procedures necessary request to KILL a file SYS10 also contains the routines to service the to service the DODIR system vector It should remain on your working SYSTI SYS11 SYS EM diskettes This overlay contains all of the procedures necessary to perform the Job execution phase You may remove this overlay from your working disks if you do not intend to execute any JCL functions If SYS6 containing the DO command keeping this overlay would Control Language has been purged serve no purpose TECH INFO SYSTEM OVERLAYS 3 GLOSSARY The foll here Al owing terms are used throughout this manual and are fully described ll of the descriptions pertain to the user sections of this manual most also pertain to the technical section abbr ASCII The abbreviation for abbreviation It is used at the bottom of each syntax block and is followed by the allowable abbreviations for the parameters and switches involved with the command The alphanumeric representation of controls and characters as a single byte falling within a range from 1 to 127 sometimes including 0 ASCII files Files generally containing only ASCII characters BACKGROUND TASK A job that the computer is doing that is not apparent to BIT BUFFER BYTE the user or does not require interaction with the user Some xamples ar th REAL TIME CLOCK the SPOOLer and the TRACE function
261. is used to set the TIME for the real time clock TIME hh mm ss TIME hh hours 00 23 mandatory colon mm minutes 00 59 mandatory colon ss seconds 00 59 hours minutes and seconds must consist of two numbers each abbr NONE After entering CLOCK lt ENT ER gt TIME 01 220 822 K the following commands ENT ER gt The TIM start a hour o Pl h E displayed on the clock in the upper midnig press lt ENT R gt that ac Note will tually be right corner of the 01 20 22 AES That s It will one hour increment in seconds after the point the time lag between set on the real pressing the lt ENTER gt key and the t time clock will be about 2 seconds need command Wait for give you to set the not this i time cloc d to TIM seco k is keepi Entering the command TIME xecut th TIME command It is usually best to type E and then the time plus several seconds after the corr nds 2 to come up on your watch and press lt ENTER gt T he correct TIME on the real time clock The TIME comman internal time clock whether the CLOCK display function i ternal time piece is running To view the TIME that ng use the CLOCK command Gl with no parameters will display the cu
262. iscussed the functions available to this Fil Send devic ar activated by the two step process of first depressing lt CLR gt lt 5 gt followed by some other PF key appropriate to the intended function Specific details will be presented as the other PF keys are discussed lt CLR gt lt 6 gt This is the device to be used for either receiving a file being transferred to you or for making a file copy of the communications line dialogue This device will also be used to download from a bulletin board system All of the PF keys available to the FS device are also available to the FR device Thes will be discussed later This device may be turned on or off by control characters received from the communications line if the HANDSHAKE switch is on oncludes the complement of devic references available at the keyboard maining PF keys to be discussed will be used either in conjunction with the device keys or by themselves to perform a stand alone function lt CLR gt lt 9 gt use with lt CLR gt lt 5 gt FS and lt CLR gt lt 6 gt FR The ID function is used with either FS or FR to designate and open the desired file If you are going to receive a file you will perform an FR ID by depressing lt CLR gt lt 6 gt followed by a lt CLR gt lt 9 gt You will receive the prompt FILE NAME You should enter the file specification of your choice The system will then open the fil for receivin
263. isplayed DIR B S X 2 Free space 13 8 K Drive 2 LDOS C 12 03 80 BASIC OVN MASS DAT TASKS OVX This is a very complex example It will exclude all files that have aB and an S as their first and third character and also have a 3 character extension ending with X When using the wcec mask i containing wild card characte SSSFU and SSSFS and regardless of the total le as the fourth character in n Using the g must be noted that rs are treated as Ll SSSFSSSS would al DIR listing you can see that BASIC OVX and BASIC FIX were exc a from the previous example luded from the display ll partspecs or partspecs th of the filenames involved All files with FADING information Therefore l yield the same results pn Therefore BASS is their filename would qualify the same as BA as the presence of the trailing real characters will not limit the size of the name that might match Likewise for something like SSS this does NOT indicate only three character file names Actually specifying nothing but characters is like not specifying anything as all filenames will qualify DIR P FIX 2 A Free space PENCIL FIX ALL This command will show the first letter of the because the A switch was s all fil fi peci 13 8 K Drive 2 Filespec Attributes Prot LRL Recs 256 les with lename fied LDOS C 12 03 80 Ext File Space Mod
264. it shows that the disk is 2 sided The other bit tells the controller what side the current I O is to be on If the hard drive bit is set a 1 denotes double the cylinder count stored in DCT 6 bit 4 If 1 indicates an alien non standard disk controller bits O through 3 This contains the physical drive address by bit selection 1 2 4 or 8 The system only supports a translation where more than one bit set is not permitted If the alien bit is set these bits will indicate the starting head number Contains the current cylinder position of the drive Its normal purpose is to store the track register of the FDC whenever the FDC is selected for access to this drive It can then be used to reload the track register whenever the FDC is reselected If the alien bit is set this byte will contain the drive select code for the alien controller This byte contains the highest numbered cylinder on the drive Since cylinders are numbered from zero a 35 track drive would be entered as X 22 a 40 track as X 27 and an 80 track as X 4F TECH INFO DRIVE CODE TABLE If the hard drive bit is set the true cylinder count will depend on DCT 4 bit 5 If that bit is a 1 this byte will be only half of the true cylinder count Contains certain allocation information bits O through 4 Contain the highest numbered sector relative from zero A ten sector per track drive would show a X 09 If DCT 4
265. ite to any time its memory buffer is full The default extension for this file is SPL The default filename will be the two letters of the devspec which is being SPOOLed Refer to the following examples SPOOL PR TEXTFILE 0 The filespec will be TEXTFILE SPL 0 as the file extension was not specified and defaulted to SPL SPOOL LIBRARY COMMAND 2 SPOOL PR TXT 0 The filespec will not specified and defaulted to letters P and R from the devspec PR SPOOL PR 1 This command will look PR SPL If the file PR SPL 1 is 1 with a length determined by the DISK SPOOL PR be the two letters not found This command will search all as the filename was of the devspec th PR TXT 0 drive 1 for a file named it will be CREATED on drive parameter on active drives for a file named not with th PR SPL If this file is the first available drive fad found the file PR SPL will be CREATEd on determined from the DISK siz parameter The following examples will show some SPOOL parameters PR T EXTFILE SPOOL 0 MEM 5 DISK 15 This command will named TEXTFILE SPL on drive 0 buffered and sent to the line printer accept the characters Even if exist other fu continue to receive data accept the data on with little no filled the drive 0 allocate 5K of memory from
266. k file are ERIFYed with a read after write operation The normal power up condition is ERIFY OFF To cause a VERIFY of every write operation you must specify he command VERIFY ON Although having the VERIFY function turned ON will provid the greatest reliability during disk I O it will also increas tA overall processing time anytime a disk file is written to The user must determine if the increase in reliability warrants the increase in processing time VERIFY OFF will disable the read after write VERIFY function Note that all disk writes will automatically be VERIFYed during BACKUP functions Also certain critical writes to system tables will always be VERIFYed VERIFY LIBRARY COMMAND zis The BACKUP utility is destination disk provided to duplicate data from a The syntax is source disk rs d SYS INV VIS MOD QUERY OLD X abbr BACKUP s TO d parm parm BACKUP partspec w wec s TO d parm parm BACKUP partspec w wcc s TO d parm parm QUI ERY Q the SOURCE drivespec the DESTINATION drivespec lt as shown below gt MPW aa passes the source disk s Master Password indicates SYStem files indicates INVisible files indicates VISible files indicates files MODified since last BACKUP parameter in
267. key repeat and shift case to ROUTE or LINK the KI device You may inadvertently remove all input To send the KI see the Library commands APPEND provides the as the KI devic They are the KI DVR ms allow for such features as Type roke Multiply option and lt CLEAR gt key The address of the KI driver in high memory if any of these tion or if KI is ROUT ideo display n be displayed during booting and the system necessary CAUTION Using the ROM video driver disables LCOMM the Spooler held down loaded may be pe Ahead ver routine F SE Ed or LINKed r DO driver address will be EVICE Library command If it will prevent the LDOS will use the ROM video certain machine language interrupts and will and any other LDOS and should NOT normally be done The normal with the D ry for address will also DO is F involved in a ROUT SET or LINK 17 LDOS SYSTEM DEVICES S change if If you wish to send a screen display to a disk file there are some simple ways to accomplish this You can ROUTE the printer PR to a disk file and then LINK DO to PR This will send ALL screen displays including errors backspace characters etc to the printer which is ROUTEd to a file so the output will really go to the disk You could also enable the screen print functio
268. ks as necessary See the example of an X parameter copy at the end of this section How COPYs are DATEd in the DIRectory is also very important Files that are COPYed with the CLONE parameter will not have their DATE touched The same last written to date that appeared in the original will be moved to the CLONE COPYed file If the CLONE parameter is not specified the DATE that was set as the SYSTEM DATE at BOOT will be written to the DIRectory as the last written to date for the COPYed fil In all of the following examples the use of the word TO between filespecs or devspecs is optional Sped and spec2 need only be separated by a single space EXAMPLES OF COPYing filespecl TO filespec2 Note that when COPYing files if filespec2 already exists on the destination drive it will be overwritten by the COPY When COPYing files the filename extension and password of filespec2 will automatically default to those of filespecl if they are not specified See the following examples COPY TEST DAT 0 TO TEST DAT 1 COPY TEST DAT 0 TO DAT 1 COPY TEST DAT 0 TO TEST 1 COPY TEST DAT 0 1 These four commands will execute identical copies All parts of filespec2 will default to those of filespecl if not specified The us of the word TO is optional in any COPY command COPY TEST DAT TO This command will search the disk
269. l single step through the instructions pointed to by PC the Program Counter If any CALL instruction is encountered the routine called will execute in full The destination of any jump instruction encountered must be in RAM memory or the C command will be ignored COMMAND D The command syntax is Daaaa lt ENTER gt This command starts the memory display from the address aaaa COMMAND G The command syntax is Gaaaa lt ENTER gt Gaaaa bkpl1 bkp2 This command goes to a specified address and begins execution The parameters are aaaa specified address If omitted the PC contents are used bkp1 2 optional breakpoint addresses They will cause execution to stop at the specified breakpoint One or both may be specified The breakpoints must be in RAM memory All breakpoints are automatically removed whenever you return to DEBUG COMMAND H The command syntax is H This command sets the display to show hexadecimal format COMMAND I The command syntax is I DEBUG LIBRARY COMMAND 3 This command causes the DEBUGger to execute the command at PC and single step to the next instruction This command is identical to the C command except that any CALLS encountered will not automatically be executed in full they must be stepped through instruction by instruction Any jump or call instruction encountered must have its destination in RAM or the I command will be ign
270. le LDOS only resets this bit to zero Bit 5 This bit is reserved for future use Do not utilize it for any purpose if you want to maintain compatibility with future releases of LDOS Bit 6 A SYStem file is noted by setting this bit to a 1 If set to a 0 the file is declared a non system file Bit 7 This flag is used to indicate whether the directory record is the file s primary directory entry FPDE or one of its extended directory entries FXDE Since a directory entry can contain information on up to four extents see later notes on the extent fields a file that is fractured into more than four extents requires additional directory records If this bit is a 0 it implies it is an FPDE If set to a 1 it is referencing an FXDE This contains various file flags and the month field of the packed date of last modification It is encoded as follows Bit 7 This bit will be set to a 1 if the file was CREATEd see CREATE Library Command It will allocate a file that will never shrink in size It will remain as large as its largest allocation Since the CREATE command can reference a file that is currently existing but non CREATEd it can turn a non CREATEd file into a CREATEd one The sam ffect could be achieved by changing this bit toa 1 Bit 6 If this flag is set to a 1 it indicates th
271. le in drive 2 s DIRectory Note that the SYStem files will all SYStem files from drive 0 to drive 1 BACKUP 0 VIS INV This command will BACKUP every VISible and INVisible user file from drive O to drive 1 invoking a BACKUP By Class In other words this command will copy all files except the SYStem files BACKUP 0 MOD Q MPW SECRET This command will copy all files that have been MODified written to from drive 0 to drive 1 It will Query each file before it is copied also showing the file s MOD date and flag The Master Password was passed with the MPW parameter and will not be asked for BACKUP CMD 0 1 BACKUP CMD 0 1 This command will force a BACKUP By Class with the file class specified as CMD All files with the extension CMD will be copied from drive 0 to drive 1 Note that the wee has no actual effect on the BACKUP Specifying the CMD will look at ALL CMD files just as the CMD will If the file exists o created at this time n drive 1 it will be overwritten otherwise it will be No files on drive 1 will be touched except for the CMD files copied from drive 0 BACKUP SSSSSSAT 2 3 MOD This command will BACKUP all files whose filename is 8 characters long and contains AT as the last two letters Only those files that meet this criteria and have been MODified will be copied A BACKUP By Class will be invoked BACKUP SSS 1
272. led logical device abbr NON GJ This command is used to LINK together two logical devices Both devices must be currently enabled Once LINKed any output sent to devspecl will also be sent to devspec2 Any input requested from devspecl may also be supplied by devspec2 Note that the use of TO between devspecs is optional and only a space is actually required it is possible to create endless loops and lock up the system to devspec2 will not be sent to devspecl nor can input requested devspec2 be supplied by devspecl Also ROUTEing devspecl will destroy LINK to devspec2 but ROUTEing devspec2 is perfectly acceptable The user is cautioned about making multiple LINKs to the same device s as The order of the devices in the LINK command line is important since output from its Once LINKed devices can be un LINKed by the command RESET devspec A global RESET or a reBOOT will also un LINK devices S th RESET and commands for further information Following are som xamples of the use of LINK LINK DO PR BOOT This command will link the video display to the line printer All output sent to the display devspecl will also be sent to the line printer devspec2 Once linked the line printer MUST be enabled if it is physically hooked to the system i e the cabl is connected to both the printer connector a
273. limiters between them On to build graphics strings to be to be used with the KSM function string as these represent th unless you actually intend be acted upon by the character 3B Note t Therefore several logical logical line is terminated physical line terminate the logical line lines with a EXAMPL F50DF10DFAOD lt EN ER gt This would represent three logical packed of the possible used wi Carriage for these charac KSM file as hat each logical li may terminated by pressing character string containing graphics HEX bytes 81 8A 90 and Al Note that together with no spaces or other uses for this format may be th the KSM function If a file is mbed the bytes 0D or 3B in the Return and Semi colon characters ters to be present They will of line 0D and embedded lt ENTER gt ne must be terminated with a OD appear on each physical line Each in the entered string and each ENTER gt The lt ENTER gt does not do NOT end OD lt lines in a KSM type file Notice the three OD s in the string IMPORTANT The HEX parameter will module format it will remain a some of the characters may be well H When BUILDing limited to 63 characters lt BRI for clarity not normal out o files other than KSM or cause the fil
274. load the filter driver insert the vectoring between the device control block and the existing device driver and perform other maintenance functions This filter also provides an option for specifying the character to filter at the DOS command level Ideally a general purpose filter driver generator can be constructed which could introduce such benefits as code translation adding of line feed after return trapping of certain codes etc TECH INFO FILTERS amp DRIVERS 2 MISOSYS 0000 000A 000D 402D 4030 4049 4467 4476 441B 5200 5200 5201 5203 1A E602 2849 Editor Assemb 00010 00020 00030 00040 00050 00060 00070 00080 00090 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 00 10 20 30 40 L50 L60 70 80 L90 00200 00210 00220 00230 00240 00250 00260 00270 00280 00290 00300 00310 00320 00330 00340 00350 00360 00370 00380 00390 00330 00340 00350 00360 00370 00380 00390 00400 00410 00420 00500 00510 00520 okKKKKK T ler 3 4 12 05 80 00 18 50 SAMPL TRAP ASM E FILTER Page 00001 11 01 80 TITLE lt SAMP LE FILTER gt Sample FILTER routine to demonstrate the use of the FILTER command in LDOS This routine traps certa Any output device can ut This routine also demons parameter scanner in the A single byte to trap ca command line as a parame it will def
275. lumns of up to a maximum of 32 configuration two reserved for the GAT and HIT S only the first eight positions of each HIT row are used depending on the quantity of sectors the HIT in the formatting scheme the second col eep your files below five extents the DI EC s position in the fields Each row will be sector The first HIT row IT row to the second directory field the 0 31 is mapped to a to the first directory sector in and HIT Therefore the first lumn to sector number 3 actually used will be a N number of sectors columns he formul there exist ten sectors per ince only eight directory sectors Other TECH INFO DIRECTORY RECORDS H I T 9 This arrangement works nicely when dealt with in assembly language for interfacing Consider the DEC value of X 84 If this value is loaded into the accumulator a simple AND 1FH ADD A 2 will extract the sector number of the directory cylinder containing the file s directory If that same value of X 84 was operated on by AND OEOH the resultant value will be the low order starting byte of the directory record assuming the directory sector was read into a buffer starting at a page boundary This procedure makes for easy access to the directory record Note that the first DEC found with a matching hash code may in fact be the file s extended directory entry FXDE It is therefore important that i
276. ly language skills TECH INFO DISK I O TABLE x kkk IMPORTANT The system entry points identified in this section are provided for use by skilled assembly language programmers There is absolutely no attempt to provide an in depth tutorial on how to write assembly language programs and routines using these entry points Although more technical information is being provided in this reference manual than has been supplied with other operating systems it does not replac other referenc books covering the subject matter The information provided in this section will probably not be useful to the novice programmer You will cause considerable trouble for yourself if you try to use it without FULLY understanding it The experienced application programmer will find this an invaluabl referenc section Since this information deals with specific functions of LDOS every effort to verify the accuracy of the data has been undertaken However it is strongly suggested that you fully test your coding to be sure that the correct results are being produced prior to working with sensitive data This may very well be the first time that all of these system entry points hav been identified by an official source You will also note the documentation of a number of routines located in the ROM of the TRS 80 Most of these have never been referenced by Radio Shack We hope you find them informative A word o
277. ly pointing and or attached to It on the diskettes currently in the available disk drives by to show the number of sides the density and abb DEVICE No parameters ar r NONE required or allowed A typical devic 0 e display mi ght look like this Hr Floppy 1WP 5 Floppy 22 13 KI DO PR ASE SO UD 8 Floppy Rigid X FC11 X 4DC2 X 41E5 Nil Nil 1 Cyls 40 2 Cyls 35 1 Cyls 77 0 Cyls 153 lt gt TEXTFIL Options Type System modules E TXT 1 The information found at the top of the D Dden Sides 1 Step 12 ms Dl Sden Sides 1 Step 6 ms Dl RR Dden Sides 2 Step 6 ms JKL KI DVR MiniDOS resident 1 on the type and configuration of 2 EVICE 3 8 10 of information pertaining to o nan each drive in the system is display There are several fields in each line which explain what the system sees for disk storage Here is a typical line ne drive andthe explanation of the fields it Protected contains 1WP 5 FLOPPY 1 CYLS 40 DDEN SIDES 1 STEP 6 MS DLY 1 S aabb c dddddd ee ffffffff gggg hhhhhhh iiiiiiiiii 495999555 aa This is the LOGICAL drive number the line deals with bb This is the diskette write protect status with WP Writ See the SYSTEM DRIVE WP command ce This is the size o
278. m device flag X 428A LOGOT Display and log a message X 428D LOGER Issue a log message X 4290 CKDRV Check for drive availability X 4293 QF NAME Fetch file name ext from the directory X 4296 CMD Accept a new command X 4299 CMNDI Entry to command interpreter X 42Al SFCBS FCB for loading system overlays X 42B8 X 42B9 KISVS Save KI DCB vector X 42BA X 42BB DOSV Save DO DCB vector X 42BC X 42BD PRSVS Save PR DCB vector X 42BE X 42BF KIJCLS Save KIJCL DCB vector X 42C2 X 42C7 JLDCBS Joblog DCB X 42C8 X 42CD SIDCBS Standard Input DCB X 42CE X 42D3 SODCBS Standard Output DCB X 42D4 X 42D9 S1DCBS Spare DCB X 42DA X 42DF S2DCBS Spare DCB X 42E0 X 42E5 S3DCB Spare DCB X 42E6 X 42EB S4DCBS Spare DCB X 42EC X 42FF Storage for 2 character device names X 4300 X 43FF SBUFFS A 256 byte buffer for system disk I O xX 4400 EXTDBGS Vector to extended DEBUG X 4402 MSG Message line handler X 4405 DBGHK Used with DEBUG do not use X 4409 ERROR Entry to post an error message X 440D DEBUG Enter the debugging package X 4411 X 4412 HIGHS Contains the highest unused RAM address X 4414 OVRLYS Current system overlay resident X 4419 DODIR Do a directory display buffer X 441C QF SPEC Fetch a file or device specification X 441F OSVERS Contains the operating system version number X 4420 INIT Open or initialize a file or device X 4423 PDRIVS Currently accessed drive physical address 1 2 4 or 8
279. main in high memory even if f RE See the KI DVR section for exact details ESE F and then S below the again a driver overwritten driver of devices will program even A global R k 1 d is LE loaded th T ET E other SETting of devices will produce the followi again current HIGH As a result the SETting cause the avail ab wil vic sam T ES iT if allowabl the drive ng results r routine will load in RES ETing a e memory to l not be is RESET a e will remove free up the memory by The filespec parameter ES ETting HIG IS lt t extension for this file is DVR For complete information on system refer to the section on D the Dev HS IG he filespec of the Driver driver EV ICE G DRIV ERS SET LIBRARY COMMAND 2 removed nd then this driver program SET to program The nd then SETting continue shrinking Once from memory or the same and default programs supplied with the LDOS would properl line printer y initialize the RS 232 port allowing the F CL TO RS232T DVR BAUD 300 WORD 7 F CL RS232T BAUD 300 WORD 7 These two commands produce identical
280. meter Q Query If the Q parameter is not specified it will automatically default to Q Y Query each file before it is PURGEd The ABBREVIATIONS line will list all acceptable parameter abbreviations for the function Note that ON YES and Y and OFF NO and N are completely interchangeable in most commands in the LDOS system UPPER LOWER CASE IN LDOS The LDOS command interpreter has been endowed with an UPPER LOWER case conversion feature It is totally acceptable to enter any filespec command or parameter in either upper OR lower case If a specific command requires UPPER case only it will be detailed in the description of that command This m S i anual shows all command lines and error messages in upper case This is trictly an arbitrary convention The actual LDOS messages will be displayed n UPPER and lower case USING THIS MANUAL 3 GENERAL INFORMATION Your LDOS Disk Operating System is a user oriented devic independent totally supported package LDOS provides compatibility between th TRS 80 Models I and III so your data files and BASIC program files will be truly transportable It also contains many features that have never befor been found in a micro computer operating system It will be very easy for any owner of TRSDOS to step right up to the LDOS system as most of the command structure and syntax is similar However to get th
281. mmunications remember that like the ON to it Before a send file will the FS ON must be done of the ON key It is used in of the device keys to turn off the keyboard video line file send or file receive Just function the OFF function is performed in to stop the receive file from further receiving llowed by a lt CLR gt lt gt The program function keys also have second functions programmed for them These additional functions are accessible by depressing the lt CLR gt lt SH gt keys along with the specified PF key The following explains the capabilities of these second functions DUPLEX lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt This PF key is the full duplex half duplex switch In the LCOMM ON OFF arrangement DUPLEX ON designates half duplex operation In this mode your video display screen will display your key entries or file transmission as it is taking place The DUPLEX OFF mode is a full duplex operation Your video display will display what you send only if the distant end echoes back to you what it receives from you Although it may be convenient to operate half duplex DUPLEX ON when communicating with another TRS 80 it may be more useful for one of the TRS 80s to play HOST and operate in half duplex with echo to the distant end while the distant end is full duplex DUPLEX OFF This will become mor vident under the discussion of file transmi
282. mory its own Or DCB Each device has its Device To view Independent Control Block own driver system and Each device is totally routine whether created by specifying an asterisk followed by two diskette is configured with thes devices the devices as listed your video screen Your original LDOS Master in the device control table Library command You will s This is the Keyboard Input your keyboard This is the Display Output This is the PRinter output This is the Job Log This is the Standard Input This is the Standard Output your parallel printer presently unused by LDOS presently unused by LDOS us th an output log of commands with a time stamp Note that these are just the LDOS system supplied devices it is possible for the user to create HIS OWN DEVICES There is another LDOS device that is referenced in this manual even though not shown in a normal device table This device is the Comm Line CL and will also be explained in this section The LDOS Devic Independence makes it possible to ROUTE devices from one to another or even to a disk file It allows SETting the device to a totally different driver routine It makes possible single or multiple LINKs of devices to other devices or to disk files In other words you may re direct the I O between t
283. n JCL file named GEN JCL It assumes that you have 40 cylinder drives and can FORMAT in double density The first two labeled functions will set the disk Name to LDOS 5 1 The last two labeled functions allow you to pass the disk Name from the DO command line using the token NA These examples can easily be adapted to your specific disk drive requirements The disk Master Password density step rate and number of cylinders can be set as described in the FORMAT Utility section generalized DO file GEN JCL ALL DRIVE 0 FUNCTIONS MUST B abort FORID compiling an LDOS system disk format drive 1 FORMAT 1 DDEN STEP 0 NAME LDOS 5 1 MPW PASSWORD ABS EXI FOR2D compiling an LDOS system disk format drive 2 FORMAT 2 DDEN STEP 0 NAME LDOS 5 1 MPW PASSWORD ABS BXI FORIDN IEF NA FORMAT on drive 1 your disk Name is gt NA Master disk Password is gt PASSWORD FORMAT 1 DDEN STEP 0 MPW PASSWORD ABS NAM EXI END MISSING DISK NAME ENTER AS NA ABORT QFOR2DN IEF NA FORMAT on drive 2 your disk name is gt NA Master disk Password is gt PASSWORD ENTERED DIRECTLY T GI NA E FORMAT 2 DDEN STEP 0 MPW PASSWORD ABS NAME
284. n a JCL file may exceed 63 s to the then 1l be then xecuted directly from the SYSTEM JCL file There must be at least one available enabled and not write protected drive in the system to compile and execute a JCL file However an execute only option is available w DO control character and will be explained later Please note that the occurrence of any error will terminate the DO execu The lt BREAK gt key if not disabled will allow you to manually abort the DO The three control characters will change the compile and exec ith a tion ution phases of the DO command When using these characters a space character is mandatory between the word DO and the character If the space is omitted character will be ignored Note that if no character is specified bot compile and execution will be done DO LIBRARY COMMAND the h the Ct The LABEL parameter will allow you to create JCL files with multiple entry points Each entry point can indicate a different location at which processing will begin NOTE If the LABEL function is used the compile phase must be done or the DO will abort with an error message If the LABEL parameter is specified the JCL file will be scanned WITHOUT execution up to the specified ABEL Once the LABEL is reached execution will begin and continue until the next LABEL or until the end of the JCL proce
285. n address will be used If dddd is not specified the last word given in a previous W command will be used The memory display will automatically be set to show the address wher dddd was located EXTENDED COMMAND DISK READ WRITE UTILITY The command syntax is a b c d eeee f a is the desired disk drive number b is the desired cylinder c is the first sector to read or write d is the operation R for Read W for Write for a Directory Write e is the starting address in memory where the information read from the disk will be placed or where information written to the disk will be taken from f is the number of sectors to read or write If the cylinder is not specified the DIRectory track will be used If the number of sectors is not specified a single sector will be read If the starting sector is not specified a full cylinder will be read If an error is encountered during a disk function the error number will appear on the screen surrounded by asterisks The error indication will repeat each time another error occurs To abort the disk function hold down the lt ENTER gt key DEBUG LIBRARY COMMAND 8 DEVICE and Drive LOG ON This devices and files to which they command will display will also log updating the D the location of the DIRectory track The syntax is all logical devices which are in riv Code Tabl use and the are current
286. n and ROUTE the printer to a disk file By pressing the lt LEFT SHIFT gt lt DOWN ARROW gt and the lt gt keys the current screen display will be sent to the printer and actually be written to a disk file The DO may also be LINKed to a disk file using a phantom user device s the LINK Library command PR The Line Printer The PR device is the line printer This device may be SET to other drivers or ROUTEd to disk files very easily in the LDOS system A printer FILTER program is supplied on your LDOS Master diskette and is called PR FLT This program will allow you to set page size line length line indent on wrap around and many other parameters The operation of this driver routine is detailed in the FILTER section of the manual You may also use the SPOOL Library command to create disk and or memory buffers to store information being sent to PR and SPOOL it out as PR becomes available i e not in a BUSY state such as printing a line kk NOTE If PR is ROUTEd to a disk file or the display it is not necessary to have a line printer physically hooked to the system All I O to the printer will be sent to the appropriate device or file and no lock up will occur JL The Job Log The JL device is the system s Job Log This unique feature will keep a log of all commands entered or received along with the time they occurred The time is determined by the set
287. n excess of 35 Its use is to minimize the time required to compute the maximum cylinder formatted on the diskette It was designed to be excess 35 so as to provide complete compatibility with alien systems not maintaining that byte If you have a diskette that was formatted on an alien system for other than 35 cylinders this byte can be automatically configured by using the REPAIR utility See its reference in another section of this manual GAT X CD This byte contains data specific to the formatting of the diskette Bit 6 set to 1 implies double density formatting Bit 5 set to 1 indicates two sided media Bits 7 4 and 3 are reserved for future assignment Bits 2 0 contain the number of granules per cylinder 1 TECH INFO DIRECTORY RECORDS G A T aTe GAT X CE and GAT X CF Contains the 16 bit hash code of the disk master password Its storage is in standard low order high order format GAT X DO through GAT X D7 Contains the diskette pack name This is the name displayed at boot up if the diskette is a system diskette used for the boot operation It is also the name displayed during a FREE or DIR The name is assigned during the formatting operation or an ATTRIB disk renaming operation GAT X D8 amp through GAT X DF Contains the date that the diskette was formatted or the date that it was used as the destination in a backup operation If the diskette is used during a BOOT this date will be displaye
288. n the file not being read to completion you will be returned to query 2 and no fragment of the file will be added to the memory buffer A disk file that is reread will properly append any file previously read in TTS In order to read in a cassette file you will be prompted to ready the tape with READY CASSETTE AND DEPRESS lt H L gt Depress the lt H gt 1500 baud or lt L gt 500 baud key after you have prepared the tape for input There is no need to enter a fil name The next program found on the tape will be read If a CHECKSUM ERROR is detected during the tape read operation you will be prompted with the message TAPE CHECKSUM ERROR DETECTED REREAD TAPE Any previously read in file will not b destroyed The partial tape load will be ignored and subsequent reads will properly append any previously read in file If during an input the file being loaded will exhaust your machine s memory this message will appear OUT OF MEMORY Again no file or files previously read into the memory buffer will be disturbed You can proceed to save the buffer contents prior to the file that exhausted your machine s memory If you attempt to read in a file that is not a COMMAND or SYSTEM file you will most likely receive the messag REQUESTED FILE IS NOT A COMMAND OR SYSTEM FILE The
289. n the Library overlay mode X E100 C3 66 00 CD 03 40 would PATCH the file MONITOR CMD replacing the 6 bytes starting at X E100 with the PATCH code specified in the command line PATCH MONITOR CMD 0 This command D01 13 4C D02 3E 66 would PATCH the file MONITOR CMD in two places It uses the Direct mode to apply the PATCHes to the file s disk sector 1 relative byte 13 and disk sector 2 relativ byte 3E Note the colon separating the two PATCH lines The PATCH utility MAKE IT IMPOSSIBLE is included so the user may modify data files and programs THE PATCH UTILITY WILL ALSO BE US UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD PATCHES BE APPLIED TO LDOS WITHOUT THE AUTHORIZATION OF LDOS SUPPORT SERVICES TO DO SO MAY VOID YOUR WARRANTY AND z iD TO MAINTAIN THE LDOS OPERATING SYSTEM FOR OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE PERSONNEL TO ASSIST YOU WITH ANY PROBLEMS YOU MAY ENCOUNTER In other words don t PATCH it unless YOU are willing to support it after it is PATCHed PATCH UTILITY 4 REPAIR REPAIR CMD G GEA This REPAIR d ALIEN d is any currently enabled drive abbr NON Gl REPAIR is a program that will perform the following functions Update the DAM Data Address Mark for the directory track to an X F8 Read enable DIR SYS Check and co
290. n will anges hav and r should become disabled will continue n enabled Pl the ase not ction with the printing note that all records will be printed in 20 of 2 lines betw n records printed on 66 1l ine page paper This n made to the record nges should be saved to Several preca prevent computer lock up during the prin for lines will allow 3 FED FILE EDITOR Page 8 the disk utions have been ting of records some reason during printing process that the L operatio after the DOS spooler will ns of FED Also with a spacing records to be lt 0 gt Output a top of form character X 0C to the printer lt P gt Send edit buffer contents to a printer in ASCII and Hex The lt P gt command will print the contents of the edit buffer After the lt P gt command has been issued the record display on the screen will be sent to the printer To terminate printing at any time depress the lt BREAK gt key The following is a sample of the output produced by the lt P gt command SPACE CMD DRIVE 1 RECORD 22 X 0016 0123456789ABCDEF BYTE 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OF OF lt 2 lt lt 2 D lt 00 gt 3C 09 32 3C 7F 3A 04 TF 3C 32 04 7F C3 F6 44 A5
291. nd This may be any valid LBASIC command which will execute immediately upon entering LBASIC such as RUN MYPROG BAS AUTO100 etc abbr BLK B FILES F MEM M ON Y OFF N HIGH H LOW L LBASIC OVERLAYS Three overlays are present on a Master LDOS diskette Their functions are as follows LBASIC OV1 This overlay contains the renumbering program associated with the LBASIC CMD N function It may be killed if no renumbering will be done LBASIC OV2 This overlay contains the cross reference program associated with the LBASIC CMD X function It may be killed if no cross referencing will be done LBASIC a LBASIC OV3 This overlay contains the error handling routine used with LBASIC along with the sort routine used for the CMD O function It MUST be present when using LBASIC PROGRAM PROTECTION LBASIC programs may be protected with an Execute only password This means that the program may be RUN but not LOADed LISTed LLISTed or otherwise examined Any attempt to break the program execution and examine the program will cause the program to be erased from memory and the message Protection has cleared memory will be displayed The DEBUGger will also be disabled during program execution NEW FILE CONTROLS LBASIC provides a Blocked file mode which has often been misnamed Variable Length Files This mode allows files with Logical Record Lengths LRL of less than 256 bytes to be crea
292. nd the printer If the printer becomes de selected or faults out of paper etc the system will hang up Remember that both LINKed devices must be enabled Note that any output sent individually to the printer such as an LPRINT from Basic will NOT be shown on the video display LINK PR DO This command will LINK the line printer to the video display All output sent to the printer will also be sent to the video display The printer must be on line and enabled if any printing is to be done LINK will not send any characters from the video to the line printer LINK LIBRARY COMMAND 214 line This Although files may not be directly LINKed to a device it is still possible to accomplish the same results through the use of phantom devices This example will show how to accomplish a devspec TO filespec LINK Suppose you wish to LINK your line printer to a disk file named PRINT TXT on your drive 0 diskette Follow the steps below STEP 1 A phantom device must be created For this example we will create a device named DU To do this use the ROUTE command in the following manner ROUTE DU TO PRINT TXT 0 This will create a device named DU and ROUTE it to a disk file named PRINT TXT on drive 0 If the file does not exist it will be created and dynamically expanded as needed If the file already exists any data sent to the file will be APPENDed onto the
293. ne printer Since the ECHO parameter E was specified each character will also be echoed to the screen Prior to executing this command CL must have been SET to an appropriate DRIVER EXAMPLES OF COPYing filespec devspec TO devspec filespec As with COPYing devspec to devspec the following xamples are intended more for showing the vast abilities of the system rather than being considered as the only method of accomplishing a result COPY KI TO KEYIN NOW 0 This would allow the sending of all keyboard entries to the disk where they would be stored in a file named KEYIN NOW There is a catch here because the characters that are typed are going directly to the file they will NOT appear on the screen To view the characters specify the ECHO parameter To terminate this COPY you should depress the lt BREAK gt key The file will then be closed and LDOS Ready will appear COPY ASCII TXT 0 TO PR This command will COPY the contents of the file ASCII TXT to the line printer Although this command is functional it would give the same output as would LIST with the P parameter The COPY in this example will terminate automatically when the end of the file is reached EXAMPLES OF COPYing with the X parameter The command COPY filespec d X is similar to a regular COPY except that the X parameter will allow transferring a file from one diskette to another without requiring
294. nes may be include with the LDOS BUILD command Lacing CHed the same as that for a PAT separated by colons A word processing program P the PATCH The syntax CH file CH files AJ may be used to create PATCH files but the file must be saved as pure th SCRIPSIT use the S A type of save to work properly a definite structure and syntax must be observed ting the file Here is the syntax that is required and some examples file structure of PATCH THE FILESPEC It filename to be PATCH wou program Although FLL fi use LBASIC1 FIX 0 uti is desirable to use some logical method of naming ED could be fol advanced as different patches become For example BASIC1 FIX BASIC2 FIX not required IE 1s th xtension FIX ld be This will make it S us les as that is the default file extension that the PAT PAT llowed by a letter or availabl SYS7A FIX and strongly suggested that all PAIT easier to CH a nu le fo TCH ut it le and the user will not have to enter both define the PATCH fil For exampl lity PATCH UTILITY le LBAS LBASIC1 FIX to files The mber that r the same SYS7B FIX TCH type use these ality will Ic1 0 and the PATCH PATCH LINE SYNTAX Period This indicates that the line is a remark and will be disregarded by PATCH string If a PATCH is to contain strictly ASCII char
295. nest The above will result in a nest level of two these three JCL files are saved as NESTO JCL N compiled and executed and the NESTO JCL is following dialogue NESTO JCL NEST1 JCL NEST2 JCL nested procedur xampl this is the first nest this is the second nest this is the end of the first nest this is the end of the primary JCL JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE COMPILATION 6 individual The not except if the is NOT compilation job JCL procedures logical and files The UUDEd JCL files to INC similar to a nested FOR N n That is only ten INCLU EXT loop in two pending INCL cr FI This The Es can be active at EF ST2 JCL j the Realize that an INCLUDE macro cannot end a JCL file If it does for instance if you leave off the last line of the NEST1 JCL in the above example you will see the error message RECORD NUMBER OUT OF RANGE IF lt expression gt This macro initiates a compilation phase conditional block The expression can contain tokens and or logic operators The resultant logic state will determin the inclusion of the JCL between the IF and matching END macro The limit of tokens and operators that can be included in the expression is the amount that can fit on one line Consider the following JCL file named LOGIC JCL LOGIC JCL compil
296. ng Primary Library Commands are contained in the ted if none of the commands will be used during operation Library contained in the manual giv Those commands THE LDOS LIBRARY commands LIBRARY which direct the called LIBRARY COMMANDS gro of mod Table of Contents UPS tte ule commands are contained s detailed descriptions of be found directly abov preceded by these Library a different module of the operating system module containing the particular Library Commands xtra space on your diske complex code of the operating system and the simple one line command entered by the user and also in the the PRIMARY and the sections In this manner you if they are SYS6 SYS It may be in the module Extended Library are not needed all Library the page number an asterisk are This command lets you APPEND add one file onto the end of another Its primary use is with data files or ASCII type text files Files that are in load module format such as CMD or CIM type files cannot be APPENDed using APPEND To APPEND these types of files refer to the CMDFILE utility in the UTILITY section The syntax is APPEND filespecl TO filespec2 STRIP l APPEND devspec TO filespec ECHO STRIP l ECHO is an opt
297. nguage programmers now have a Supervisory Call table available which should guarantee future compatibility between LDOS like operating systems To use files created on other operating systems it is necessary to move them onto diskettes that have been FORMATted by LDOS The LDOS utilities BACKUP REPAIR and CONV along with the COPY COPY X LOAD X and DUMP library commands will usually provide the means to transfer your program and data files onto LDOS formatted diskettes Refer to the individual utility sections for compatible TRSDOS version numbers GENERAL INFORMATION 5 Under NO dis circumstanc kettes in your ac es sh tual x x xk x IMPORTANT ould you use day to day operation files on kkkk ot LDOS her than LDOS FORMA Support Services ca support data manipulations on non LDOS FORMATted diskettes Disks created under compatible with LDOS p e B NOT LDOS location uses a LDOS will into high memory as protect memory when should not be used un non T never going Less n RSDOS operating pointer named HIGH to show destroy information into LBASIC othing of Programs The commands DEBUG E E D such as HITAPE HIGH value use th routines into high me 16K 32k or 48K do use high memory e MEM mory machin systems are the or u long as you set HIGHS with the M th importance is to be kept i
298. nt even if actual static discharges are not felt by the computer operator Be aware that static discharges can cause system glitches as well as physically damage computer hardware and disk media If the system boots but things continually go wrong from then on hold down the lt CLEAR gt key during the boot and then re configure the system IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY 2 CUSTOMER SERVICE The LDOS development and support team is committed to the needs of our customers Note that support is available ONLY TO REGISTERED LDOS USERS which means you must 1 Complete and send in your registration form This gives you 1 full year of support 2 Each additional year of support is available for the then current annual support fee As a current registered LDOS user the following services are available TOLL FREE 800 NUMBER for customer and dealer support This number is only to be used for LDOS support and questions but before you call PLEASE FOLLOW THE STEPS IN THE NEXT SECTION wher the phone number is available SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE allows you to send at any time your ORIGINAL LDOS Master Diskette to LDOS Support with five dollars and receive a copy of the latest version of LDOS 5 1 The address is LDOS Support Services c o Galactic Software Ltd 11520 N Port Washington Rd Mequon Wis 53092 If
299. o re enter the filespec Note that FED will never close files as files need not be closed with this type of editor lt BREAK gt Clear command buffer Pressing lt BREAK gt will cancel any partial command and will cause the termination of any command being executed It is also the only way to exit the ASCII and Hex modify modes Anytime there is any doubt as to the operation being performed by FED you may press lt BREAK gt and the command buffer will be cleared FED FILE EDITOR Page 9 lt SHIFT gt lt gt lt M gt lt T gt FED wo with to FED Display binary representation of byte pointed to by the cursors This command may only be used when in the 128 character mode and will be ignored if issued in the 256 character mode After depressing lt SHIFT gt lt gt 8 binary digits will be displayed next to the command buffer For example if the cursors were positioned over relativ byt X 27 and this byte of the edit buffer contained a X F3 the binary digits 1111 0011 would be displayed Calculates the address in memory where the byte pointed to by the cursors will load This command works with load module format files only If the byte is contained in a load block the load address will be displayed below the record number If the byte is not in a load block e g a comment line file header etc the error message Byte not in load block will be displayed Toggle b
300. o reset HIGHS individual returned to removed from no devspec will do a gl their normal power up s device L be cancelled the BACKGROUN into system will also attempt to set functions Type Ahead that the se you must turn device before doing the RESET ETting wil Table Any software will D TASK S be write protection will t to some drive other than physical driv physical driv use RESET OFF the obal RESET All contro returned to Al a tate ll open 0 befo r All table standard be cancelled EXIST particular RESET LIBRARY COMMAND 2 performing a functions system Any files logical user FIL will four drive 0 B logical TERing be 5 If your tO the sur global HIGHS to the top of the available memory the task processor are active cannot restore HIGHS the following message will appear such as top of or RESET the vic Th command re ROUTEs input output syntax is for a specified logical device or abbr NON Gl ROUTE devspecl TO filespecl devspec2 ROUTE devspec NIL NIL is a bit bucket ROUTE will re route all I O for a specified logical de
301. od r program Both the LBASIC requ and CMDFILE ires the use of the utilities allow F operation HARDWAR EVICES are totally re found in most operating ideo display and printer can ld desir to ach other ry D independ systems Y be routed to a disk You can even create your own logical devices ed up your system that if the lt BREAK gt key is held down d er will immediately enter ROM BASIC A are several keys that will modify you can control if held do sequenc lt CLEAR gt disk from stored wi bei h th his key will prevent any wn They are configuration fil ng loaded The configuration would hav e ent of the our system or linked file toa normal devices almost nother he boot sequence to uring power up or fter answering the he remaining boot the and stored on been created e SYSTEM SYSGEN Library command GENERAL INFORMATION 9 lt RIGHT ARROW gt This key will prevent the LDOS video driver from being loaded The system will use the ROM video driver instead This may be necessary for certain machine language programs CAUTION Using the ROM video driver will cause problems with Type Ahead LCOMM the Spooler and any other LDOS function that uses interrupt processing and should NOT normally be done lt D gt This key will cause the DEBUGger non extended to be loaded
302. of dates to be used as criteria for file display Files without dates will not be displayed if the D switch is set The S and the I switches are add to switches If S or I are not specified only VISible non SYyStem files will be processed If you use the I switch all VISible files as well as all INVisible files will be processed If the S switch is used all SYStem files in the DIRectory will be processed along with all other VISible files If S and I are both specified all files will be processed The S I A N D and P switches may be used together in any combination The P switch will automatically set the N switch option It should be noted tha the absence of a drive spec will cause a global Dp DIRectory to occur Every active drive s DIRectory will be displayed starting with drive 0 A global DIRectory may be interrupted by pressing the lt BREAK gt key Following are examples of the DIR command and its parameters After each example of a DIR command a typical display is shown along with an explanation DIR 22 Free space 13 8 K Drive 2 LDOS 5 1 04 21 81 PATCH CMD P LCOMM CMD LOG CMD SYSTEM JCL HARD DCT BASIC OVN SCRIPSIT FIX PENCIL FIX BASIC FIX MAIL DAT MAIL BAS MANUAL PCL PRINTER ASM RS232L DVR PR FLT RS232 DVR KSM FLT BASIC OVX DIR LIBRARY COMMAND DIR 2 aa bb cc dd ee f
303. of granules allocated to the file up to but not including the extent referenced by this field Relative byte 2 contains the starting cylinder of this extent Relative byte 3 contains the starting relative granule for the extent and the number of contiguous granules TECH INFO FILE CONTROL BLOCK 3 FCB 20 FCB 23 Contain information similar to the above but for another extent of the file FCB 24 FCB 27 Contain information similar to the above but for a third extent of the file FCB 28 FCB 31 Contain information similar to the above but for a fourth extent of the file The file control block contains information only on four extents at any one time If the file has more than four extents additional directory accessing will be done to shift the 4 byte quads to make space for the new extent information Although the system can handle a file of any number of extents i E t is wise to keep the total number of extents small The most efficient file s one with a single extent The number of extents can be reduced by copying he file to a diskette containing a great deal of free space TECH INFO FILE CONTROL BLOCK 4 The disk command file load module format consists of the following structure a Byte X 05 indicates the FILENAME field followed by a byte indicating the FILE
304. of the file C gt Logical drive number 0 7 A lt error return code Z lt set if no error RDSSEC Vector X 4B45 This entry will read the system sector identified by the calling linkage HL gt pointer to the buffer to receive the sector gt cylinder to read gt sector to read the logical drive number lt error return code lt set if no error NPQhvet Vv TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS SPECIAL ROUTINES 15 DIRCYL Vector X 4B64 This entry will recover the cylinder number containing the directory for the requested drive It is identical to calling the DCTBYT entry with an argument of 9 A 9 D lt returns the cylinder number of the directory MULTEA Vector X 4B6B This entry will perform an 8 bit by 8 bit unsigned integer multiplication It is assumed that the result will not overflow a 8 bit field since the routine is only used on small integer values gt multiplicand value multiplier value lt resultant value gt m Vv Note Register D is used DIVEA Vector X 4B7A This routine performs an 8 bit unsigned integer divide gt dividend value divisor value lt resultant value lt remainder AP N Vv MULT Vector X 444E This routine will perform an unsigned integer multiplication of a 16 bit multiplicand by an 8 bit multiplier The resultant value is stored in a 3 b
305. operating system through data parameters stored in the system s many tables In this manner hardware not currently supported by LDOS may be easily supported by generating the appropriate driver software and updating the system tables Disk drive sub systems such as controllers for 5 1 4 drives 8 drives and hard disk drives have many parameters addressed in the Driv Code Tabl DCT In addition to those operating parameters controllers also require various commands to control the physical devices These are commands such as SELECT SECTOR READ SECTOR WRITE etc LDOS has defined a standard linkage to deal with most commands available on standard Floppy Disk Controllers The resident system SYS0 contains a series of entry points that deal with drivers linking to controllers However every function defined by LDOS is not contained in SYSO since certain disk functions are not normally used in file access This is not an undue restriction because it is not essential that all controller functions be routed through SYSO routines Certain controller function can be just as easily controlled from specialized application software The manner in which the driver controller linkage is established is by passing a function value contained in register B to the software driver that interface
306. or I O Other PF keys control the selection of parameters associated with filespecs Still others control additional functions which aid in the interface between two communicating users The following explanations should be read and understood fully before attempting to use the LCOMM program The LCOMM keyboard also defines additional characters not normally available on th TRS 80 keyboard These additional characters can be generated by pressing the indicated keys Make note of the following keyboard enhancements HEX CODE CHARACTER GENERATED BY PRESSING X 1B lt escape gt SHIFT UP ARROW x 1ic lt file separator gt CONTROL SEMICOLON lt CTL gt lt gt X 1D lt group separator gt CONTROL PERIOD lt CTL gt lt gt KULET lt record separator gt CONTROL SEVEN lt CTL gt lt 7 gt X 1F lt unit separator gt SHIFT CLEAR lt SH gt lt CLR gt X 5B lt left bracket gt CLEAR COMMA lt CLR gt lt gt X 5C lt reverse slash gt CLEAR SEMICOLON lt CLR gt lt gt X 5D lt right bracket gt CLEAR PERIOD lt CLR gt lt gt X 5E lt caret gt CLEAR SEVEN lt CLR gt lt 7 gt XOF lt underscore gt CLEAR EIGH lt CLR gt lt 8 gt X 7B lt left brace gt CLEAR SHIFT COMMA lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt X 7C lt vertical bar gt CLEAR SHIFT PLUS lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt X 7D lt right brace gt CLEAR SHIFT PERIOD lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt XE lt tilde gt CLEAR SHIFT SEVEN lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt 7 gt X 7E lt delete gt CLEAR
307. or OFF If ON is specified EVEN or ODD may also be used BREAK determines whether RS232T can set the system BREAK PAUSE or ENTER bits RS 232 LINE CONDITIONS Output Parameters Input Parameters DTR ON OFF DSR ON OFF RTS ON OFF CD ON OFF CTS ON OFF RI ON OFF abbr ON Y OFF N BAUD B WORD W STOP S PARITY P This program is a driver for the optional RS 232 board in the Model III It allows you to set the parameters to values that match any other RS 232 devices The receiving side of the driver is interrupt driven and contains an i a nternal 128 character buffer to prevent loss of characters during disk I O nd other lengthy operations The defaults for the configuration parameters are as follows BAUD 300 WORD 7 STOP 1 PARITY ON EVEN RS232T DEVICE DRIVER Sis The Line Condition parameters have been provided so that you may set up the conventions required by most communicating devices As specified by standard RS232 conventions a TRUE condition means a logic 0 or positive voltage A FALSE condition means a logic 1 or negative voltage DTR and RTS may be set to a constant TRUE by specifying the ON switch If DSR CD CTS or RI are specified ON the driver will observe the lead and wait for a TRUE condition before sending each character If specified OFF the driver will wait fora FALSE condition before sending a character
308. ored COMMAND M The command syntax is Maaaa lt SPACE gt This command will allow modification of a specified memory address aaaa If the display is set to include the specified address you will see vertical bars around that byte of memory The address and current byte will appear in the lower left of the screen To modify the byte enter in the desired characters Pressing the SPACE gt bar will modify the byte and move to the next address Pressing the lt ENTER gt key will modify the byte and exit from the M command Pressing the lt X gt key will exit from the M command without modifying the current byte If aaaa is omitted the current memory modification address shown by the vertical bars will be used COMMAND R The command syntax is Rrp dddd lt ENTER gt This command will modify the contents of a specified register pair ED idee cies represents the register pair to be modified dddd represents the new register contents The contents of the registers can be seen while in the register display mode COMMAND S The command syntax is S This command changes the display format from the register display mode to the Full Screen mode In the full screen mode the display wil contain 256 bytes of memory with the current display address being contained in the display see the D command The register pairs will not be shown
309. ormat and backup If OFB is entered with no drives specified prompts will appear for them If drive numbers ar specified th first drive number will represent the source drive andthe destination drive will be the second drive number If no parameters are specified the defaults will be used Consider the results of entering the following command OFB 1 2 Drive 1 will be used as the source drive while drive 2 will be the destination drive Prior to QFB performing any action a prompt will appear to load the diskettes Onc the proper diskettes have been installed press lt ENTER gt and the backup will begin The following actions will take place QFB Utility Page 1 1 The source diskette will be logged in to determine the type of format 2 Cylinder 0 of the destination diskette will be formatted 3 If cylinder 0 of the source disk contains data it will be read into memory 4 If cylinder 0 of the source diskette contains data the information stored in memory see Step 3 will be written out to the destination diskette 5 Cylinder 0 of the destination diskette will be verified 6 Steps 2 5 will be repeated for all remaining cylinders 7 The following message will appear after the last cylinder has been verified Duplication complete 1 disk created Replace destination disks and press lt ENTER gt to repeat lt R gt to restart with new parameters or lt
310. ould result in HIGHS being below x 8000 If you enter too many tracks you will see message Insufficient Memory The process will abort and you will return to the LDOS Ready prompt with no in memory disk drive installed You can then restart the process and specify fewer tracks to meet the memory restrictions If there is enough memory available the disk drive memory will be Formatted and tested You will see the following display Verifying RAM Track nn Verifying Complete RAM Good Directory has been placed on Cylinder 1 Not Real Tim The allocated location displayed the M opera to the Verify Error at At attempting this point you NOTE M Disabling MEMDISK MEMDIS DRIVI Once SYSTEM F ai n DISABLI initialization routine EMDISK drive tion EMDISK may be saved wi clock Stir wW wil should determine t to establish the ME has been established command F B may later ber driver and space DRIVE n DRIVER answer by enteri ng a memory below the MEMDISK d it was before ME to w drive direc here will be changed tly below MEM Unable to disable MEMDISK You should be sure t nabl allocation command with aga 0 rive MDIS Zero accurate ill run brief f abort a and the location X nnnn he cause MDISK drive again h the SYSTEM SYS
311. pec or devicespec gt Referenced at X dddd whereas if bit 6 is set then only the Error message string is displayed A gt Error number with bits 6 amp 7 optionally set KLTSK Vector X 4046 This routine when called by an executing task driver will remove the task assignment from the task table application that was interrupted RMTSK Vector X 4040 This routine block table calling program will remove an interrupt and return to the foreground level task from the task control It is entered by a CALL instruction and will return to the A gt task assignment slot 0 11 to remove Register pairs HL and DE are used RPTSK Vector X 4043 This routine will exit the task process executing and replace the currently execu with the addre foreground app with a CALL ins address in the task control block table Return is made to the This routine is entered ting task vector ss following the CALL instruction lication that was interrupted truction TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS CONTROL 2 DISK I O PRIMITIVES The system driver Th can vary from dri Anyone having need with the function beyond the scope appropriate refere for your disk sy vectors contained in address of the driver is ve to drive to utilize performed by this of this nce manuals stem If y TE relating to our hardware section contained depending on these primitives must
312. pecified under DSPLY HL gt Pointer to the message to be output HL is returned unchanged TIM GI Vector X 3036 Get the time of day in display format XX XX XX HL gt Buffer to receive the time string TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS GENERAL 12 ROM Resident I O routines and vectors CTL Vector X 0023 This routine will output a control byte to a logical device or a file If a device control block is referenced the TYPE byte must permit CTL operation DE gt DCB or FCB to control output A gt Byte to output DSP Vector X 0033 This routine will output a byte to the video display A gt Byte to display GET Vector X 0013 This routine will fetch a byte from a logical device or a file DE gt FCB A lt Byte fetched or error return code if disk error Z lt set if byte was fetched from disk without error DE gt DCB A lt Byte fetched or 0 if no byte available Z lt Set if no byte available KBD Vector X 002B Scan the keyboard and return the keyboard character if a key is pressed If no key was pressed a zero value will be returned A lt Contains the value of the key depressed CF lt will be set if the control key SHIFT DOWN ARROW was pressed MF lt high bit of returned byte will be set if CLEAR is pressed KEY Vector X 0049 This routine will
313. played s Th JCL wil character mus a conditional b not be used to provide for the selection of o to provide run time keyboard i used instead 3 m commen keyboard search for KEYIN can ag his s T t be lt character gt This macro is used to label an execution phase conditional block KEYIN macro character is associated with the range 0 9 and will be procedure the The triple slash conditional blocks tag label triple s ash 1 then lock tagged with the same enter data at execution time but ne or more alternatives nterfacing is used to denote the conclusion of A single conditional block extends to the next conditional block s character tag label is detected Do not forget accept a single in the range 0 9 then the INPUT The character matched in tag the A file if you are going to use execution phase conditionals The conditionals following JCL procedure should demonstrat th of character It will label EE et LL execution From its to incorporate it into flexible and application systems execution time selected during the be the display of a This entry will conditional including any from the be used to character can only is necessary macro should be Its use can be in the KEYIN search phase character or until the your JCL xecution us JOB CONTROL LANGUA
314. printer is not connected to the system the Once PR F the RESE the same LT has been applied PR may be returned to its power up driver with PR library command If you wish to re apply PR FLT it will occupy high memory initially allocated This FILTER program also adds two features to operation under LBASIC The command LPRINT CHRS 6 will reset the system lin counter to top of page This may be used when manually positioning to top of form Also the command LPRINT with no arguments will now cause a blank line to be generated Do not us not inte problems The PR F your line kkKK NOTE x e a CHRS 138 as a linefeed character from LBASIC This character is nded to be used as a linefeed and will cause printer operation LT filter will allow you to determine the format of the data sent to printer There ar 9 configurable parameters used to set the format of the PR FLT output They are ADDLF CHARS FFHARD INDENT LINES MARGIN PAGE If this parameter is specified a linefeed will be issued after every carriage return This parameter sets the number of characters that will be printed on each line It may be any number between 1 and 255 If this parameter is specified any form feed determined by the PAGE and LINES parameters will be sent as an X OC character rather than a series of linefeeds If you use this parameter b sur yo
315. ptly CUSTOMER SERVICE 2 LDOS LIMITED WARRANTY Every effort has been made to assure the high quality and reliability of the DOS product With the purchase of LDOS the user is granted one year of upport at no additional charge This support shall be limited to the rivilege of having the master disk updated as often as desired for the urrent update fee the receipt of a newsletter for one year and the use of he toll free LDOS SUPPORT line To receive this support the user MUST fill ut and return the registration card within 30 days of purchase This support ay be renewed for additional one year periods at the then current annual upport fee Should a user find a valid error in the LDOS system and clearly define it to LDOS SUPPORT every effort will be made to correct the error All support shall apply to currently registered LDOS owners only HnBotA TNHE Logical Systems Incorporated and its associates on the LDOS product assume no liability whatsoever with regard to the reliability and or fitness of the LDOS product for any application All data and or programs entrusted to the LDOS system and the computer that it is operating on are the sole responsibility of the user Under no circumstances will L S I or its associates be held liable for the loss of TIME DATA or PROGRAMS by the user This warranty and support information refers to the LDOS 5 1 x product only FOR LDOS USER SUPPORT
316. r formatted disk will have at most 8 directory sectors Consult the HIT documentation for the formula calculating the number of directory sectors A directory record is 32 bytes in length Thus each directory sector contains eight directory records The first two directory records of the first eight directory sectors are reserved for system overlays This is true even if the diskette does not contain an operating system i e a data diskette The total capacity of files is equal to the number of directory sectors times eight since 256 32 8 The quantity available for use will always be reduced by 16 to account for those record slots reserved for the operating system The following table shows the record capacity file capacity of each format type The dash suffix on the density indicator represents the number of sides formatted sectors directory files per avail cylinder sectors directory for use 5 SDEN 1 10 8 64 48 5 SDEN 2 20 18 144 128 5 DDEN 1 18 16 128 112 5 DDEN 2 36 32 256 240 8 SDEN 1 16 14 112 96 8 SDEN 2 32 30 240 224 8 DDEN 1 30 28 224 208 8 DDEN 2 60 32 256 240 5 HARD 128 32 256 240 8 HARD 256 32 256 240 DOS is upward compatible with other TRSDOS tm 2 3 compatible operating ystems in its directory format LDOS has further extended the data contained n the directory to add additional features and needed enhancements The expert pplication programmer may find useful informat
317. r device Open an existing file or device Close a file or device TECH INFO SUPERVISORY CALLS 3 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 T3 74 75 76 77 78 T9 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 3D BKSP 3E CKEOF 3F LOC 40 LOF 41 PEOF 42 POSN 43 READ 44 REW 45 RREAD 46 RWRIT 48 SKIP 49 VER 4A WEOF 4B QWRITE 4E FSPEC 4F FEXT 50 FNAME ope GETDC 52 DCTBY 53 DIRCYL 39 RDSSEC 57 DIRRD Backspace Check for Cal Cal culate culate Reread th one logical record end of file the current logical record number the EOF logical record number Position to the end of file Position a file to a logical record Read a record from a file Rewind a file to its beginning current sector Rewrit th current sector Reserved for future use Skip the next record Write then verify a record to a file Write end of file Write a record to a file Reserved for future use Fe se Fe Ge Ge lt C gt Get tch a file or device specification t up a default file extension tch file name ext from directory Driv a DCT Code Table address field contains byte number 0 9 the directory cylinder number Reserved for future use Read a SYSTEM sector Reserved for future use Directory record rea
318. r return code Z lt If drive is ready NZ lt If drive is not ready CF lt Set if disk is write protected DATI GI Vector X 3033 Get today s date in display format xx xx xx HL gt Buffer area to receive date string DODIR Vector X 4419 This routine will read visible files from a disk directory that the drive is or find the in a 4 across EXAMPLES ll send the ill send the laced with a t be terminated ETX terminates free space on a disk The display to the screen will be format C gt Logical drive number THIS REGISTER USED IN ALL B gt If 0 will display the directory to DO if 1 wi directory to a buffer HL gt Buffer to receive directory B gt If 2 will display the directory to DO If 3 w directory to a buffer HL gt 4 character extension The is mandatory Any of the extension characters not specified must be rep If B 3 then HL also points to the buffer B gt If 4 will get fr space on the disk HL gt 20 character buffer The information will be bytes 1 16 disk name and date bytes 17 18 Total K originally available bytes 19 20 Fr K available DSPLY Vector X 4467 This routine will display a message lin The lin mus with either an ENTER gt X OD or an ETX X 03 If an the line the cursor will be positioned immediately character displayed TE
319. racters to be sent and received using the RS 232 interface The CL will not normally be shown in the device table but is always available to the user To enable CL simply SET it to an appropriate driver program There is an RS232T DVR program supplied on your LDOS disk Please note that the LCOMM CMD program examples also uses CL as its RS 232 link see the LCOMM utility program Whenever I O is needed via the RS 232 interface the CL will provide it The RS 232 driver program allows CL to interface between the LDOS system and external devices such as a serial line printer an acoustic coupler commonly called a MODEM a hard wired telephone data set a paper tape reader etc Please refer to the RS 232 Device Driver section fora complete description of the allowable configurations of the CL lines LDOS SYSTEM DEVICES 4 THE Your LDOS operating system contains a set of overall operating environment These commands are They interface between th xtremely L DOS Library Command LIB SECONDARY or resides in may delete the Extended These LIBRARY COMMANDS are listed in the They two Each are divided into Library Commands not needed thereby fr The dele The Secondary or SYS7 SYS If the you may delete this The next commands on the bottom Extended commands module section of the The name of the command can of each page Extended Library commands i
320. result of this command would be to send a LISTing of the file REPLY PCL to the printer using ASCII format expanding all TAB characters encountered and NUMbering each new line that is printed IST TESTFILE OBJ NUM HEX REC 5 IST TESTFILE OBJ HEX REC 5 These commands produce identical LISTings of the file TESTFILE OBJ Remember that the NUM and LINE parameters are ALWAYS superseded by the EX parameter fan LIST LIBRARY COMMAND S s The LOAD command will load a load module format file such as a CMD ora CIM into memory without execution The syntax is LOAD X filespec filespec is any valid LDOS filespec that is in load module format x is an optional parameter for a LOAD froma non system diskette abbr NONE The LOAD command allows you to LOAD into memory a disk file that is in the proper format The default file extension for the LOAD command is CMD The following address restrictions exist when LOADing programs LOAD Program must reside at or above X 5200 LOAD x Program must reside at or above X 5300 After a program is LOADed control is returned to the system without execution of the LOADed program The x parameter allows the LOADing of files that reside on a system or non system disk This is primarily useful for single driv owners as a file may be loaded from a disk other t
321. results The TO is optional and may be replaced by a single spac Specifying the filespec RS232T DVR produces the same results as specifying the filespec RS232T as the default extension is DVR These commands SET the Comm Line CL to a driver routine called RS232T DVR This is an actual LDOS driver program and is described in the DEVICE DRIVER section The parameters BAUD and WORD are valid parameters of the RS232T DVR program All I O to from the Comm Line will be sent through this driver routine and be properly dealt with to be sent out the RS 232 interface ET KI INKEY F 64 This command SETs the keyboard KI to auser driver program named INKEY DVR and passes the parameter F 64 to the driver program ET PR SERIALPR This command would SET PR the line printer to a driver program named SERIALPR DVR The driver program might be a serial printer driver that use of a serial SET LIBRARY COMMAND 2 buffer fora The SPOOL command establishes a FIFO First In First Out specified device usually a line printer The syntax is SPOOL devspec TO filespec MEM aa DISK bb SPOOL devspec OFF devspec is any valid LDOS device filespec is an optional LDOS filespec OFF turns off the SPOOLer and RESETs devspec MEM Memory to be used by the SPOOLer DISK Disk space to be used by the SPOOLer 0 to bb aa Amount of memory to be used in blocks of 1K 1024 bytes 1K is automatically used bb Amo
322. rm a triad pointer to the byte position immediately following the last byte written This also assumes that programmers interfacing in machine language properly maintain the next record number NRN offset pointer when the file is closed Contains the logical record length LRL specified when the file was initially generated or subsequently changed with a CLONE parameter DIR 5 through DIR 12 Contain the name field of the filespec The file name will be left justified buffered with trailing blanks DIR 13 through DIR 15 Contain the extension field of the filespec As in the name field it is left justified buffered with trailing blanks TECH INFO DIRECTORY RECORDS 3 DIR 16 amp DIR 17 The UPDATE password hash code is contained in this field DIR 18 amp DIR 19 The ACCESS password hash code is contained in this field The protection level in DIR 0O is associated with this password DIR 20 amp DIR 21 This field contains the ending record number ERN which is based on full sectors If the ERN is zero it indicates a file where no writing has taken place or the file was not closed properly If the LRL is not 256 the ERN value represents the sector where the EOF occurs Actually use ERN l to account for a value relative to sector 0 of the file DIR 22 amp DIR 23 This is the first extent field Its contents tell you what cylinder stores the first granule
323. rrect the excess cylinder byte Set the grans cylinder byte GAT X CC Strip the high bit from disk track 0 sector 0 byte 3 Directory track byte Write an LDOS boot sector onto the disk program will update LDOS versions earlier than Model I 5 0 2 to correct the DAM It will also perform all 4 functions on Model I TRSDOS 2 3 disks ELEn the he REPAIR utility MUST be done to make these disks readable by the Model However be aware that a REPAIRed TRSDOS disk will not be readable on Model I by TRSDOS 2 3 Model I LDOS owners will have information on how to make TRSDOS 2 3 read ither th old or the new DAM Compatibility with operating systems other than TRSDOS is not guaranteed utili At pr progr IMPORTANT The REPAIR utility should NOT be used on Model III TRSDOS Use the CONV ty to remove programs and data from a Model III TRSDOS diskette esent the ALIEN parameter is the only parameter allowed The REPAIR am may be expanded in the future to perform other functions involving the directory REPAIR UTILITY ays OFB This utility is designed to allow for a backup with format to be performed Only floppy drives may be used and the backup performed must be mirror image The syntax is QOFB s d parm parm parm s is the Source drive The colon is optional d is the Destination drive The colon is optional The following optional parameter
324. rren of the real time clock TIME LIBRARY COMMAND z screen will 20 minutes and 22 seconds after the where you ime that the time in the ect time his will d is used s used or the real t setting This command displays the user s Program Counter address PC register of the Z 80 processor in the upper right corner of the video display The syntax is TRACE TRACE ON TRACE OFF abbr NON C This command will display the contents of the Program Counter on the video display The display will be in HEXadecimal format Any information normally d t isplayed on the top line print locations 45 48 will be overwritten by he TRACE display The display is constantly updated as a background task The TRACE command is primarily useful during execution of assembly language programs The allowable commands are TRACE ON Turns the TRACE on TRACE OFF urns the TRACE off TRAC Turns the TRAC E E on the default parameter being ON NOTE TRACE will not function properly when the display is in the 32 character mode TRACE LIBRARY COMMAND The VERIFY command forces all disk writes to be VERIFYed with a read after write operation The syntax is VERIFY flag flag is the parameter ON or OFF abbr NONE he VERIFY command will determine whether or not writes to a dis
325. rrently resident in high memory See the SYSTEM SYSRES library command for details on how to reside these overlays See FILTER ROUTE SET LINK RESET SYSTEM and COPY for more detailed information on the devices and their drivers DEVICE LIBRARY COMMAND 3 This is the command which allows the examination of a disk DIRectory Several parameters are allowed to set the type of data that will be displayed as well as the class of file to be processed and where the output is to be directed video or printer The syntax is DIR d A I S P N D aa DIR filespec d A I S P N D aa DIR partspec with wec d A 1I S P N D aa DIR partspec with wcc d A I S P N D aa wec WildCard Character lt gt used as required for masking characters d Optional drive specification SWITCHES A Display the DIRectory in full Allocation format I Display the INVisible files S Display the System files P Direct output to the Printer N Non stop display mode will not pause after each 15 lines Assumed if P is selected D M1 D1 Y1 M2 D2 Y2 will display those files whose MOD dates fall between the two dates specified inclusive M1 D1 Y1 will display those files whose MOD dates are equal to the date specified M1 D1 Y1 will display those files whose MOD dates are less than or equal to the date specified M1 D1 Y1 will displa
326. rror Do not use the parameter unless you are absolutely sure that no errors exist The default values for the line and increment parameters are as follows aaaa 1 bbbb 20 cece 20 dddd 65529 LBASIC 9 CMD X LBASIC CROSS REFERENCE This LBASIC feature will produce a cross reference of variables and line numbers for your LBASIC program currently in memory The syntax is CMD X devspec filespec parameter lt title gt devspec filespec is the device or file the listing will be sent to If not specified it will go to the screen parameter specifies Variables or Lines as follows V all Variables variable only the variable specified L all Line numbers number only the line number specified lt title gt an optional title to be printed on the top of each page LBASIC OV2 must be present on a disk or a Program Not Found error will occur You cannot have a line number zero 0 if you wish to use the cross reference utility This cross reference feature will allow you to produce a list of the variable and line number references of an LBASIC program This list may be sent to any device in the system such as the DO video screen PR line printer etc It may also be sent directly to a specified disk file Parameters are allowed to determine which variables or line numbers will be listed If no parameter is specified all variables and line numbers
327. ructions for its use may be found in the Library Command section of this manual A JCL file is processed in a two phase procedure In the first phase called the compile phase four basic operations will take place 1 Various options available to dynamically modify the resultant JCL are examined 2 User entered parameters are parsed and dealt with 3 Token strings are operated on 4 Conditional blocks of JCL are either utilized or not depending on the logic of token operators If all parameters in your JCL file are constant such as the SETCL JCL discussed earlier no compilation is necessary The DO command includes a method of forcing the JCL processor to completely skip the compile phase This method is explained in the DO Library Command section Bear in mind that if your JCL contains language that requires compilation skipping the compile phase will most likely result in failure of the JCL execution At best the JCL execution phase will abort In the execution phase the LDOS JCL execution overlay SYS11 SYS will be called upon to carry out your commands This phase also provides additional capabilities and functions Of particular importance is the execution phase conditional blocks which can be used to provide run time menus or other run time variations of the JCL This phase also provides for flashing prompts time delays and alerting tones JCL USED WITH LBASIC One final note
328. s high order DCBt 3 System use DCB 4 System use DCB 5 System use DCBt 6 System use DCB 7 Cursor blink switch O0O solid 1 blink DODCBS X 401D X 4024 Video Display Device Control Block DCB 0 Device type DCB 1 Driver address low order DCBt 2 Driver address high order DCBt 3 Cursor position low order DCBt 4 Cursor position high order DCB 5 Character at cursor position if any DCB 6 Cursor character DCB 7 System use PRDCBS X 4025 X 402C Printer Device Control Block DCBt O Device type DCB 1 Driver address low order DCBt 2 Driver address high order DCBt 3 Physical maximum of lines per page DCBt 4 Counter of lines printed on current page DCB 5 System use DCBt 6 System use DCB 7 System use TECH INFO RAM STORAGE ASSIGNMENTS a JLDCBS X 42C2 X 42C7 Joblog Device Control Block DCB O Device type DCB 1 Driver address low order DCBt 2 Driver address high order DCB 3 Unused DCB 4 Unused DCB 5 Unused SIDCBS X 42C8 X 42CD Standard Input Device Control Block DCB O Device type DCB 1 Driver address low order DCBt 2 Driver address high order DCB 3 Unused DCB 4 Unused DCB 5 Unused SODCBS X 42CE X142D3 Standard Output Device Control Block DCB O D
329. s is assigned as a default password for both access and update The parameters UPD ACC PROT VIS and INV may be abbreviated to their first character U A Pj Ny and I respectively The levels of PROTection abbreviated P may be abbreviated to their first TWO characters KI used instead of KILL EX used instead of EXEC etc The word which follows the ACC is the ACCess password and will grant ACCess up to and including the level of PROTection that is specified The password that follows the UPD is the UPDate password and always allows FULL access to the file If the VIS or INV parameters are not specified in an ATTRIB command they will remain unchanged If the file is currently VISible it will remain so and vice versa ATTRIB sets or changes the protection of a file which already exists ona disk Ther are several ways to use this feature Her are som xamples of the use of ATTRIB ATTRIB CUSTFI ATTRIB CUSTFI E DA E DA ACC UPD BOSSMAN PROT READ VIS A U BOSSMAN P RE V P30 r 0 This will protect the file CUSTFILE DAT on drive 0 so that it can only be READ by a file read routine No password will be required to open and READ the fil becaus the ACCess password has been set to null by placing no password after ACC It can t be changed or written to in any way unless the UPDate password BOSSMAN is used when specifying the file in
330. s may be used ALL parameter used to specify whether all cylinders of the source disk will be read and copied to the destination disk or only allocated cylinders will be used The switch ON or OFF may be specified with the default being OFF vl1 parameter used to specify whether or not a verify of the destination disk is to be performed on the 1st pass The switch ON or OFF may be used with the default being ON V2 parameter used to specify whether or not a verify of the destination disk is to be performed on the 2nd pass The switch ON or OFF may be used with the default being OFF QUERY Query for parameters not specified The switch ON or OFF may be used The default is OFF abbr ON Y OFF N QUERY Q ALL A The QFB Quick Format and Backup utility will allow for the creation of a mirror image backup of a source disk without having to format the destination disk prior to executing the backup The normal means by which a mirror image backup is made using LDOS is to first format a diskette using the FORMAT utility and then use the BACKUP utility to perform the backup The limitations of the QFB utility are as follows 1 Two distinct floppy drives must be used 2 The source diskette must have been formatted using the LDOS 5 1 x FORMAT utility and cannot contain any non standard format 3 QFB will run exclusively on LDOS 5 1 x versions 5 1 3 or later QFB will perform a Single pass f
331. s physical position in the command line All other parameters will be acted upon before the actual GO is done The following restrictions are placed on the WORD and BYTE parameters X 0000 or decimal value 0 WORD Cannot E Cannot X FF or decimal value 255 BYTE Refer to the following examples and descriptions MEMORY with no parameters will display HIGHS highest unused memory location in the format X nnnn MEMORY LIBRARY COMMAND 2 MEMORY HIGH X EOOO This command would set HIGHS to memory address X E000 as long as the existing HIGHS was above this location The MEMORY command will only move HIGHS lower in memory The RESET command will allow you to RESET HIGHS to the top of memory MEMORY ADD X 4049 This command will display the contents of memory locations X 4049 and X 404A The display will be in the following format X 4049 16457 X OOEO HIGH X E000 aaaa bbbbb CEG dddd aaaa is the ADDress specified in HEX notation bbbb is the decimal equivalent of ADD cccc is the contents of ADDress and ADDress 1 in LO HI format dddd is the current HIGHS address MEMORY ADD X E100 WORD X OA3E This command will modify memory locations ADD X E100 and ADD 1 X E101 changing them to the value of WORD They will be modified in stand
332. s to the controller Sixteen functions have been defined within LDOS The following table briefly describes these functions HEX DEC FUNCTION OPERATION PERFORMED X 00 0 NO Operation Tests if drive is assigned in DCT X O1 E SELECT 2 vod naea new drive and return status X 02 28S INI Ths ice rn ae set to cylinder 0 restore set side 0 X 03 3 RESET se ele eus eas the Floppy Disk Controller X 04 A oes REG TOR goian nitis issue FDC RESTORE command X Q5 Bx m JS TE PINS saneras aes issue FDC STEP IN command X 06 ba Eha SEERA a 3 sntiere cave els seek a cylinder X O7 T OT SUB SY oda site ene che test if requested drive is busy x 08 8 RDADR s sta 8 ee des read sector header information x 09 9 RDS EG oa sxe A ie eaa read sector command X OA TO VERSE Cie 5 sce euaeis ds verify if sector readable X OB Tal SRD CVI paossa issue an FDC cylinder read command Xx OC T2 REFORMAT 4 239 h 5 0 format the device X OD 13 WRSEC 8 see eee os write a sector X OE 14 WRGYS Petes lets dens write a system sector e g directory X OF TS WRC Inea ieu issue an FDC cylinder write command A detailed explanation of interfacing to various controllers is beyond the scope of this reference manual Furthermore the support staff cannot respond to questions relating to the design of specialized software drivers It is to be understood that complex controller interfacing be undertaken only by those having the necessary assemb
333. set as be VISible whether the source file initially was or not is entered on the command line the destination file will have this password set as its UPDate and ACCess no password is specified for the source or destination The correct ATTRIBu ATTRIB command destination will have no password protection set tes for the destination file may be re applied with the COPY LIBRARY COMMAND 6 Th requested by the parameters is allows the creation ofa The syntax i command file s of the type and size that is LRL This is the Logical Rec It must be an integer i default LRL 256 REC to be allocated to the SIZE This is the amount of blocks that the file i SIZE should not be spe H abbr LRL RI EC R SIZE S ig This is the number of R CREATE filespec LRL aaa REC bbbb SIZE cccc ord Length to be used n the range 1 to 256 ECords of length LRL file space in K 1024 byte s to be able to hold cified if LRL or REC are Th th fi space on the disk wil dynamically decrease is The CR F EA command is used to EATE P pre CR a file of a specified type and size allows the file to be as u e le n contiguo umber of disk accesses that must This pre CREATE of a file also ll be available for F u s as possible on the disk and limits b
334. slightly slower than a less sophisticated system which has more of its file access routines always resident in memory The use of overlays also requires that a SYSTEM diskette always be available in drive 0 the system drive Since the diskette containing the operating system and its utilities leaves little space available to the user it is useful to be able to remove certain parts of the system software not needed while a particular application is running In fact you will discover that your day to day operations will only need a minimal LDOS configuration The greater the number of system functions unnecessary for your application the more space you can have available for a working system diskette The LDOS Utilities will not be discussed in this section You should have enough information in the Utility section of the manual to determine which Utilities you will need on your working disk The following will describe the functions performed by each system OVERLAY identified in an LDOS DIR command using the SYS parameter by the file extension SYS If you need to remove a SYS file use the LDOS PURGE command which can be used to purge system files without knowing the file s UPDATE password you only have to know the disk s Master Password SYS0 SYS This is not an overlay It contains the resident part of the operating system SYSRES It is essential that any disk used for BOOTing the s
335. so be present removed if no renumbering or cross referencing will be done The presence of any Utility upon the user s individual needs Most configuration file with the SYSTEM SYSGEN command programs won t be needed in run time applications Driver The passwords for LDOS files are as follows System files SYS Update password WOLVES Filter files FLT Update password GSLTD Driver files DVR Update password GSLTD Utility files CMD Update password RRW3 LBASIC Update password BASIC LBASIC overlays OVS Update password BASIC CONFIG SYS Update password CCC MASTER PASSWORD RSOLTOFF allows access to any file Spelled with zeros GETTING STARTED 4 SYS 0 may be removed from any disk not used for BOOTing OV1 a or Filter program is to of the LDOS features ca so the Driver Library command DEBUGger is not nd OV2 may be tally dependent n be saved ina and Filter if your printer doesn t show the difference The LDOS User s manual is set up to be easily used and updated It can be grouped into SIX distinct sections each containing information on a specific group of operating instruction types These sections can be identified by Section Identifier title blocks printed directly above the page numbers tTNAN ECTION 1 gt is made up of general information about the LDOS system It ontains
336. ssion LCOMM initializes in the full duplex or DUPLEX OFF state The PF key is also one that operates in concert with the ON and OFF keys If you want to go to half duplex after LCOMM initializes you must depress the lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt keys followed by the lt CLR gt lt gt keys ECHO This wil lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt l provide the ECHO ON will operate is that will turns EC E is specified be re transmitted full duplex if both ends be echoed back and HO OFF function normally undertaken by a host system If everything received from the communications line This mode is desirable if the distant end must and has no local copy A caution to be observed are set for ECHO ON then the first character sent forth indefinitely at least until one end LCOMM UTILITY 5 ECHO LINEFEED lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt The echoing of a line feed is the desired mode if the distant end is a dumb hard copy terminal that has its own local copy but expects the line feed to be sent by the host computer With ECHO LF ON anytime a carriage return is received from the communications line a line feed character will be sent back and a line feed will be added to any carriage return transmitted ACCEPT LINEFEED lt CLR gt lt SH gt lt gt LCOMM normally ignores the first line feed received after a carriage return If this function is turned on all l
337. st corresponding NEXT Such is the case with the IF mac 1F JCL is denoted by the END macro Each and every corresponding END Inspect the LOGIC JCL example inclu macro for a proper syntax of the END placement within the JCL SET lt token gt A token is defined to be a logic TRUE if it is passed in the field of the DO command line Another way of defining p TRUE is by using the SET macro For example you may set a nave a FO The end of the IF must have a ded with the IF it to parameter be a logic series of tokens TRUE depending on the presence of a specified token parameter field TFTEST JCL this is compiling IF doit SET one SET two SET dontdoit END IF dontdoit either doit or dontdoit END In this example passing the token doit in the par result in the first conditional being set to a logic three SET macros will then be compiled The third assign a logic TRUE to the token dontdoit Thus the IF macro will reflect a logic TRUE and the comment li ameter second in the field will state of TRUE The SET dontdoit will conditional ne will be compiled to SYSTEM JCL Obviously the comment line could be replaced by a very large JCL procedure If dontdoit was passed as a token it would receive a logic state of RUE
338. successful ER Vector X 443C This routine performs a WRITE operation followed by a test sector assuming that the WRITE required physical I O to verify that it will be readable D HI A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful gt FCB for the file to verify zal E A ll user buffer containing the logical record the O read of the WEOF Vector X 445B This routine will force the system to update the directory entry with the current end of file information DE gt FCB for the file to WEOF A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful WRITE Vector X 4439 This routine will cause a write to the next record identified in the FCB If LRL is less than 256 then the logical record in the user buffer will be transferred to the file If LRL is equal to 256 a full sector write will be made using the disk I O buffer identified at file open time HL lt UREC the user record buffer unused if LRL 256 DE gt FCB for the file to write A lt Error return code Z lt Set if the operation was successful TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS FILE CONTROL 9 General Purpose Routines CKDRV Vector X 4290 This routine will check a driv reference to ensur in the system and a formatted diskette is in place C gt Logical drive number A lt Erro
339. t TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS DISK PRIMITIVES 3 WRSYS Vector X 4768 This entry will write a system sector used in directory cylinder gt buffer containing the sector of data gt cylinder to write gt sector to write the logical drive number lt error return code lt set if no error NPQHMUE Vv WRCYL Vector X 476D This entry is used to write an entire cylinder of properly formatted data The data format must conform to that identified in your controller s reference manual HL gt pointer to format data gt cylinder to write gt the logical drive number error return code lt set if no error NPQDU A VERSEC Vector X 4772 RDS This entry will verify a sector without transferring any data from disk to the buffer gt cylinder to verify gt sector to verify the logical drive number lt error return code lt set if no error NPQHU Vv Vector X 4777 H t D Q H e n entry will transfer a sector of data from the disk to your buffer T NPQOQWMUE Vv gt pointer to the buffer to receive the sector gt cylinder to read gt sector to read the logical drive number lt error return code lt set if no error TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS DISK PRIMITIVES 4 File Control Routines CLOSE Vector X 4428 This routine will close a file or d
340. t ENTER gt The position of the relative byte cursors will remain unchanged after the new record is retrieved FED FILE EDITOR Page 5 lt Z gt lt A gt lt H gt Points the cursors to the next Type byte X 01 xX 02 X 05 MOT ge XALQ Hy X 1F of a Load Module File This feature is designed to allow the user to ZIP through machine language files quickly Place the cursors on a Type byte and press lt Z gt After this has been done th cursors will be positioned over the next Type byte Encountering a X 02 will terminate a lt Z gt ip Any string searching address locating or address calculating will disable an active lt Z gt ip For more information on Type bytes refer to FILE FORMATS in the Technical Information section of the LDOS manual FED MODIFICATION COMMANDS Enters the ASCII Modify Mode In this mode modifications can be made in ASCII Anything you can type in from the keyboard with the exceptions of the lt BREAK gt key and the arrow keys can be sent to the edit buffer Modifications can be made by positioning the cursor over th bytes to be changed After the A command is issued the command buffer will display an A From this point on any characters entered will be taken as modifications to the bytes in the record The arrow keys may be used to position the cursor for additional edits To exit the ASCII modi
341. t written to This date will be If the T date was not set then the system will not update the date and will change the signs in the date to signs to show that the date is not current If the file is NEW and has not been written to then this date will be the creation date If the date was not set during creation then this field will be blank until the file is written to w This command will display all files on drive 2 that have the extension of DVR It will be much easier to handle your DIRectories if you use a consistent scheme for your extensions It is suggested that standard extension conventions be observed These may be found in the General Information section of this manual DIR DVR 2 Free space 13 8 K Drive 2 LDOS C gt 12 03 80 REPAIR CMD LOG CMD SCRIPSIT FIX LBASIC CMD P SCRIPSIT LC TESTFILE DAT PAGE1 SCR PAGE2 SCR This command will display all visible files on drive 2 except for any files with the extension DVR DIR SYS 2 S Free space 13 8 K Drive 2 LDOS C 12 03 80 BOOT SYS SIP SYS6 SYS SIP DIR SYS SIP SYS7 SYS SIP SYSO SYS SIP SYS8 SYS SIP SYS1 SYS SIP SYS9 SYS SIP SYS2 SYS SIP SYS10 SYS SIP SYS3 SYS SIP SYS4 SYS SIP SYS5 SYS SIP SYS11 SYS SIP This command will display all SYStem files and only the SYStem Notice that to accomplish this the S System switch was set to files enable the display of system files If the S switch had not
342. tains eight vectors one for each bit of the interrupt latch X 4485 X 44A4 CFCBS File control block for commands X 4500 X 4517 TCBS Interrupt Task Table X 4700 X 474F DCTS Area reserved for the Drive Code Tabl X 4754 SELECT Select new drive X 4759 TSTBSY Test if requested drive is busy X 475E SEEK Seek a cylinder TECH INFO MEMORY MAP 3 ADDRESS ABEL DESCRIPTION OF LOCATION X 4763 WRSEC Write sector X 4768 WRSYS Write system sector X 476D WRCYL Write a cylinder X 4772 VERSEC Verify a sector X 4777 RDSEC Read a sector X 478F GETDC Get Drive Code Table address X 479C DCTBY Get a DCT field X 4B10 DIRRD Directory record read X 4B1F DIRWR Directory record write X 4B45 RDSSEC Read a SYSTEM sector X 4B64 DIRCYL Get the directory cylinder number X 4B6B MULTEA Multiply E by A X 4B7A DIVEA Divide E by A X 4DFE X 4DFF USTORS Points to an 8 byte user storage area E00 X SIFF LDOS Overlay Area TECH INFO MEMORY MAP 4 RAM STORAGE ASSIGNMENTS DCTS Area X 4700 X 474F Area reserved for the drive code table Each drive occupies ten bytes Specific data on each 10 byte area is discussed in the technical section entitled Drive Code Table KIDCBS X 4015 X 401C Keyboard Device Control Block DCB O Device type DCB 1 Driver address low order DCBt 2 Driver addres
343. ted and accessed Any record length from 1 to 256 bytes will be allowed even if the record size is not evenly divisible into 256 All blocking and de blocking across sector boundaries will be performed by LDOS In this way user records can span across sectors to provide maximum disk storage capacity If the LRL is not specified when OPENing a Random file 256 will be assumed Note that an LRL of 0 will signify a 256 byte LRL Enhancements have also been made to the allowable methods of OPENing both Random and Sequential type files If the Blocked file mode is ON each file declared when entering LBASIC will take 544 bytes of memory If the Blocked mode is OFF each file will take 288 bytes NEW RANDOM FILE CONTROLS To specify a Blocked file the file OPEN statement must be for a Random file If you specified BLK OFF when you entered LBASIC the LRL of the Random files will be 256 Any of three Random modes are allowed RN OPEN a New Random file cannot already exist RO OPEN an Old Random file must already exist R OPEN a Random file whether or not it exists The proper OPEN command syntax is OPEN random file mode buffer number filespec LRL Examples of this type of OPEN are LBASIC 2 OPEN RN 1 DATA NEW 89 This OPENs a random file named DATA NEW with an LRL of 89 If the file already exists it will not be OPENed and LBASIC will re
344. the R RO or RN mode to have its End Of File EOF marker reset The n is the buffer number of the file The EOF will be set immediately after the most recently accessed record written or read For example GET 1 100 SET EOF1 will set the EOF of file 1 to record number 100 The command will be ignored if an attempted read past the current EOF was the last access of the file LBASIC a NEW ERROR NUMBERS AND MESSAGES As a result of the Blocked file mode and the extended CMD functions four new FILE ALREADY EXISTS This error will occur when usin exists The ERROR number is 116 BLOCKED FILE ERROR ERROR messages have been added to LBASIC g an OPEN xN command if the file already This error will occur if you attempt to OPEN a random file with an LRL of other than 256 after specifying BLK OFF when entering LBASIC The ERROR number is 140 SYSTEM COMMAND ABORTED This error will occur if an LDOS function aborts The ERROR number PROTECTION HAS CLEARED MEMORY This error will occur if an atte command called with the CMD command is 142 mot is made to illegally access an execute only program without using the proper password The program and variables will be cleared from memory The ERROR number is 144 NOTE The ERROR numbers ar sometimes referred to in Radio Shack manuals as ERR 2 or ERR 2 1 LBASIC 8 CMD
345. the JCL IRS This is an extrem Wherever GAME CHECKE token pl mple 64 characters Formation on how to extend the DO command line field types exist laced within pound sig all string substitution fields with logical operators placed betw tring substitu with t heir E CH Cc ECK GAM it would be replaced by the string Expression fields are also passed in the DO have a logical value of also be declared logically RUE RUE command line parameter regardless of its or logically FALSE tion tokens urrent ERS refer to These are the f string value or in the suppose a DO command li the DO Library aN ns string GAME and an expressio n them n ound in the ASSIGN ly useful and powerful capability evaluated during the compile phase field is automatical string va by means nature it RESET JCL macros These token xpressions can contain distinct logic operators The operators are logical NOT identified by a dash logical AND identified by an ampersand amp logical OR identified by a plus sign The processing is strictly left to right right evaluation All operators have the same precedenc Since the abov remarks have been general in you examine in depth the documentation example JCL procedur
346. the TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL INFORMATION USING THIS MANUAL and YSTEM DEVICES These four sections will give you an overall description of he abilities and standard operating conventions of the LDOS system SECTION 2 gt contains the LDOS LIBRARY COMMANDS These commands are the heart of the operating system and provide the link between the user and the computer They are listed in alphabetical order and each Library Command will have its own series of page numbers New commands or changes to commands can easily be added to the manual in this manner The LDOS manual will never become outdated ECTION 3 gt contains information on UTILITY FILTER S allow you to interface with other peripheral devices Th t SECTION 4 gt contains detailed operating instructions and LDOS Job Control Language JCL and the enhanced LBASIC and DEVICE DRIVER outines provided for maintenance of your diskettes and programs and to y also add many of he enhancements that make LDOS the most versatile TRS 80 operating system information on the SECTION 5 gt contains detailed TECHNICAL information about the LDOS operating system including important addresses and system routines It will give programmers the information they need to build those custom routines that make applications programs function more rapidly and efficiently
347. the base address of a relocatable driver routine Another would be to change the load address of Tiny PASCAL files Query 5 DO YOU WANT TO DISABLE THE INTERRUPTS Y N E C gt A response of E will EXIT the program while C will cancel the request and return you to the main query If you want to disable the interrupts which should be done if the program does any tape operation or will overlay the disk operating system s interrupt processing routine then respond Y else N The next query is Query 6 y DO YOU WANT TO DISABLE THE KEYBOARD D BOUNCE Y N E C gt A response of E will EXIT the program while C will cancel the request and return you to the main query If you want to disable the keyboard debounce routine which should be done if the output file will overlay the disk system s debounce routine between approximately 4300H and 4400H respond with a Y else respond with N Query 7 will now be bypassed as the driver routine appendage dictates the transfer address Proceed to query 8 COMMAND FILE UTILITY 5 Query 7 ENT ER N EW TRANSFER ADDRESS OR lt ENT ER gt TO USE XXXX gt If you want to change the transfer address entry point you can enter the
348. the file to another diskette 28 End of file encountered X IC You attempted to read past the end of file pointer The file was smaller than your application thought This error can also be used within an application to determine th nd of a sequentially read file TECH INFO ERROR DICTIONARY 4 29 Record number out of range X 1D A request to read a record within a random access file see the POSN vector provided a record number that was beyond the end of the file 30 Directory full can t extend file X 1E This will result whenever a file has in use all extent fields of its last directory record and must find a spare directory slot but none is available All available file positions are in use S th technical section on directory records for more information The solution would be to repack the disk by individually copying its files to a freshly formatted diskette 31 Program not found X 1F The load request for a file can not be completed becaus the file was not located in the directory Either the filespec was misspelled or the disk that contained the file was not mounted 32 Illegal drive number x120 This error will occur whenever a reference is made to a disk drive that is not included in your system see the DEVICE command or the drive requested was not ready for access no diskette drive door open etc
349. the menu example previously discussed JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE EXECUTION 16 If the person execut instea also b compil This c the JC in case of reboot auto do demo Example of a menu selection procedure Compilation of LDOS Demonstration Welcome to the LDOS Operating System What would you like me to demonstrate 1 gt Operation of LBASIC 2 gt A sampler of library commands 3 gt Or perhaps the capabilities of the LX 80 interface keyin your selection 1 3 1 LBASIC RUN DEMO BAS CMD S DO exit 2 dir 0 a s i date clock on device do exit 3 LX80DEMO hard eight five sio do x exit Well I see you did not like my choices lib input your own choice from the LDOS library do exit operator does not choose a selection from the menu ion of a program to satisfy some input request from dof the JCL file if the application warrants it The INPUT could e part of a compile phase conditional block that would appear in the ed JCL depending on certain other conditions oncludes our discussion of JCL Following will be usable JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE EXECUTION aes hy een provided al selection can be made The INPUT could also be used during the examples of L language Feel free to type thes xamples in and experiment JCL PRACTICAL EXAMPLES This example demonstrates the way to set up a FORMAT selectio
350. the record of the file Because no identification of the existence of this PATCH will be placed in the file this type of PATCH can NOT be removed by the YANK to your MAST ER LDOS Lbb X nnnn nn nn nn nn nn nn This format will allow patching of LDOS The Lbb represents the overlay in the SYS module IBrary module iIBrary module LiBrary module This type extending its NOTE This type of PATCH Any necessary PATCHes Support Services to binary coded X nnnn and nn represents of PATCH will length should not LiBrary Applying unauthorized PATCHes of this type of a LIBrary overlay in SYS6 and SYS7 location of the desired represents the load address of the the bytes to be PATCHed into the be added to the end of the normally be created by the commands will user be issued by LDOS to your MASTER LDOS diskette may VOID your warranty remove PATCHes in effect applied with the YANK The PATCH YANK parameter will allow you to X nnnn format The following rules will be 1 used when the PATCH was applied The filespec of the PATCH to YANK must be identical to the filespec 2 If YANK is used without a filespec no PATCH will be removed 3 DO NOT PATCH A FILE MORE THAN ONCE USING THE SAME FILESPEC FOR THE PATCH FILE It will be impossible to YANK the second PATCH from the f
351. the use of which is optional A password if used must contain as its first character TIRAN period and may be followed by one to eight alphanumeric characters the first of which must be alphabetic A utility to make minor alterations to disk files An LDOS system device the Line Printer GLOSSARY 4 ROM SECTOR SI SO SWITCH TOKEN TXT UTILITY we wcc WORD Random Access Memory In the TRS 80 the fr user memory in the Computer unit Read Only Memory In the TRS 80 the BASIC language and drivers stored in the Computer unit A contiguous block of disk storage defined to be 256 bytes where each byte within the sector has an absolute location and byte identification number All sectors have a predefined absolute starting and ending location An LDOS system device the Standard Input It is not presently used by the LDOS system An LDOS system device the Standard Output It is not presently used by the LDOS system A parameter with a definite setting such as ON OFF A variable used in JCL The desired fil xtension for ASCII TeXT files A program that provides a service to the user Utility programs usually run outside of the operating system itself The abbreviation for WildCard In LDOS the absence of a field ina filespec during certain LDOS commands The abbreviation for WildCard Character lt gt in LDOS Two bytes in HEXadecimal format X nnnn
352. ting of the Real Time Clock ma aa and may be set or changed with the TIME Library command To enable JL use the SET command to SET JL to its driver program called JL DVR see the section on DEVICE DRIVERS Every command or request processed through the LDOS command lin interpreter will then be logged in the JL file along with the time of the request You may also enter comments or data directly into the Job Log by using an LDOS comment line any line beginning with a period or by opening a Job Log file from BASIC and writing to it The Job Log may be turned off by RESETting JL which will also close the associated disk file CAUTION If the Job Log is routed to a disk file it should NOT be SYSGENed LDOS SYSTEM DEVICES 3 SI SO The Standard Input The Standard Output The SI and SO devices are system generated devices provided by LDOS although they are not presently used by the system Both devices will initially be shown pointed NIL These devices are available to the user CL The Comm Line kkKKK NOTE kkkk This standardizing examples throughout this manual could have been used available devspec device has been designated CL strictly for the purpose of although any other such as RK CJ RS TM etc The CL device is the system s Communication Line This device will allow cha
353. tion of your routine ust be betw ER from SI Device Control Blocks for a haracter separating the DRIVER s DRIVER with the opportunity ameter table andthe PARAM is that FILTER will abort if the device is not FILTER also provides a a lable ch that the DRIVER automatically relocate itself X 5200 and X 59FF to be after your routine relocates demonstrate the technique of or FILTER n the device control block and This can be accomplished by stuffing the filter entry point into the device control block vector address TECH INFO FILTERS amp DRIVERS a But first we sav th xisting vector to use in our filter so that we can transfer control to the existing driver software after we filter the flow of I O Additional checking can be performed depending on whether the filter is one directional or two directional The ROM calls GET PUT and CTL initialize the CARRY and ZERO flags to indicate the I O direction before passing control to the routine vectored from the device control table A driver filter can thus be aware of the request input vs output and act accordingly FJ If you examine the TRAP filter assembly language program you will note that the filter itself takes up little space in high memory The bulk of the filter is a driver initialization routine Although it may appear lengthy its purpose is just to
354. tional the line is they DO command n the command line operations are dealt with CO ntrol woul n will resultant job stream is d normally then be passed EM JCL file det nction to Logic in the compile phase prior labeling procedur by providing an file dur for e parate proc as PROCLIB e field is A Z a Z the lette values can be up in 0 9 colon A label may be identified by rather characters label The LBASIC string value LBASIC eight characters where 33 DO PROCLIB ither upper cas as well procedure would be crea or as th thr DO used to and 0 9 E lower case command 1 pass disk space for even larger JCL procedures can be part of an entire PROCLIB is your disk space availability compiled during the compile phase would be rameter field of the PROCedures on The selected ine information on the actual contents of the JCL contain tokens va except t all A and t to 32 characters in charac racters The cha This character se than a toke For example GAMES ted RS Yo be ECK CHECKE would CH a ERS GAMES LBASIC GAME would be a u nul special n let s assume will be su an AT sign A label t eight sig Upper case and lower cas he letter
355. to the LRL of the file being copied This can be very useful when restructuring data files and for changing ASCII type files to be compatible from one application to another It may also be needed when converting a SOURCE file from one language to another to allow the file to b read by another application language CLONE provides a feature that has never before been available to the TRS 80 user When the CLONE parameter is used COPY will not only duplicate the contents of the file but will also duplicate the DIRectory entry The ACCess and UPDate passwords will be COPYed as well as the assigned PROTection level the VISibility the CREATE flag and the MODified status of the file COPY LIBRARY COMMAND ay If CLONE is NOT used and an existing destination file was being copied over the attributes of the destination file except for the date will be unchanged If the COPY command creates a new file any password included will become both the ACCess and UPDate password of the destination file and the file will be VISible even if the file it was copied from was INVisible See ATTRIB for more on file ATTRIButes ECHO can only b specified when th source for the copy is a device If specified all characters will be echoed to the screen as they are sent to the destination file or device The X parameter provides a means of COPYing between two non system diskettes During this copy the user will be prompted to switch dis
356. to the location of your task to a block of RAM called the TCB which contains the he task driver entry point Upon entry to your task routine th CMD Vecto register IX will contain the TCB address r X 4296 This jump v new command CMNDI Vec ector will initiate a normal return to LDOS and accept a It is identical to EXIT tor X 4299 This jump command li entered in re HL gt poin string ter vector performs an entry to the command interpreter Your ne will b interpreted and executed just as if it was sponse to an LDOS Ready ts to the start of a line buffer containing your command minated with an lt ENTER gt X OD TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS CONTROL Ly DEBUG Vector X 440D This A G command from the next instruction the DEBUGger will call vector will force the system to enter the DEBUGging package continue program execution with ERROR Vector X 4409 This vector will provide an entry to post an error message Two options exist ERROR will normally terminate to the ABORT function If bit 7 of the accumulator is SET the error message will be displayed and return will be made to the calling program The second option will provide extended or abbreviated error messages If bit 6 is not set the complete error display is xx Errcod xx Error Message String lt files
357. tory entries that the disk will support ff This shows the amount of FREE space in K 1024 byte blocks that remains available for use on the disk gg This shows the TOTAL amount of space the disk will support in K The FREE command without drivespec is global in its nature in that it will search all active drives and may not be confined to a single drive The FREE space available on a diskette is also shown in a DIRectory command FREE LIBRARY COMMAND z Using the FREE command with a drivespec will bring up a FREE space map as shown below FREE 0 Drive gt 0 Size gt 5 Sides gt 1 Density gt DOUBLE O 6 x cX XXX X X XXX XXX X X 7 13 Xx Satis eine ra bars 14 20 ae DDD XXX eX XXX 21 27 XXX XX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX 28 34 BEN XXX XXX XXX 35 39 XXX XXX sis bests Sess Free gt 82 K 55 G Name gt LDOS5 1 Date gt 06 01 81 In this example the disk used was a 40 track double density diskette The top line will display information about the diskette siz and type The bottom line will show the amount of free space in both grans and K _ 1024 bytes along with the disk name and date of creation The inner display area contains the details of the space allocation on the disk The numbers on the left represent the cylinders The grans per cylinder will be shown across each line with 7 cylinders per line This disk h
358. turn PARAM will set the Z flag if parsing 01300 is OK else the Z flag will be reset NZ 01310 52BA 42 01320 PARMTBL DB BYTE parameter word 59 54 45 20 20 52C0 1952 01330 DW BPARM 1 storage address 52C2 00 01340 NOP table end indicator 5200 01350 END TRAP 00000 Total errors ABORT 4030 DSPLY 4467 EXIT 402D LOGOT 428A PARAM 4454 ACCEPT 52B7 PARM 5218 CR 000D ERR MSG 527B ERREXIT 5251 GETBYT 52B7 HIGHS 4411 TECH INFO FILTERS amp DRIVERS 5 LAST NOGOOD PRM MSG TRAP 52BA LF 000A MSG 525 7 524E PARMERR 5249 PARMTBL 52BA 529B PUTBYT 52AE STAR 52AA 5200 TRAPBYT 52B0 TECH INFO FILTERS amp DRIVERS 6 MISOSYS Editor Assembler 3 4 12 01 80 11 17 15 LINEFEED FILTER Page 00001 00010 LINEFEED ASM 12 08 80 0000 00020 TITLE lt LINEFEED FILTER gt 00030 00040 FILTER routine to add a line feed after a 00050 carriage return for use with printers that 00060 need a specific line feed to function 00070 00080 To filter the printer output issue 00090 FILTER PR using LINEFEED 00100 00110 Roy Soltoff October 8 1980 00120 000a 00130 LF EQU 10 000D 00140 CR EQU 13 lt ENTER gt
359. turn a File Already Exists error OPEN RO 1 OLDDATA DAT 0 34 This OPENS an existing random file The file will be assumed to have an LRL of 34 whether or not it was created with that LRL If the file does not exist LBASIC will return a File Not Found error and will not create the fil OPEN R 1 INDEX DAT This statement will OPEN the file INDEX DAT with an LRL of 256 If the file already exists it will be OPENed with an LRL of 256 even if it was created with a different LRL If the file does not exist it will be created with an LRL of 256 When using random files the LOC function can be used to determine the current file position The format for this function is LOC n Where n is th file buffer number The valu returned is the number of the most recently accessed record If the file was just opened LOC will return the value 0 NEW SEQUENTIAL FILE CONTROLS The following enhancements have been added to the methods of OPENing Sequential files to better determine their existing status and to provide addition of data directly to the end of an existing file All thes nhancements pertain to the OPEN for Output mode OPEN O and OPEN E OPEN E 1 TEST DAT This statement OPENS a new or existing file The file will be positioned in such a manner that any subsequent PRINTs to the file will be to the END o
360. u to purge these overlays from your system disk providing more room for data and programs Overlays 2 3 8 and 10 must be resident for certain types of BACKUPs see the BACKUP Utility section The DEVICE library command will show any overlays that are currently resident in high memory SYSTEM LIBRARY COMMAND 6 SYSTEM SYSTEM n Once on the addres This command will allow you to assign a drive other than drive 0 as your system drive It will do this by swapping the DCT information of the drive specified with the current system drive Note that there must be a system disk in the drive specified this command has executed LDOS will look for any needed SYStem files new system drive The logical drive numbers will also be changed Sing the original system drive will now access the newly specified system drive and vice versa This procedure may be repeated and a swap of the current system drive with the drive specified will occur The logical drive numbers will also change again Be careful when repeating this command or you may lose track of which drive is currently assigned to what logical drive number Note that doing a global RESET Library command will reset all drive DCTs to the default 5 1 4 configuration Be sure to have a system disk in physical drive 0 before performing a global RESET command SYSTEM LIBRARY COMMAND This command
361. uage program It is possible although not recommended to use FED from within LBASIC via the CMD FED make free bytes is less sure command In order to utilize FED in this manner the user should that at least 10 000 bytes are free in LEASIC If the number of han 10 000 the system will most likely crash FED FILE EDITOR Page 10 JOBLOG JL DVR This driver program will establish the LDOS Joblog device The syntax is filespec devspec is Joblog information abbr NONE th fadl or devic SET JL TO JL DVR USING filespec devspec to b sent th The JL DVR program will log of all device al from the command commands entered or setting of the syste If a filespec is used NO file It is not advisable to SY F SETting JL will JobLog and close new high memory allocation will use high memor To view the contents of a JobLog disk file file will be the end of s the fil allow you to closed You may wi the filespec so spec Note that if an existing fi sent to the JobLog file will You may wish to send the in file In this case command line when SETting J to rec ong with a time stamp Note that m s t SGEN y be sh that lespec is formation a devspec rather than a filespec ne establish the LDOS Joblog device eived will b
362. ucture Throughout this manual several words will be used as prepositions separating commands and or parameters They are TO ON OVER USING USING THIS MANUAL J The use of these prepositions is ALWAYS optional the LDOS command will function the same whether they are used or not They are merely a convenience to allow the user to enter a command in more familiar syntax If a preposition is NOT used a space must be used in its place NOTE DO NOT use any of these prepositions as a filename very unpredictable things will result The FILE DEVICES description will describe the allowable full or partial File Specifications filespec partspec and exclusion filespec partspec as well as denote if a Device Specification devspec may be used It will also s c how the condition that the Specification must have for the particular ommand active device existing file etc The PARAMETERS section will give a very short description of the allowable parameters dealing with the specific function This description will g t enerally be very brief as a complete explanation will be given in detail in he text of that section Please note that many command parameters may have a default value if they are not specified This may not be readily apparent as many operating systems do not allow any parameters for these commands One example is the PURGE command with the para
363. uffer to show negative motion in the file Position to the beginning of the file record X 0000 and point cursors to relative byte X 00 Position to the Ending record of the file An will appear directly below the record number indicating that the record being displayed is the last record in the file The relative byt cursors will be positioned on the last byte in the file not necessarily relative byte X FF Since LDOS uses sector I O the whole sector will be displayed and any byte in the sector may be modified Realize that any modifications made to bytes beyond the last byte will not cause the EOF marker of the file to be updated to reflect these changes Position to record X nnnn provided record X nnnn exists in the file If the record does not exist an will appear in the command buffer After entering lt R gt a box will appear below the record number display box The input for the record number to retrieve will be taken in this box Hex digits 0 F must be entered as any other characters will be ignored You may press lt BREAK gt to cancel this command The user may enter th record number without using the standard four digit X nnnn format Simply type in the record number and press lt ENTER gt For example rE th desired record number is X 0021 type lt R gt lt 2 gt lt 1 gt lt ENTER gt To position to record X 0007 type lt R gt lt 7 gt l
364. unt of disk space to be used in blocks of 1K 1024 bytes abbr DISK D MEM M OFF N The SPOOL command will establish a FIFO buffer for a specified devic All output sent to the device will memory and or disk buffers be pl and wil aced in an output buffer co ll be sent to th device wh nsisting of never that device is available to accept this data The minimum amount of memory required by t he SPOOL command is 1K for the memory buffer Th filesp required it is possible When the SPOOLer is active following manner Any ou output to SPOOL strictly tput data which ca c is optional to memory to the specified device is tre nnot immediately b and if no disk b 1024 bytes uffers are ated in the device is sent to the me is sent to the disk information is sent tot to the device is carried on performing other functions buffer if as a The following rules govern th mory buffer he device in a FIFO manner When one the memory buffer is ful has been specified Output of the ven when th accep d by the the data The stored stored data T background task memory and disk space allocation SPOOL LIBRARY COMMAND sis system is PARAMETER MEM As stated earlier th SPOOL command will ALWAYS require a minimum of 1K 1024 bytes for a memory buffer If more memory is required it may
365. ur If the user does not completely understand DEVICE INDEPENDENCE the KILLing of devices should not be done KILL LIBRARY COMMAND 2 This command will display the LDOS command LIiBraries The syntax is LIB no parameters are needed abbr NON Gl After execution of this command the LDOS command LIBraries will be displayed as shown below LIBRARY lt A gt APPEND COPY DEVICE DIR DO FILTER KILL LIB LINK LIST LOAD MEMORY RENAME RESET ROUTE RUN SET SPOOL LIBRARY lt B gt ATTRIB AUTO BOOT BUILD CLOCK CREATE DATE DEBUG DUMP FREE PURGE SYSTEM TIME TRACE VERIFY LIBrary lt A gt is the primary LDOS command LiIBrary and is located in the SYS6 SYS system module LIBrary lt B gt is the secondary command LIiBrary and is located in the SYS7 SYS system module You may delete either system module containing the LIBraries if the commands included in it will not be used The secondary LIBrary commands are indicated throughout this manual by an asterisk preceding the command This asterisk can be seen in the command name directly above the page numbers and on the first page of each LIBrary command LIB LIBRARY COMMAND This command LINKs together multiple logical I O devices The syntax is LINK devspecl TO devspec2 devspec is any currently enab
366. ur printer will recognize the X 0C character This parameter sets the number of spaces a line is to be INDENTed if th line length exceeds CHARS characters The default value for this parameter is zero 0 This parameter sets the number of lines that will be printed on each page It may not exceed the PAGE parameter and if not specified it will default to the PAGE parameter of 66 This parameter sets the width of the left margin It is especially useful for printers with fixed position tractors This parameter sets the physical page size in lines It should be set to the particular form size you are printing on 66 for normal printer paper 6 for mailing labels etc The default value is 66 lines per page PRINTER FILTER S TAB If this parameter is specified any X 09 character will be e xpanded to a standard 8 column tab XLATE This parameter will translate a specified character to another character The format is X aabb where aa is the character to be translated and bb is desired character result This parameter may be useful to translate printer control characters when using more than one type of printer on the same system ZERO This parameter will cause the printer line counter to start from 0 r
367. urce disk BACKUPS between drives of different types i e 5 8 and hard disk are allowed but may necessitate more than one destination disk if the data to be moved from the source disk exceeds the capacity of the destination disk Be sure to have extra FORMATted diskettes ready if this is the case The BACKUP command will prompt you with the following message if the destination disk is fall BACKUP UTILITY 3 DISK IS FULL ENTER NEW FORMATTED DESTINATION DISK lt ENTER gt At this point insert the next FORMATted disk in the destination drive This procedure may be repeated as many times as necessary to complete the BACKUP The X parameter will allow you to make a BACKUP without a SYStem disk in drive 0 There are two types of X BACKUPS Mirror Image and By Class If the BACKUP will be by Class or a Reconstruct SYS overlays 2 3 8 and 10 must be resident in memory see the SYSTEM SYSRES library command A Mirror Image will not require these overlays to be resident Following are som xamples and descriptions of the BACKUP command Please note that in all examples th source disk s Master Password will be asked for if it is other than PASSWORD and is not specified with the MPW parameter If the Q parameter is specified the file s MOD date and MOD flag will be shown along with the filespec BACKUP 0 1 This command will attempt a Mirror Image
368. ure to start up your home security system It will arm the various alarms set up the automatic telephone calling unit wait for your ENTER then start up the BASIC security program Of course you must supply the appropriate software and hardware interfacing JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE EXECUTION ae iy ae However the JCL would do all point suffix to the filespec updated as the job log file the rest It forces the is written see filespec Notice also that perfectly acceptable as lower desired ALERT lt tone gt lt silence gt The ALERT macro may be operator It will generate output to the cassette cassette port this macro signify the execution o use up port The actual is 0 7 wit tone enter the produce the Silence by number pairs number combi CONE number 8 a tone assigned to a e g 1 0 In nations as can fit o Th ton string in Silence string can b parentheses If pa repeating until the lt ENTER gt key tone generation Therefore if y not have an amplifier connecte appear to hang Try the following JCL procedure example of tone generation alert 1 0 7 0 another example ale lt Sti ale exit ll another ja FLASH lt duration gt lt message string gt The FLASH macro is used to is optio ntering a second number this example case may be d to to Ladin
369. uring a Mirror Image BACKUP the PACK ID s will be compared If they are not the same you will be asked whether or not to continue the BACKUP Your LDOS Master Disk comes with the disk Name LDOS 5 1 and the disk Master Password of PASSWORD The source disk PACK ID will be duplicated on the destination disk during a Mirror Image BACKUP If the disks in a Mirror Image BACKUP contain different Pack I D s disk Name and Master Password the message DIFFERENT PACK ID S ABORT BACKUP will appear Answer this prompt Y yes abort the BACKUP or N no don t abort please continue the BACKUP If the BACKUP utility is being accessed from a DO file the PACK ID s must be the same If they are not the DO will abort when it reaches the DIFFERENT PACK ID S question BACKUP x and single drive BACKUP are also invalid from a DO file The following question may appear during a Mirror Image BACKUP attempt cai CYLINDER COUNTS DIFFER ATTEMPT MIRROR IMAG BACKUP This message will appear if the destination and source disks have the same size density and number of sides but have a different number of cylinders Answer this prompt Y yes attempt Mirror Image or N no not a Mirror Image BACKUP If a mirror image BACKUP is done using disks with a different number of cylinders the destination disk directory will be placed on the same cylinder as found on the so
370. urn to LDOS Ready 00480 00490 error handling 00500 523E 217152 00510 NOGOOD LD HL ERR MSG 5241 CD8A42 00520 CALL LOGOT log error message TECH INFO FILTERS amp DRIVERS 7 5244 5247 525F 5271 5291 5293 5296 5298 5299 529B 529D 52A0 5200 C33040 OA 54 68 74 65 20 61 6C 69 6 20 7 54 68 69 65 72 72 20 20 OF 380A CDO0000 FEOD CO OROA 18F4 C30000 69 72 64 65 6F 73 20 GF 6E 00000 Total errors ABORT LOGOT ERR MSG LAST NOGOOD quest HIGHS request ig device CR gt ot the LF input 00530 JP ABORT abort the re 00540 MSG DM LF This filter will add a 73 20 66 69 6C 20 77 69 6C 6C 64 20 61 20 00550 DM line feed to lt CR gt CR 20 66 65 65 64 20 3C 43 52 3E 00560 ERR MSG DM This filter is for output only CR 20 66 69 6C 74 69 73 20 66 6F 75 74 70 75 74 6C 79 21 OD 00570 pea 00580 Actual FILTER routine to shift up to 00590 00600 START JR C GETBYT jump on GE 00610 PUTBYT CALL 0 output to or 00620 CP CR was char a lt 00630 RET NZ 7go back if n 00640 LD C LF else put out 00650 JR START 00660 GETBYT JP don t filter 00670 LAST EQU S 00680 END ENTRY 4030 DSPLY 4467 EXIT 402D 428A CR 000D ENTRY 5200 5271 GETBY 529D HIGHS 4411 52A0 LF 000A MSG 5247 523E PUTBY 5293 START 5291 TECH INFO FILTERS amp DRIVER
371. use the BACKUP utility to perform the backup The limitations of the QFB utility are as follows 1 Two distinct floppy drives must be used 2 The source diskette must have been formatted using the LDOS 5 1 x FORMAT utility and cannot contain any non standard format 3 QFB will run exclusively on LDOS 5 1 x versions 5 1 3 or later QFB will perform a Single pass format and backup If OFB is entered with no drives specified prompts will appear for them If drive numbers ar specified th first drive number will represent the source drive andthe destination drive will be the second drive number If no parameters are specified the defaults will be used Consider the results of entering the following command QFB 1 2 Drive 1 will be used as the source drive while drive 2 will be the destination drive Prior to QFB performing any action a prompt will appear to load the diskettes Onc the proper diskettes have been installed press lt ENTER gt and the backup will begin The following actions will take place OFB Utility Page 1 1 The source diskette will be logged in to determine the type of format 2 Cylinder 0 of the destination diskette will be formatted 3 If cylinder 0 of the source disk contains data it will be read into memory 4 If cylinder 0 of the source diskette contains data the information stored in memory see Step 3 will be written out to the destination
372. vice usually the CL SET to the RS232T driver XLATE specifies a one character translation table option aa the character to be translated bb what aa will be translated to abbr NONE CAUTION To use any of the special functions involving the lt CLEAR gt key you must have SET KI to the KI DVR program before entering LCOMM LCOMM does not talk directly to the RS 232 hardware identified in the system s Devic Control Block tables DCB previously coupled to the RS 232 hardware through an driver Th device LCOMM will interface with is then specification in the command lin The device nam purpose is CL an acronym for Communications Line device name could be used However throughout this section will be used for reference purposes I S I s w the key of t is imperative POOLer shares the is also useful o that the file space is already hile running LCOMM LCOMM provides many same in jogging programmed functions that the SPOOLer not be i task slot as LCOMM when receiving large files user options top row of keys as Programmed Function lt CLEAR gt key just as the KeyStroke Lt PF Multiplier to provide special functions with the A Z keys keys are used in both their shifted is provided to aid your mind until LCOMM UTILITY n use LCOMM has and unshifted form to CREATE passed as a normally utilized for this
373. vice to another logical device to a disk file or NIL The NIL or bit bucket means that the device is ROUTEd to nothing Any input sent to a device ROUTEd NIL will simply be ignored A device ROUTEd NIL has no output NOTE No more than 4 devices may be ROUTEd at any one time Anytime a device is ROUTEd to a filespec a File Control Block FCB anda blocking buffer will be dynamically allocated in high memory The system will determine the current HIGHS highest unused memory location and use the space directly below this location for its buffer HIGHS will then be decremented to protect this area IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE if the designated filespec already exists the data ROUTEd to that file will be APPENDed to the end of the existing file If you wish the data to be written from the beginning of th file the file must be KILLed before the ROUTE is established A new logical device may be created with the ROUTE command To create a device simply ROUTE the desired devspec to another devspec to a filespec or to NIL The new device will then appear in the device tabl To examine any currently existing ROUTEing use the DEVICE command The device notations shown directly below the disk drive configurations will indicate all currently recognized devspecs and any ROUTEing among other things that has been done Once a device has been ROUTEd it may be returned to its normal power up state or removed completely from the device table wit
374. was not END KI TO WESTCS This example w key typed will END PAGE2 SCR TO T DAT ECHO ill perform identically to the last one except that any also be echoed to DO the video screen PAGE1 SCR STRIP This example would APPEND PAGE2 SCR to the end of PAGEL SCR in the following man the first byte be necessary w internal End o used SCRIPSIT File marker a ner PAGE would be backspaced 1 byte in effect allowing of PAGE2 to overwrite the last byte of PAGE This would hen APPENDing files such as SCRIPSIT files that have an f File marker in the file If the STRIP parameter was not would load the APPENDed file only up to the first End of nd ignore the APPENDed PAGE2 file APPEND LIBRARY COMMAND 2 This command allows you to alter or remove the protection status of a file by changing passwords and or the degree of access granted by a password ATTRIB also allows the defining of whether a filename will be visible or invisible when a normal directory of the disk is displayed ATTRIB will also allow you to alter the diskette name Master password and Lock or Unlock all Visible non SYStem files The syntax is ATTRIB filespec password d ACC a UPD b PROT c VIS INV ATTRIB d LOCK UNLOCK MPW aa NAME bb PW cc For filespec ATTRIBs use the following parameters password UPDate password used only if a password
375. will be cross referenced If you wish a title to be put on the top of every page in the list it must be specified between less than greater than symbols in the command line LBASIC 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS TECHNICAL SECTION DCB DEVICE CONTROL BLOCK DCT DRIVE CODE TABLE DIRECTORY RECORDS Era GRANULE ALLOCATION TABL GI eee aut HASH INDEX TABLE 7 DISK I O TABLI ENTRY POINTS sista oils CONTROL lnter is DISK PRIMITIV BI n ical H 7j E CONTROL oreak GENERAL e eh ROM ENTRY EE SPECIAL ROUTINES m RROR DICTIONARY FILE CONTROL BLOCK FILE FORMATS FILTERS AND DRIVERS RAM STORAG AREAS SUP Gl RVISORY CALLS SYSTEM OVERLAYS TECH INFO TABLE OF CONTENTS The Device Control Block DCB is used to interface with various logical devices such as the keyboard KI the video display DO a printer PR a communications line CL or other device defined by your hardware implementation The DCB has three bytes of storage space available that may contain parameters associated with the specific device For xample th current address position of the video cursor is contained in the video DCB The maximum number of lines per page is stored in the Printer DCB H qd
376. will be moved All of the parameters are optional with only the source and destination drivespecs being prompted for if not entered If the source disk contains a password other than PASSWORD it will be prompted for if not passed with the MPW parameter BACKUP will remove the MOD flags from any source drive files that contain them If the source disk is write protected the following message will appear CAN T CLEAR MOD FLAGS SOURCE DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED Be aware that the MOD flags will not be removed if this is the case T The BACKUP command utilizes three types of BACKUPs They are MIRROR IMAGE BACKUP BACKUP BY CLASS and BACKUP RECONSTRUCT The type of BACKUP will be determined in part from the drive information contained in the system s Drive Code Table The following rules will determin th type of BACKUP that will take place 1 Mirror Image BACKUPS may only b done between drives with matching configurations of SIDES DENSITY and drive type 5 1 4 8 or hard 2 Specifying any parameters except X or MPW or specifying a filespec partspec or wcc will cause a BACKUP By Class to occur 3 Backups between drives of different configurations will cause a BACKUP Reconstruct to be invoked if a BACKUP By Class was not specified 4 BACKUP By Class and BACKUP Reconstruct function identically The BACKUP command will function two separate ways in r
377. with switch being either ON or OFF A string variable or expression may also be used CMD D Turns on and enters the system DEBUGger CMD D switch The switch ON will turn on the system DEBUGger but will remain in LBASIC itting the lt BREAK gt key will enter the DEBUGger The switch OFF will turn off he DEBUGger mv G CMD E Returns the last LDOS error message CMD I dos command Exits LBASIC passing a command to LDOS You will not return to LBASIC CMD L filespec Loads a Load Module Format file into memory CMD N The LBASIC renumbering function Parameters are listed at the end of the LBASIC section CMD 0 number of elements to sort first element of array to sort This command will sort a single dimension string array The sort will start at the element specified and will sort the number of elements specified The number of elements should not force the sort past the end of the array CMD P variable This command will return the printer status in the variable specified The variable may be any type including a string The value will have the bottom 4 bits stripped before being passed back to LBASIC CMD R Turns on the clock display CMD S Normal return to LDOS CMD T Turns off the clock display CMD X The LBASIC cross reference utility Complete documentation can be found at the end of the LBASIC section LBASIC 6 NE
378. y if they already exist on drive 2 BACKUP 1 2 NEW Q This command will BACKUP files from drive 1 to drive 2 only if they DO NOT already exist on drive 2 You will be prompted before each file is moved as the Q parameter was specified BACKUP ASM 3 2 D 05 06 81 05 10 81 This command will BACKUP all files with the extension ASM as long as their MOD dates fell between the two dates specified inclusive BACKUP UTILITY 6 COMMAND FILE CMDF ILE The LDOS COMMAND FIL and disk to tape the capability of appending two or machine language load modules or SYST that can be loaded with the BASIC machine language Utility is a general purpose program that has been more EM tape files SYSTEM capability of performing I O to disk or Append two or more COMMAND disk into one file This is assembled OBJECT code files of code or also couple together two or ffset a tape or disk file that riginally programmed SO files or useful to concatenate concatenate two or more non contiguo more it A driver routine is optionally appended t disk to disk CoMmanD CMD CIM OBJ machine language command Inherent in tape to disk designed to provide files files its tape are the following functions SYSTEM two cassett or more tap us programs together so they ther hat loads into a region o files separately blocks
379. y those files whose MOD dates are greater than or equal the date specified abbr NONE DIR LIBRARY COMMAND 2 When requesting a DIRectory in the LDOS system many options and switches are available to control the DIRectory output This is very important in the LDOS system as LDOS supports 8 and HARD drives as well as double density and doub le sided DIRectories on these larger drives can becom very lengthy To handle these massive DIRectories LDOS has provided convenient methods of finding specific files or groups of files even among hundreds of DIRectory entries After entering a DIRectory command the system will process the DIRectory request based on the format content and switches set in the command line Output from the DIRectory command will be sent to the video display unless the W P parameter has been specified in which case the output will be sent to the line printer as well As output is displayed to the video the system wil pause after it has displayed each screen full 15 lines of data To continue from this logical pause simply press any key This logical pause wil not occur if the P for Printer or N for Non stop parameters are used The logical pause will also be disabled if the DIRectory command has come from a JCL file executed by DO see JCL and DO The D switch will allow you to specify a MOD date or group
380. yped it in the responses inserting the responses into the Line filespec could be established by WS from within a JCL file command LDOS ished uding LDOS based on parameters the features of the a pre establ an ASCII file incl into JCL processing a job stream for of jobs with that program queries LDOS library command that on variable run time the DEBUGger is a and DOing a JCL single line ina no The without line suppose your line you ations operator entry of operation use to 450 DTR ETCL JCL containing the simply stablish the Comm Line handler identified as KEYIN in the to accept keyboard input from the when the program was run This gives JCL to file a program s requests for initiating the procedure JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE then walking away from the machine while it goes about its business of running the entire job Keyboard input normally handled by the single entry keyboard routines KBD KEY and LBASIC s INKEYS will continue to be requested from the keyboard at program run time and will not utilize the JCL file data for input requests Thus by understanding fully the dynamics of JCL processing you can write applications that take full advantage of the power inherent in the Job Control Language NOTE The LDOS command used to compile and or execute a JCL file is the DO command Inst
381. ystem must contain SYSO It may be removed from disks not used for booting SYS1 SYS This overlay contains the LDOS command interpreter the routines for processing the FEXT system vector the routines for processing the FSPEC system vector and the routines for processing the PARAM system vector This overlay must be available on all SYSTEM disks SYS2 SYS This overlay is used for opening or initializing disk files and logical devices It also contains routines for checking the availability of a disk pack services the CKDRV system vector and routines for hashing file TECH INFO SYSTEM OVERLAYS a specifications and passwords This overlay must also reside on all SYSTEM disks SYS3 SYS This overlay contains all of the system routines needed to close files and logical devices It also contains the routines needed to service the FNAME system vector This overlay must not be eliminated SYS4 SYS This system overlay contains the system error dictionary It is needed to issue such messages as File not found Directory read error etc If you decide to purge this overlay from your working SYSTEM diskette all system errors will produce the error message SYS ERROR It is recommended that you not eliminate this overlay especially since it occupies only one granule of storage SYS5 SYS This is the ghost debugger It is needed if you have intentions of testing out machine l
382. ystem DEBUGger into memory and then waits to be activated Th EXTended DEBUGger also loads a separate block into high memory and protects this area by decrementing HIGHS Once the DEBUGger has been turned on it will b ntered when one of the following occurs 1 The lt BREAK gt key is pressed 2 After a program has been loaded before the first instruction in the program is executed This includes LDOS DEVICE DRIVER programs and UTILITY programs The DEBUGger may also be automatically activated by holding down the lt D gt key during the bootstrap operation The DEBUGger will be disabled during the execution of any programs with an EXECute only PROTection status Refer to the following examples to turn the DEBUGger on or off DEBUG ON Turns on the standard DEBUGger DEBUG E urns on the extended DEBUGger DEBUG Turns on the standard DEBUGger DEBUG OFF Turns off the DEBUGger standard and EXTended Once the DEBUGger is turned ON it will remain active until it is turned OFF or until the system is BOOTed Detailed examples of interaction between the DEBUGger and program modules will be given later in this section DEBUG LIBRARY COMMAND
383. yte register field HL gt multiplicand value A gt multiplier value HL lt two high order bytes of resultant value A lt low order byte of the resultant value Note Register pair DE is used DIVIDI CI Vector X 4451 This routine will perform a division of a 16 bit unsigned integer by a 8 bit unsigned integer HL gt dividend value A gt divisor value lt resultant value remainder value H D E A ll TECH INFO ENTRY POINTS SPECIAL ROUTINES 16 The Operating System Error Dictionary is contained in the SYS4 system overlay System errors will normally result in the display of messages contained in the following list Information on the accessibility of the dictionary messages to the assembly language programmer is contained in the section on system vector entry points Error Displayed Message 0 No error This indicates that the ERROR routine was called without any error condition being detected A return code of zero indicates no error 1 Parity error during header read X rO During a sector I O request the system was unable to satisfactorily read the sector header Repeated failures would most likely indicate media or hardware failure 2 Seek error during read X 02 During a read sector disk I O request the requested cylinder that should contain the sector was not located within the time period allotted by the

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Deutsch - Schuss Home Electronic  Application Framework Business Process Guide  Sitecom LN-309  HERMA Inkjet labels A4 63.5x29.6 mm white film matt weatherproof 270 pcs.    消費者庁から措置命令を受けました対象製品「エアリア」ご愛用のお客様  User Manual - RGB - Afterglow Lighting  Picture Mate 100 注意点  取扱説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file